12.11.2012 Views

PDF. - full text - Dunarea de Jos

PDF. - full text - Dunarea de Jos

PDF. - full text - Dunarea de Jos

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.

Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 5-10<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

STRUCTURI ŞI FORME LITERARE/REPREZENTĂRI ALE FEMINITĂŢII<br />

ÎN NUVELA ROMÂNEASCĂ PAŞOPTISTĂ<br />

Simona Antofi<br />

În opinia lui Mihai Zamfir, proza intervalului 1830–1880 reprezintă „un mare <strong>text</strong><br />

relativ unitar, a cărui formulă internă <strong>de</strong> generare se modifică (...) foarte lent”, <strong>text</strong><br />

subsumabil binomului generalizator Memorie versus Imaginaţie – „un mo<strong>de</strong>l al prozei<br />

româneşti din secolul al XIX-lea”. Explicându-şi termenii, criticul arată că „memoria implică<br />

tot ceea ce se referă la asimilarea <strong>de</strong> formule epice antece<strong>de</strong>nte”, „la o memorie culturală”, în<br />

vreme ce Imaginaţia, o „minus memorie”, reprezintă, din punctul său <strong>de</strong> ve<strong>de</strong>re, „acea<br />

facultate epică a cărei acţiune tin<strong>de</strong> la producerea senzaţiei <strong>de</strong> noutate sub raport diegetic,<br />

dar şi sub acela al caracterelor, al <strong>de</strong>scripţiei” (Zamfir 1989: 70-71). Sub această umbrelă<br />

teoretică s-ar cuveni situată, prin urmare, multitudinea <strong>de</strong> manifestări concrete, plurimorfe,<br />

ale nuvelisticii româneşti în discuţie.<br />

Oarecum polemic la adresa opiniei citate, Liviu Papadima suplimentează binomul prin<br />

componenta Observaţie, respectiv cu preocuparea prozei şi a nuvelei paşoptiste <strong>de</strong> a<br />

cartografia şi <strong>de</strong> a ierarhiza realitatea vremii. Raportul concurenţial Memorie versus<br />

Imaginaţie explică invazia categoriilor literare ale memorialisticii în întreg teritoriul ficţiunii.<br />

Faptul este <strong>de</strong>monstrat <strong>de</strong> Mihai Zamfir şi este pus pe seama nevoii, resimţite <strong>de</strong> autorii<br />

vremii, <strong>de</strong> a-şi autentifica scrierile narative. Dat fiind statutul incert al prozei româneşti la<br />

începuturile ei, datorat, în principal, autorităţii mo<strong>de</strong>lului literar şi existenţial poetic,<br />

valoarea estetică se bizuie pe complementaritatea dintre emoţie, sinceritate, autenticitate şi<br />

autobiografie.<br />

Corelată cu incapacitatea aproape generală <strong>de</strong> invenţie epică, a scriitorilor români ai<br />

perioa<strong>de</strong>i, această stare <strong>de</strong> fapt a dus, în mod firesc, la umplerea tiparelor Memoriei literare<br />

cu încărcătură autobiografică implicit literaturizată. Instrumentarul favorit al literaturizării<br />

este cel melodramatic, bazat pe perspectiva maniheistă asupra lumii şi pe o retorică specifică:<br />

coinci<strong>de</strong>nţe numeroase (regimul coinci<strong>de</strong>nţelor poate fi investit cu funcţia <strong>de</strong> principal motor<br />

narativ şi diegetic, aşa cum se întâmplă în Buchetiera <strong>de</strong> la Florenţa, în cadrul căreia suita <strong>de</strong><br />

coinci<strong>de</strong>nţe face să progreseze naraţiunea şi, în parte, <strong>de</strong>ci<strong>de</strong> soarta eroilor), situaţii<br />

lacrimogene, lovituri <strong>de</strong> teatru şi posibilitatea amestecului <strong>de</strong> niveluri stilistice.<br />

Toate acestea ar ilustra, potrivit lui Nicolae Manolescu, apartenenţa prozei paşoptiste<br />

la romantismul <strong>de</strong> tip Bie<strong>de</strong>rmeier. Comentând punctul <strong>de</strong> ve<strong>de</strong>re al lui Virgil Nemoianu<br />

(Îmblânzirea romantismului), Manolescu (1990: 192) evi<strong>de</strong>nţiază principalele tipuri care se<br />

amestecă în Bie<strong>de</strong>rmeier Romanticism, şi-anume biograficul, melodramaticul şi istoricul, dar<br />

se <strong>de</strong>sparte <strong>de</strong> opina lui Zamfir făcând două observaţii categorice : „Nu cred că, totuşi, să se<br />

poată vorbi <strong>de</strong> o puritate a paradigmei, fiind mai <strong>de</strong>grabă vorba <strong>de</strong> o proză hibridă” chiar<br />

dacă „graniţele relativ discrete dintre speciile memorialistice sunt mai <strong>de</strong>s încălcate <strong>de</strong>cât<br />

aceea, mult mai netă, dintre memorialistică şi ficţiune” –ceea ce contrazice punctul <strong>de</strong> ve<strong>de</strong>re<br />

anterior, pentru care se poate accepta i<strong>de</strong>ea autonomizării memorialisticii, componentă<br />

principală a prozei româneşti <strong>de</strong> început, în raport cu celelalte forme literare narative; iar a<br />

5


doua observaţie slujeşte <strong>de</strong> minune <strong>de</strong>mersului nostru, căci evi<strong>de</strong>nţiază acuitatea spiritului<br />

critic al scriitorilor paşoptişti şi putinţa, ba chiar firescul existenţei meta<strong>text</strong>elor :<br />

„probabil că trăsătura cea mai remarcabilă a prozei noastre romantice (exceptând<br />

romanul) este alexandrinismul ei, faptul <strong>de</strong> a fi <strong>de</strong> la început bătrână ca mentalitate şi<br />

sofisticată stilistic” (Manolescu 1990: 192 şi 193).<br />

În această ordine <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>i, se cuvine amintită opinia lui Mircea Muthu, pentru care<br />

balcanitatea, respectiv „spiritul sud–estic” în literatură, se regăseşte ca stare <strong>de</strong> spirit<br />

<strong>de</strong>cantată şi <strong>de</strong>venită, „în evantaiul <strong>de</strong> motive, teme, tipologii, atitudini şi performanţe<br />

artistice”, balcanism literar. Configurat <strong>de</strong> un <strong>text</strong> cu multiple niveluri semantice, precum<br />

Istoria unui galben, balcanismul literar românesc îşi <strong>de</strong>zvăluie dubla sa dimensiune, parodică<br />

şi <strong>de</strong> evocare (Muthu 2002: 72 şi 79), în virtutea căreia nuvelele paşoptiste îşi asumă o dublă<br />

funcţie: <strong>de</strong> a reproduce/evoca artistic realitatea, conform convenţiei literare a epocii, şi <strong>de</strong> a<br />

pune în discuţie proce<strong>de</strong>ele <strong>de</strong> literaturizare ca şi formele literare aflate în circulaţie<br />

<strong>de</strong>monstrând, astfel, <strong>de</strong>schi<strong>de</strong>rea spre ironie şi spre parodie a prozatorilor vremii.<br />

Literatură a „memoriei restauratoare”, naraţiunea literară din secolul al XIX-lea şi<br />

scriitorul care-o compune relevă „«intenţia <strong>de</strong> a documenta», în limitele a<strong>de</strong>vărului şi,<br />

aproape întot<strong>de</strong>auna, în absenţa oricăror pretenţii <strong>de</strong> exprimare estetică <strong>de</strong>spre oameni şi<br />

întâmplări ştiute <strong>de</strong> scriitor prin sine însuşi sau prin alţii” (Curticăpeanu 1977: 13). La nivelul<br />

scriiturii, însă, cultura, spiritul critic, rezervele estetice, maliţiile şi ironiile prozatorilor<br />

români, familiarizaţi cu literaturile apusene, produc amestecuri inedite <strong>de</strong> realitate<br />

literaturizată, pe suport (auto)biografic cu funcţia <strong>de</strong> a legitima ficţiunea, şi reversul parodic,<br />

reacţia <strong>de</strong> disconfort intelectual provocată <strong>de</strong> nevoia <strong>de</strong> a apela la mo<strong>de</strong>le apusene mediocre<br />

şi <strong>de</strong> a le autohtoniza în limitele unei literaturi ce abia se năştea. Se adaugă ceea ce Liviu<br />

Papadima numeşte „miza lecturii «estetice» şi cea a persuasiunii i<strong>de</strong>ologice”, dirijate în<br />

conformitate cu întreg con<strong>text</strong>ul politic şi social paşoptist, care duce la „relaţia <strong>de</strong> solidaritate<br />

între ficţional şi nonficţional.” Mai mult, în condiţiile funcţionării precare a „instituţiei<br />

literaturii” şi într-o cultură marcată <strong>de</strong> efortul <strong>de</strong>finirii instituţionale a principalelor tipuri <strong>de</strong><br />

discurs–istoria, ştiinţa, morala, didactica, i<strong>de</strong>ologia–proza literară se ve<strong>de</strong> obligată să<br />

satisfacă două cerinţe distincte: să instruiască şi să se supună logicii naraţiunii literare,<br />

aceasta din urmă cu propria sa orientare dublă: cauzală, necesară pentru producerea<br />

efectului <strong>de</strong> verosimilitate, şi teleologică, cu misiunea <strong>de</strong> a asigura unitatea şi relevanţa<br />

<strong>text</strong>ului (Papadima 1989: 147 şi 151).<br />

De <strong>de</strong>parte cea mai prolifică specie literară a perioa<strong>de</strong>i paşoptiste, nuvela – şi formele<br />

sale concrete – se poate clasifica, în funcţie <strong>de</strong> dominanta tematică a fiecărui <strong>text</strong>, în patru<br />

categorii în cadrul cărora instrumentarul literar, strategiile şi tehnicile <strong>de</strong> lucru se amestecă,<br />

circulă <strong>de</strong> la o categorie la alta şi intră în combinaţii aproape neaşteptate pentru „tinereţea”<br />

prozei româneşti din epocă. Astfel, nuvelei istorice, celei sentimentale şi melodramatice,<br />

precum şi celei <strong>de</strong> moravuri, i se adaugă nuvela exerciţiu <strong>de</strong> stil, meta<strong>text</strong>ul care aspiră la a<br />

<strong>de</strong>construi, în special cu mijloacele parodiei, mo<strong>de</strong>lele <strong>de</strong> literaritate ale vremii.<br />

Fundamentat pe o restricţionare a strategiilor narative, pe favorizarea netă a relatării la<br />

persoana I singular şi facilitând, astfel, invazia biografismului şi asocierea acestuia cu latura<br />

documentară a <strong>text</strong>elor narative, mo<strong>de</strong>lul melodramatic asigură, totuşi, garanţia<br />

ficţionalităţii tocmai prin rigiditatea frustrantă – pentru spiritele luci<strong>de</strong> ale epocii – a reţetei<br />

sale literare. Emfatizând convenţia, melodramaticul acomodat nuvelistic permite elaborarea<br />

unei instanţe naratoare hibri<strong>de</strong>, „autonaratorul” care, pe <strong>de</strong> o parte, „intens personalizat”, îşi<br />

tematizează postura auctorială (Papadima 1989: 151), explicitându-şi intenţiile şi<br />

justificându-se, iar pe <strong>de</strong> alta, îşi asumă intenţiile specifice instanţei sale, în varianta Genette<br />

sau a altora. Ia naştere, astfel, ceea ce Nicolae Manolescu numeşte, în alt con<strong>text</strong>, „tirania<br />

semnificativului”.<br />

6


Naratorul a<strong>de</strong>sea intradiegetic şi cu veleităţi auctoriale se comportă <strong>de</strong> multe ori<br />

<strong>de</strong>spotic cu cititorul, dirijându-i cu autoritate lectura şi instaurând un pact <strong>de</strong> lectură univoc.<br />

Sprijinit, în <strong>de</strong>mersurile sale narative, <strong>de</strong> întreg angrenajul <strong>text</strong>ului, care anticipează ferm<br />

diegeza şi, mai ales, <strong>de</strong>znodământul, naratorul şi, prin el, scriitorul, cultivă „suprasaturarea<br />

informaţională a codurilor narative”, „hiper<strong>de</strong>terminarea”, ca instrumente ale<br />

„predictibilităţii” narative influenţate, <strong>de</strong> asemenea, <strong>de</strong> „indiciile privind încadrarea într-un<br />

gen anumit, sistemul personajelor, teme proeminente”. Ca mo<strong>de</strong>le literare apusene insistent<br />

valorificate în acest con<strong>text</strong>, „romanţul” <strong>de</strong> senzaţie, novella melodramatică sau povestirea<br />

<strong>de</strong> aventuri cultivă arbitrarul, la nivelul loviturilor <strong>de</strong> teatru, <strong>de</strong> pildă, dar îl şi „domesticesc”<br />

(Papadima 1989: 161 şi 167).<br />

La prima ve<strong>de</strong>re, Istoria unui galbân, aparţinând lui Alecsandri, ilustrează tendinţele<br />

romantice şi mo<strong>de</strong>lele literare apusene ale epocii, exploatând, prin tablouri şi scene <strong>de</strong><br />

moravuri, culoarea locală, dimensiunea etnografică şi sociologică a prozei Bie<strong>de</strong>rmeier. Pe<br />

baza personajului <strong>de</strong> tip picaro-conform tradiţiei literare <strong>de</strong> sursă spaniolă şi <strong>de</strong> secole XVI –<br />

XVII, un vagabond, un aventurier, un cerşetor care circulă dintr-o pătură socială în alta,<br />

dintr-o ţară în alta etc. –se investighează medii sociale şi moravuri şi se satirizează acid<br />

relaţiile sociale, ierarhiile, sistemul <strong>de</strong> valori, mijloacele <strong>de</strong> parvenire etc. din societatea<br />

românească a epocii.<br />

Actualizând strategic proce<strong>de</strong>ul alegoriei, scriitorul îşi etajează <strong>text</strong>ul, corelându-l cu<br />

două instanţe narative distincte, doi naratori care îşi asumă, fiecare, secvenţe distincte.<br />

Primul narator fixează cadrul – rama – istorisirilor celor <strong>de</strong>-al doilea şi asigură, prin relatarea<br />

la persoana întâi şi printr-o serie <strong>de</strong> similitudini biografice cu autorul (redactor la Propăşirea),<br />

prezumţia <strong>de</strong> autenticitate şi <strong>de</strong> credibilitate. Acest narator îşi recuză, însă, discursul satiric,<br />

punându-l pe seama celui <strong>de</strong>-al doilea narator, un galben olan<strong>de</strong>z cu certe veleităţi<br />

scriitoriceşti. Dubla schemă a comunicării, astfel instituită, antrenează un naratar prim –<br />

cititorul virtual – căruia i se adresează satira socială şi morală a timpului, şi un naratar<br />

secund, real în ţesătura <strong>text</strong>ului, o para turcească.<br />

Modalităţile narării diferă şi ele şi antrenează <strong>text</strong>ul într-un joc meta<strong>text</strong>ual <strong>de</strong><br />

autoreflectare ironică a „virtuţilor” naratoriale apreciate în epocă: mânat <strong>de</strong> o curiozitate cu<br />

iz ironic, primul narator – „autonaratorul” – se auto-ironizează în această postură şi<br />

ironizează, totodată, prin consimţirea tacită la sancţionarea, <strong>de</strong> către para, a „practicii<br />

literare” a galbenului, recuzita romantică a timpului şi mo<strong>de</strong>lele ei apusene. Găsind un<br />

echivalent alegoric strategiei narative a „manuscrisului găsit”, „autonaratorul” îşi îngăduie<br />

libertatea <strong>de</strong> a se pretin<strong>de</strong> un singur scriptor. La rândul său, galbenul–narator serveşte drept<br />

instrument pentru realizarea, la adăpostul unei binevenite obiectivităţi <strong>de</strong> suprafaţă, a satirei<br />

sociale multiplu orientate aşa încât, graţie unei secţiuni transversale prin societatea epocii se<br />

obţine o rudimentară „comedie umană” miniaturală şi se dă o rezolvare i<strong>de</strong>ologică pentru<br />

obligaţia <strong>text</strong>ului <strong>de</strong> a fi verosimil. Pe <strong>de</strong> altă parte, galbenul olan<strong>de</strong>z colaborează, împreună<br />

cu naratarul său a<strong>de</strong>sea recalcitrant, la un „manual al bunului povestaş” (Papadima 1989:<br />

195), trecând în revistă şi exemplificând, prin discurs, suficiente elemente negative ale<br />

literaturii epocii. Rezultă <strong>de</strong> aici un inventar <strong>de</strong> producţii literare sau (pseudo)literare – un<br />

meta<strong>text</strong> sui generis – care actualizează şi ju<strong>de</strong>că acid mo<strong>de</strong>lele literare ale epocii.<br />

Impresia <strong>de</strong> ansamblu pe care o lasă Istoria unui galbân, <strong>de</strong>opotrivă „poveste a vieţii”<br />

galbenului şi „istorisire”, este <strong>de</strong> „amestec <strong>de</strong> istorisire picarescă şi cronică <strong>de</strong> moravuri,<br />

abilă întreţesere <strong>de</strong> «popular» şi <strong>de</strong> «livresc»” (Papadima 1989: 245). Un efect imediat al<br />

acestei procedări este ceea ce Andrei Bodiu (2002: 26) numeşte „teatralizarea epicului” –<br />

formă <strong>de</strong> hibridizare a epicului şi a dramaticului , la care se adaugă jocul <strong>de</strong> scenă, bine<br />

intenţionat, şi cu scop parodic, al galbenului, precum şi hibridizarea cu secvenţe <strong>de</strong> discurs<br />

poetic „împrumutate” <strong>de</strong> autor personajelor sale şi, automat, <strong>de</strong>venite victime ale <strong>de</strong>riziunii.<br />

Exploatând avantajele povestirii cu sertare, care oferă galbenului întreaga gamă <strong>de</strong><br />

disponibilităţi şi <strong>de</strong> instrumente literare ale epocii, a<strong>de</strong>sea convertite în instrumentele<br />

7


autorului moralist (ca în povestea tragică – şi exemplu <strong>de</strong> nuvelă sentimentală cu recuzită<br />

melodramatică – a ţigăncii Zamfira), Istoria unui galbân nu mai blochează iniţiativele<br />

interpretative ale cititorului avizat ci, tocmai prin dramatizarea narării, pune în evi<strong>de</strong>nţă<br />

colaborarea interpretativă activă, „pe viu”, a naratorului-personaj cu naratarul său. Urmarea<br />

este aceea că repere <strong>de</strong> bază ale convenţiei melodramatice sunt scurtcircuitate ferm, precum<br />

tema „suferinţei în amor”, sau „mo<strong>de</strong>lul <strong>de</strong> sensibilitate” al vremii, portretul „canonic” al<br />

frumuseţii feminine, <strong>de</strong>construit cu precizie <strong>de</strong> galben, spre încântarea paralei (uşor geloasă<br />

pe obiectul presupus al adoraţiei galbenului) ş. a.<br />

În ţesătura istorisirii, dialogul inter<strong>text</strong>ual îşi face loc cu putere, printr-un lanţ <strong>de</strong><br />

parodii bine conturate: parodierea mo<strong>de</strong>lului melodramatic însuşi, actualizat ca istorie <strong>de</strong><br />

dragoste a celor două mone<strong>de</strong>, din care nu lipsesc lovitura <strong>de</strong> teatru, recunoaşterea<br />

spectaculoasă, <strong>de</strong>scrierea frumuseţii feminine şi a celei masculine şi confesiunea obligatorie;<br />

parodierea – prin prezenţa unor elemente ce fac posibilă recunoaşterea mo<strong>de</strong>lului apusean –<br />

romanul <strong>de</strong> capă şi spadă, sau parodia Desperarea, o <strong>de</strong>monstraţie pe dos <strong>de</strong> virtuozitate<br />

poetică ce sancţionează reţeta poetică a epocii. Pe lângă aceste elemente se cuvin amintite şi<br />

„reuşitele” literare ale galbenului – instantaneele realiste, dar ascultând <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>ologia socială<br />

romantică, rudimentele nuvelistice, nucleele nuvelistice autentice, autonome (povestea<br />

Zamfirei), precum şi fiziologiile ce creionează tipuri umane şi sociale - parazitul social<br />

(cartoforul), parvenitul prin femei, avarul (evreu), sau tipologii romantice încă active (hoţul<br />

<strong>de</strong> codru).<br />

Întrucât a<strong>de</strong>sea paraua intervine şi rupe coerenţa mo<strong>de</strong>lelor literare sau stilistice,<br />

refuzând „pactul <strong>de</strong> lectură” şi sancţionând, prin <strong>de</strong>sele ei avertismente, suspendarea<br />

nejustificată a naraţiunii şi parantezele digresive, se poate spune că ambii, naratorul şi<br />

naratarul, „se luptă pentru aproprierea «sujetului»” (Papadima 1989: 196). Având toate<br />

atributele necesare unui scriitor, paraua este, virtual, un contracandidat serios al galbenului<br />

şi jocul <strong>de</strong>-a uite-literatura-nu-e-literatura, din Istoria unui galben, susţine opinia potrivit<br />

căreia „învinuite <strong>de</strong> clişee romantice şi convenţionalism, scuzate oarecum prin tinereţea<br />

autorului, scrierile <strong>de</strong> început ale lui Alecsandri au, <strong>de</strong> fapt, un substrat polemic nu<br />

în<strong>de</strong>ajuns <strong>de</strong> evi<strong>de</strong>nt pentru toţi criticii scriitorului” (Curticăpeanu 1977 : 137).<br />

Nuvela lui Negruzzi, O alergare <strong>de</strong> cai, rescrie, meta<strong>text</strong>ual, acelaşi mo<strong>de</strong>l melodramatic,<br />

optând pentru proce<strong>de</strong>ul contrapunctării a două istorii şi a două istorisiri spuse <strong>de</strong> doi<br />

naratori distincţi. Cel dintâi, şi el un „autonarator” strategic, se înclină, ironic, gustului<br />

publicului şi dă <strong>text</strong>ului necesarul aspect memorialistic întrucât, afirmă Nicolae Manolescu<br />

(1990: 198) „ca să fie creditabilă povestea <strong>de</strong> amor, e nevoie <strong>de</strong> această mise-en-scène extrem<br />

<strong>de</strong> minuţioasă, în care îşi găseşte locul însuşi naratorul, introdus cât se poate <strong>de</strong> subtil”.<br />

Acest prim narator prezintă lumea bună a Chişinăului şi slujeşte <strong>de</strong> naratar celui <strong>de</strong>-al doilea<br />

narator, doamna B. Aceasta din urmă relatează povestea nefericită <strong>de</strong> dragoste a Olgăi –<br />

înţesată cu elemente ale recuzitei sentimentale şi melodramatice – asigurând <strong>text</strong>ului<br />

garanţia <strong>de</strong> autenticitate şi încărcătura emoţională obligatorie. Căci doamna B. a auzit<br />

povestea chiar <strong>de</strong> la Olga, care i s-a confesat <strong>de</strong> mai multe ori, iar „autonaratorul” îşi poate<br />

permite, şi <strong>de</strong> această dată, să pozeze în simplu scriptor, lipsit <strong>de</strong> responsabilităţi narative<br />

sau ... morale. De altfel, pe tot parcursul relatării doamnei B., maliţiosul „autonarator”<br />

întrerupe istorisirea contrapunctând-o cu ironii bine regizate, care reverberează în ţesătura<br />

<strong>de</strong> ansamblu a acestei „bijuterii <strong>de</strong> precizie tehnică” negruzziene (Manolescu 1990: 197).<br />

Istorisirea doamnei B, este încadrată, la nivelui ansamblului <strong>text</strong>ual, în naraţiunea cu<br />

aspect memorialistic a naratorului prim, ce se autoportretizează cu falsă candoare drept „un<br />

june brunet care, dupe barbetă şi musteţi, se conoştea că era străin” (Negruzzi 1983: 32) şi<br />

vizează, maliţios, clişeele literare ale ascun<strong>de</strong>rii i<strong>de</strong>ntităţii povestitorului. În acest mod,<br />

miezul melodramatic „îşi creează propriul con<strong>text</strong> situaţional” (Papadima 1989: 224) care, <strong>de</strong><br />

această dată, îl invali<strong>de</strong>ază, <strong>de</strong>structurându-i mecanismele.<br />

8


Senzaţia <strong>de</strong> artificialitate pe care o antrenează stereotipiile temei iubirii (ne)împărtăşite<br />

este eficient amendată <strong>de</strong> asumarea parodică a rolului îndrăgostitului nefericit (sau a<br />

seducătorului fără scrupule, dar numai aluziv astfel, aşa cum arată scrisoarea primită <strong>de</strong><br />

narator <strong>de</strong> la o tânără fată care îl iubeşte), completat cu autoaprecierea aerului melodramatic<br />

arborat intenţionat (Manolescu 1990: 198) şi cu trimiterea inter<strong>text</strong>uală la Balzac. În acest<br />

mod, povestea Olgăi, sinucigaşa îndrăgostită iremediabil <strong>de</strong> Ipolit, femeia fascinantă şi<br />

misterioasă ale cărei lecturi duc – ca într-un alt inter<strong>text</strong> celebru – cuplul Francesca da Rimini<br />

şi Paolo Malatesta din Divina Commedia – la îndrăgostire şi la formarea cuplului tragic, este<br />

situată într-un „mo<strong>de</strong>l interactiv <strong>de</strong> funcţionare a literaturii” (Papadima 1989: 215) care<br />

permite reacţiile cele mai diverse: fie acceptarea „pactului <strong>de</strong> lectură” cerut <strong>de</strong> convenţia<br />

melodramaticului (lecturile Olgăi au funcţie premonitorie şi <strong>de</strong>zvăluie pasionalitatea ascunsă<br />

a femeii, hărăzită din start unui final tragic), fie <strong>de</strong>taşarea lucidă şi ironică <strong>de</strong> convenţie şi <strong>de</strong><br />

clişeele literare în uz.<br />

Exploatând valoarea <strong>de</strong> document autentic a scrisorii, naratorul îşi joacă mai <strong>de</strong>parte<br />

rolul melodramatic şi, ca orice înşelat în dragoste, mimează actul retragerii din lume sau al ...<br />

călugăririi. Şi pentru ca ascuţimea critică a <strong>de</strong>mersului parodic să fie şi mai evi<strong>de</strong>ntă, se<br />

inserează în <strong>text</strong>, pe baza proce<strong>de</strong>ului mise en abîme, un rezumat al întâmplărilor şi al<br />

tipologiei literare a personajelor, ilustrate <strong>de</strong> nuvelă, precum şi al strategiilor <strong>de</strong>constructive<br />

ale noului tip nuvelistic exersat <strong>de</strong> Negruzzi. În acest fragment se regăsesc, concurenţial, mai<br />

multe registre stilistice, „în care funebrul se combină cu burlescul, patima Olgăi cu cochetăria<br />

doamnei B., oile pastoralei neoclasice cu vibratoul melodramei romantice” (Negruzzi 1983:<br />

47) şi, totodată, variantele „pozitive” ale frumuseţii feminine, Olga şi doamna B., cu<br />

imaginea ilar – grotescă a Saşei, cea căreia i s-a scurs un ochi, şchioapă <strong>de</strong> un picior, dar care<br />

„scrie, ceteşte groaznic” (Negruzzi 1983: 47).<br />

Epilogul (pseudo)istoriei <strong>de</strong> amor dintre narator şi doamna B. dă ultima lovitură<br />

eşafodajului melodramatic din centrul <strong>text</strong>ului. Întors în Chişinău, după douăzeci şi doi <strong>de</strong><br />

ani, naratorul face o vizită doamnei B. şi relatează :<br />

„Găsii o băbuţă zbârcită, înconjurată <strong>de</strong> căţei şi <strong>de</strong> motani, care, după ce cu politeţă<br />

mă invită lângă dânsa, îmi prezentă o priză <strong>de</strong> tabac! […].<br />

--Cum, doamna mea, porţi ochilari ?<br />

--Ce ? Ai pleşuvit ?<br />

--Tragi tabac ?<br />

--Ţ-au căzut dinţii ? ş. c. l., s. c. l. ”(Negruzzi 1983: 53-54)<br />

Pe nedrept uitată, eronat lecturată, nuvela exerciţiu <strong>de</strong> stil a lui Negruzzi este încă o<br />

dovadă a lucidităţii critice a actului <strong>de</strong> scriitură, luciditate care a însoţit mersul literaturii<br />

române <strong>de</strong> la începuturile acesteia.<br />

Referinţe<br />

Bodiu, A. (2002). Şapte teme ale romanului postpaşoptist, Piteşti: Paralela 45.<br />

Curticăpeanu, D. (1977). Vasile Alecsandri prozator, Bucureşti: Minerva.<br />

Manolescu, N. (1990). Istoria critică a literaturii române, vol. I, Bucureşti: Minerva.<br />

Muthu, M. (2002). Balcanismul literar românesc, III, Balcanitate şi balcanism, Cluj-Napoca: Dacia.<br />

Negruzzi, C. (1983). Păcatele tinereţelor, Bucureşti: Minerva.<br />

Papadima, L. (1989). Literatură şi comunicare. Relaţia autor–cititor în proza paşoptistă şi postpaşoptistă, Iaşi:<br />

Polirom.<br />

Zamfir, M. (1989). Din secolul romantic, Bucureşti: Cartea Românească.<br />

9


Abstact<br />

The Romanian literary production has for a long time witnessed a ten<strong>de</strong>ncy towards aligning with<br />

the literary phenomena of the western civilization. During the revolutionary year of 1848, the<br />

short story, for instance, which was one of the most prolific literary forms, was characterized by<br />

relative submissiveness to the European literary patterns accounted for in the ironic and parodic<br />

discourse overtones. The parodic style <strong>de</strong>veloped by Vasile Alecsandri or by Constantin Negruzzi<br />

in several varieties of literary proves the transparency of a critical spirit bearing upon the creative<br />

art of literary criticism performed during the same period.<br />

Résumé<br />

On a remarqué <strong>de</strong>puis longtemps la tendance <strong>de</strong> la littérature roumaine <strong>de</strong> se synchroniser avec la<br />

littérature européenne occi<strong>de</strong>ntale, ce qui met en évi<strong>de</strong>nce d’une façon particulière le statut <strong>de</strong> la<br />

femme du point <strong>de</strong> vue littéraire. Pendant l’époque <strong>de</strong> 1848, une <strong>de</strong>s plus fertiles formes littéraires,<br />

la nouvelle, se caractérise par la soumission relative aux modèles littéraires européens, aussi que<br />

par l’exercice ironique et parodique. La démarche parodique se développe, dans la pratique<br />

littéraire <strong>de</strong> Vasile Alecsandri ou <strong>de</strong> Constantin Negruzzi, en plusieurs variantes et prouve<br />

l’existence <strong>de</strong> la lucidité et <strong>de</strong> l’esprit critique qui accompagnent, à l’époque mentionnée, l’acte <strong>de</strong><br />

création littéraire.<br />

Rezumat<br />

S-a remarcat <strong>de</strong> multă vreme tendinţa literaturii române <strong>de</strong> a se sincroniza cu literatura europeană<br />

occi<strong>de</strong>ntală, fapt ce scoate în evi<strong>de</strong>nţă, într-o manieră cu totul specială, statutul femeii văzut prin<br />

prisma literaturii. În timpul perioa<strong>de</strong>i paşoptiste, una dintre cele mai fertile forme literare, nuvela,<br />

se caracterizează prin relativa supunere faţă <strong>de</strong> mo<strong>de</strong>lele literare europene precum şi prin<br />

exerciţiul ironic şi parodic. Demersul parodic se <strong>de</strong>zvoltă în mai multe variante în practica literară<br />

a lui Vasile Alecsandri sau a lui Constantin Negruzzi şi <strong>de</strong>monstrază existenţa spiritului critic şi<br />

a lucidităţii care însoţesc, în perioada menţionată, actul creaţiei literare.<br />

10


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 11-14<br />

FORMULA LIVRESCĂ A UMORULUI<br />

ÎN SCRIERILE LUI<br />

ION CREANGĂ<br />

Simona Antofi<br />

11<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

Formula <strong>de</strong> umor creată prin scrisul literar al lui Ion Creangă stârneşte, şi azi, dacă nu<br />

controverse, în mod cert, <strong>de</strong>zbateri concentrate fie în jurul surselor folclorice ale comicului şi,<br />

implicit, ale umorului, fie pe problematica raportului dintre scriitorul aşa-zis poporal şi cel pe<br />

<strong>de</strong>plin conştient <strong>de</strong> actul său <strong>de</strong> creaţie. În felul său – discret metaforic, literar şi voit<br />

ambiguu – Călinescu remarcase natura aparent concurenţială, înşelătoare pentru neavizaţi, a<br />

scrisului, a umorului şi a plăcerii estetice provocate <strong>de</strong> opera lui Creangă: „plăcerea stârnită<br />

<strong>de</strong> audiţia scrierilor lui Creangă e <strong>de</strong> rafinament erudit. [...]. Creangă e un umanist al ştiinţei<br />

săteşti, scoţând din erudiţia lui un râs gros, fără a fi totuşi un autor vesel prin materie.<br />

Conţinutul poveştilor şi al amintirilor este indiferent în sine, ba chiar apt <strong>de</strong> a fi tratat liric ori<br />

fantastic, veselă este hohotirea interioară, setea nestinsă <strong>de</strong> vorbe, sorbite pentru ele însele<br />

dintr-o voluptate strict individuală” (Simion 2004 : 451).<br />

Criticul semnalează, <strong>de</strong> altfel, două aspecte esenţiale ale scriiturii lui Ion Creangă:<br />

centrarea asupra sa însăşi, într-o formă <strong>de</strong> autoreferenţialitate inedită şi greu <strong>de</strong> hotărât în ce<br />

măsură intenţionată <strong>de</strong> autor, şi figura complexă a spiritului creator. Dispus să-şi asume<br />

public, mai ales în cercul elitist al Junimii, rolul scriitorului popular, autor <strong>de</strong> ţărănii şi hâtru,<br />

gata oricând să înveselească prin anecdotele lui corosive, Ion Creangă a fost, în realitate, un<br />

forçat <strong>de</strong> la plume al literaturii române.<br />

Lupta continuă cu inerţiile şi capcanele limbii – a aceleia literare, pe care a predat-o<br />

învăţăceilor săi, şi a aceleia <strong>de</strong>prinse în Humuleşti – s-a dovedit a fi, în ultimă instanţă, şi o<br />

luptă cu sine. Lupta dintre răzeşul din Humuleşti, bun ştiutor <strong>de</strong> carte şi cu mintea limpe<strong>de</strong><br />

şi severă a dascălului, şi scriitorul în <strong>de</strong>venire, perfect conştient <strong>de</strong> riscurile meseriei şi <strong>de</strong><br />

talentul pe care-l avea.<br />

Pe <strong>de</strong> altă parte, (re)facerea lumii prin discurs refuncţionalizează, în cazul lui Ion<br />

Creangă, proce<strong>de</strong>e ale oralităţii şi <strong>de</strong> sorginte populară – probabil, singurele pe care scriitorul<br />

le simţea ca fiind ale sale – transformându-le în instrumente aducătoare <strong>de</strong> prospeţime ale<br />

literaturii culte. Reelaborarea imaginii satului Humuleşti se bizuie, în egală măsură, pe efecte<br />

<strong>de</strong> real menite să stabilizeze o referinţă ambiguizată constant <strong>de</strong> jocurile <strong>de</strong> limbaj, ca şi pe<br />

capacitatea discursului literar <strong>de</strong> a-şi construi un referent <strong>de</strong> al doilea grad, pe ruinele celui<br />

primar.<br />

Aşadar, lectura euristică simplifică, dar şi văduveşte scriitura lui Ion Creangă <strong>de</strong><br />

a<strong>de</strong>văratele ei valenţe. Lectura hermeneutică, însă, face posibilă sesizarea şi analizarea<br />

opţiunilor stilistice ale autorului, a arhitecturii <strong>de</strong> ansamblu a fiecărui <strong>text</strong> în parte şi a<br />

tuturor, împreună. În sensul acesta, umorul lui Ion Creangă poate corespun<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>finiţiilor<br />

<strong>de</strong>ja clasicizate, cu condiţia acceptării <strong>de</strong> către orice interpret a particularităţilor <strong>de</strong> scriitură<br />

care transferă sursa râsului în atitudinea auctorială şi în volutele <strong>text</strong>ului.<br />

Comparând umorul cu ironia, şi formula umorului lui Ion Creangă cu cele ale altor


scriitori din literatura universală, Todoran remarcă :<br />

“umorul rezultă dintr-o «integrare» a omului în lume, iar ironia dintr-o «distanţare» faţă<br />

<strong>de</strong> ea. Superioritatea umoristului este aparenta lui prostie, adică aparenta lui inferioritate,<br />

care se dove<strong>de</strong>şte o reală superioritate când înălţimea lumii imaginare este măsurată pe<br />

dimensiunea vieţii lui reale.”<br />

(Todoran 1985 : 64)<br />

Altfel spus, notele <strong>de</strong> ironie sau <strong>de</strong> autoironie din Amintiri, <strong>de</strong> pildă, sunt reacţii ale<br />

autorului însuşi, ale cărui intrări şi ieşiri din <strong>text</strong> sunt rapid cenzurate prin întoarcerea la<br />

literatură – „Hai mai bine <strong>de</strong>spre copilărie să vorbim, căci ea singură este veselă şi<br />

nevinovată.” Retragerea în literatură, sub zodia umorului atoatevin<strong>de</strong>cător reprezintă, fără<br />

îndoială, şi o soluţie <strong>de</strong> supravieţuire. Faptul a fost <strong>de</strong>ja remarcat în critica <strong>de</strong> specialitate.<br />

Efectul catarctic al scriiturii şi al umorului pe care-l înmagazinează transformă copilăria celui<br />

mai mare fiu al unei familii cu mulţi fraţi, <strong>de</strong>stul <strong>de</strong> înstărită, dar mereu cu grija zilei <strong>de</strong><br />

mâine, în copilăria copilului universal, iar satul Humuleşti într-un e<strong>de</strong>n infantil spre care<br />

gândurile adultului se întorc mereu, pentru o necesară regenerare afectivă, spirituală şi<br />

creatoare.<br />

Mereu luminoasă, imaginea mamei pare a fi unul dintre instrumentele privilegiate <strong>de</strong><br />

rescriere literară a istoriei proprii. Aşa se face că aparenta contradicţie dintre umorul – mereu<br />

ţărănesc şi proaspăt 1 – şi natura <strong>de</strong>osebit <strong>de</strong> elaborată a scriiturii din Amintiri dispare odată<br />

cu evi<strong>de</strong>nţierea statutului <strong>de</strong> roman indirect a <strong>text</strong>ului, în mod fundamental recreator al unei<br />

vieţi cu exemplaritate <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>stin.<br />

În fond, în termenii Mariei Corti, „pentru un scriitor, stilurile sau registrele oferă un<br />

mo<strong>de</strong>l formal”, iar „elementele care provin dintr-un tip <strong>de</strong> scriitură sau registru” „poartă în<br />

ele, împreună cu conţinutul semantic, o «informaţie suplimentară <strong>de</strong> registru».” 2 Aşa se<br />

explică faţada folclorică a eşafodajului arhitectural din Amintiri, ca şi din orice alt <strong>text</strong> al lui<br />

Ion Creangă.<br />

Mai mult <strong>de</strong>cât atât, aparenta contradicţie se regăseşte şi în structura spiritului creator.<br />

Conştientizându-şi, fără doar şi poate, latura ţărănească, sau, altfel spus, disponibilitatea<br />

intrinsecă pentru faptele literare pe care le numea, a<strong>de</strong>seori cu falsă mo<strong>de</strong>stie, ţărănii,<br />

scriitorul se <strong>de</strong>dublează, suprapunându-i originii sale ţărăneşti conştiinţa lucidă a creatorului<br />

<strong>de</strong> literatură care trebuie să vorbească <strong>de</strong>spre lume – <strong>de</strong>spre lumea sa – pe cât <strong>de</strong> bine poate.<br />

Şi dacă „la fiecare efort <strong>de</strong> construire al producătorului, aceasta [opera] suferă o alterare,<br />

opera îl modifică şi, odată terminată, reacţionează, încă o dată, asupra lui” (Negrici 1978 : 20).<br />

În această relaţie complexă a scriiturii cu autorul ei şi a acestuia cu sine pârghia<br />

umorului funcţionează ca soluţie <strong>de</strong> recalibrare a realităţii care, nu <strong>de</strong> puţine ori, a dat năvală<br />

peste scriitor. Episoa<strong>de</strong>le dureroase ale existenţei lui Ion Creangă, culminând cu <strong>de</strong>clanşarea<br />

epilepsiei, sunt binecunoscute. De aceea, scepticismul pare a fi „fondul <strong>de</strong> atitudine<br />

existenţială pe care se clă<strong>de</strong>şte umorul.” 3 Iar gratuităţii umorului i se adaugă acea atitudine<br />

înţelegătoare, îngăduitoare şi nota discretă <strong>de</strong> simpatie care supra<strong>de</strong>termină scepticismul. 4<br />

În Moş Nechifor Coţcariul, <strong>de</strong> exemplu, neajunsurile meseriei <strong>de</strong> harabagiu şi nu<br />

suficienta în<strong>de</strong>stulare care par a se ascun<strong>de</strong> în spatele existenţei prin cuvinte a personajului<br />

masculin pălesc simţitor în faţa aventurii erotice din limbaj, care o surclasează pe cea reală.<br />

Putând fi citită şi ca un discurs involuntar meta<strong>text</strong>ual, nuvela propune un dialog savuros,<br />

prin aluzii şi echivocuri, între harabagiu şi giupâneşica Malca, respectiv între un abil<br />

mânuitor al forţei persuasive şi creatoare a limbajului şi un interlocutor nu mai puţin dibaci<br />

la vorbe şi, cu siguranţă, priceput interpret.<br />

Mult mai aproape <strong>de</strong> umor <strong>de</strong>cât <strong>de</strong> obscen, expresia echivocă ascun<strong>de</strong> şi <strong>de</strong>scoperă, în<br />

acelaşi timp, un proces <strong>de</strong> negociere între Moş Nechifor şi giupâneşică, fie a disponibilităţii<br />

erotice a ambilor, fie a (in)discretei puteri a limbajului literar <strong>de</strong> a înlocui pe <strong>de</strong>-a-ntregul<br />

12


ealitatea. Drumurile săptămânale pe care Malca le va face, cu harabagiul, la socri, <strong>de</strong>notă,<br />

aşa cum s-a remarcat <strong>de</strong>ja, apropierea erotică a celor doi şi, totodată, obiceiurile – şi<br />

obişnuinţele – lingvistice comune.<br />

Cu sau fără ameninţarea vreunui lup, cu o căruţă (aparent) gata <strong>de</strong> a se <strong>de</strong>zmembra, cei<br />

doi călători vor înnopta <strong>de</strong> fiecare dată în aceeaşi pădure protectoare şi e <strong>de</strong> bănuit că vor<br />

prelungi mereu plăcerea dialogului ce pare a masca flirtul, pentru a-l crea un<strong>de</strong>va dincolo <strong>de</strong><br />

aparenţe. „Umorul povestitorului constând – remarca Eugen Todoran – tocmai în echivocul<br />

care ne scuteşte <strong>de</strong> urmărirea întâmplărilor până la ceea ce în realitate este obscen” (Todoran<br />

1985 : 62).<br />

Iar Mircea A. Diaconu semnalează, odată cu nenumăratele fire care-l leagă pe autor <strong>de</strong><br />

personajul său 5, dimensiunea inedit <strong>text</strong>ualistă a literaturii lui Ion Creangă, respectiv<br />

„spectacolul limbajului în sine, spectacol gratuit şi autonom”, căci „orice ierarhie se<br />

suspendă, orice convenţie este distrusă şi un sentiment al egalizării tuturor nivelurilor<br />

existenţei provoacă râsul «homeric»: conştiinţa plasează egalizarea sub semnul ludicului, al<br />

gratuităţii.” 6<br />

Se adaugă, aici, căutarea structurii sonore <strong>de</strong>săvârşite a limbajului, ca o garanţie a<br />

literaturităţii şi a acreditării răzeşului din Humuleşti ca scriitor. Acel „hermetism folcloric”<br />

<strong>de</strong> care vorbea Ion Negoiţescu înseamnă atât putinţa <strong>de</strong> a crea atmosferă la nivelul sugestiei<br />

sonore cât mai ales boicotarea voită a sensului referenţial, aşa încât personajele şi acţiunile<br />

lor să fie „cortina în spatele căreia inteligenţa, ironia, complexele scriitorului construiesc un<br />

alt semnificat”, estetic. 7 Şi un profil al autorului din <strong>text</strong> <strong>de</strong>ghizându-se în spatele<br />

anecdoticului şi luând pe rând locul fiecăruia dintre personajele sale, pe care le alimentează<br />

mereu, afectiv şi lingvistic.<br />

Restituindu-şi lumea copilăriei pe măsură ce o creează, Creangă se construieşte şi pe<br />

sine, „sceptic şi autoironic, histrion şi narcisist” 8, transformând o practică semnificantă într-un<br />

modus vivendi care nu face concurenţă stării civile, cum s-ar putea spune, pentru că o<br />

înlocuieşte, venind dinspre literatură, cu vocaţia autenticităţii.<br />

Note<br />

1. Eugen Todoran remarcă: „în comparaţie cu formule caracteristice ale umorului la diferiţii scriitori ai<br />

literaturii universale – în <strong>de</strong>zvoltarea ei istorică – umorul tragic la Cervantes, corosiv la Boccacio,<br />

in<strong>de</strong>cent la Rabelais, jovial la Chaucer, trist la Mark Twain, paradoxal la Bernard Shaw – umorul lui<br />

Creangă rămâne un umor ţărănesc, păstrând în el urmele originii lui folclorice” – în Secţiuni<br />

literare, 1985, p. 53<br />

2. Maria Corti, Principiile comunicării literare, Ed. Univers, Bucureşti, 1981, pp. 90 - 91<br />

3. Mircea A. Diaconu, Ion Creangă. Nonconformism şi gratuitate, Ed. Dacia, Cluj-Napoca, 2002, p. 103<br />

4. I<strong>de</strong>m, p. 105<br />

5. „Moş Nechifor e un alter ego al autorului pentru că el înspăimântă parodiind spaima şi seduce<br />

parodiind seducţia în aceeaşi măsură în care naratorul acestei nuvele mimează inocenţa” – Mircea<br />

A. Diaconu, op.cit., p. 116<br />

6. Ibi<strong>de</strong>m<br />

7. I<strong>de</strong>m, p. 139. De altfel, la p.123, criticul enumeră principalele strategii <strong>de</strong> articulare lingvistică a unei<br />

imago mundi unice: „proza ritmată şi rimată, ironia, discursul alert, cu enumerări ingenioase,<br />

nesofisticata plăcere a inventării, toate acestea excelează într-o serie <strong>de</strong> sinonime la nivelul<br />

antroponimelor sau chiar al toponimelor. Prin fluxul care pare involuntar, <strong>de</strong>şi este atât <strong>de</strong> studiat,<br />

al asociaţiilor lingvistice, Creangă face dovada geniului său lingvistic.”<br />

8. I<strong>de</strong>m, p. 157<br />

Bibliografie<br />

Corti, M. (1981). Principiile comunicării literare, Bucureşti: Univers.<br />

Diaconu, M. A. (2002). Ion Creangă. Nonconformism şi gratuitate, Cluj-Napoca : Dacia.<br />

Negrici, E. (1978). Figura spiritului creator, Bucureşti: Cartea românească.<br />

Simion, E. (coord.) (2004). Dicţionarul General al Literaturii Române, C/D, Bucureşti: Univers<br />

13


Enciclopedic.<br />

Todoran, E. (1985). Secţiuni literare, Timişoara: Facla.<br />

Abstract<br />

Unjustly consi<strong>de</strong>red a „folk writer” by the Romanian critical tradition, Ion Creangă created a<br />

structured „illusion of reality” <strong>de</strong>eply rooted in his <strong>text</strong>ual humour. Relying on his active writing<br />

conscience and the expectations of his contemporary and forthcoming rea<strong>de</strong>r’s concerns, Ion<br />

Creangă’s work valued the sense of humour not as an end in itself but as a means of gaining<br />

supremacy over his rea<strong>de</strong>rs crossing over time and spac by paving the way for different types of<br />

reading. nto mean of gaining over the rea<strong>de</strong>r – the real and the future ones – opening the way<br />

toward different types of reading. Thus, beyond the surface reading and the overt humoristic<br />

structures, the aesthetic category of humour generates the construction of a specific kind of<br />

discourse, to which reality is only a starting point.<br />

Résumé<br />

Considéré, en vertu <strong>de</strong> la tradition critique roumaine, écrivain populaire, Ion Creangă met en<br />

oeuvre une illusion <strong>de</strong> réel parfaite, fondée, entre autres, sur la composante humoristique <strong>de</strong> son<br />

écriture. L’oeuvre <strong>de</strong> Ion Creangă – élaborée à l’ai<strong>de</strong> d’une conscience créatrice luci<strong>de</strong> et fondée sur<br />

l’évaluation correcte <strong>de</strong> l’horizon d’attente <strong>de</strong> l’époque – utilise l’humour en tant que stratégie <strong>de</strong><br />

gagner l’adhésion du lecteur contemporain et <strong>de</strong> la postérité. De ce point <strong>de</strong> vue, en <strong>de</strong>hors <strong>de</strong> la<br />

perception superficielle <strong>de</strong>s informations <strong>text</strong>uelles, et <strong>de</strong>s effets immédiats <strong>de</strong> l’humour, cette<br />

catégorie esthétique prend part, par ses éléments concrets, à l’élaboration d’un univers <strong>de</strong> discours<br />

spécifique, pour lequel la réalité n’est que le point <strong>de</strong> départ.<br />

Rezumat<br />

Pe nedrept numit, în virtutea unei în<strong>de</strong>lungate tradiţii critice, „scriitor poporal”, Ion Creangă<br />

construieşte o impecabilă iluzie <strong>de</strong> real fundamentată, printre altele, pe componenta umoristică a<br />

scriiturii sale. Rod al unei conştiinţe scriitoriceşti <strong>de</strong>osebit <strong>de</strong> active, şi al aprecierii corecte a<br />

aşteptărilor publicului cititor din vremea sa, opera lui Ion Creangă face din umor pârghia necesară<br />

câştigării a<strong>de</strong>ziunii cititorului – a celui real şi a posterităţii – permiţând, totodată, o lectură<br />

diferenţiată. În această ordine <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>i, dincolo <strong>de</strong> percepţia superficială a datelor <strong>text</strong>ului, şi <strong>de</strong><br />

efectele imediate ale componentei umoristice, categoria estetică a umoristicului participă, prin<br />

elementele ei concrete, la elaborarea unui univers <strong>de</strong> discurs specific, pentru care realitatea<br />

reprezintă doar punctul <strong>de</strong> plecare.<br />

14


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 15-22<br />

STRATEGIA<br />

ACHIZIŢIEI PROPRIETĂŢILOR SEMANTICE LA<br />

PREŞCOLARI<br />

Filip Cristian Bacalu<br />

15<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

Evoluţia semantică este strâns legată <strong>de</strong> evoluţia cognitivă. Sensul se <strong>de</strong>zvoltă cu<br />

ajutorul experienţei, al predispoziţiilor înnăscute şi al oportunităţilor disponibile. În timpul<br />

evoluţiei pre-lingvistice, copiii îşi însuşesc înţelesuri pentru evenimentele trăite prin<br />

intermediul altor membri. În timpul jocului şi al altor evenimente care necesită atenţie, se<br />

stabilesc legături bine <strong>de</strong>finite între acţiuni, obiecte şi vocalizări.<br />

Înţelegerea limbajului nu presupune doar înţelegerea aspectelor limbajului în sine,<br />

precum intonaţia şi situarea temporală care ajută la i<strong>de</strong>ntificarea cuvintelor şi frazelor, ci şi<br />

crearea <strong>de</strong> legături între semnificat şi semnificant cu referire la evenimentele din jur<br />

(Veneziano 1989; Veneziano, Sinclair şi Berthoud 1990). Semnele lingvistice sunt arbitrare; <strong>de</strong><br />

exemplu, obiectul caracterizat prin lungime şi aspect subţire care conţine grafit este folosit<br />

pentru scriere şi poartă <strong>de</strong>numirea <strong>de</strong> „creion.” L-am fi putut <strong>de</strong>numi simplu „goo,” <strong>de</strong>şi<br />

aceasta înseamnă ca toţi să îl numească astfel.<br />

Relaţia dintre semnificant şi semnificat este, <strong>de</strong> asemenea, una abstractă. Unele obiecte,<br />

precum creioanele şi pietrele, sunt entităţi concrete, dar alte concepte, precum libertatea şi<br />

iubirea, sunt abstracte. Piaget a propus trei scheme pentru inteligenţa senzorial-motorie –<br />

previziunea (abilitatea <strong>de</strong> a anticipa următorul eveniment dintr-o activitate în <strong>de</strong>sfăşurare),<br />

intenţionalitatea şi recunoaşterea relaţiilor dintr-o frază – scheme care ajută copiii să<br />

folosească sistemele simbolice. În momentul în care tutorii adulţi reacţionează la vocalizările<br />

copiilor, aceştia <strong>de</strong>monstrează copiilor că vocalizările lor au un înţeles, fie că aceştia din<br />

urmă au intenţionat un anume lucru, fie că nu. Copiii <strong>de</strong>vin astfel conştienţi <strong>de</strong> importanţa şi<br />

înţelesul evocat <strong>de</strong> vocalizările lor.<br />

Limbajul folosit în preajma copiilor poate <strong>de</strong>termina şi semnificaţia comunicativă şi<br />

socială a limbajului. Limbajul dintre adulţi şi copii („mămos”) are caracteristici distincte,<br />

diferite faţă <strong>de</strong> limbajul dintre adulţi. În general, „mămoşenia” se distinge printr-o<br />

intensitate ridicată, frecvenţe variate, <strong>de</strong>bit scăzut al verbalizării, intonaţie variată, enunţuri<br />

mai scurte, repetiţie, structură simplă a propoziţiei, verbalizare concentrată pe momentul<br />

prezent şi folosirea <strong>de</strong> diminutive, precum ursuleţ, nani, păpică. „Mămoşenia” se orientează<br />

către interesele şi nivelurile <strong>de</strong> conştientizare, jucând un rol important în evoluţia lingvistică<br />

şi a comunicării, <strong>de</strong>şi cre<strong>de</strong>m că trebuie evitate.<br />

În jurul vârstei <strong>de</strong> 9 luni, copiii încep să <strong>de</strong>vină familiari cu cei din jur, în special cu<br />

părinţii. La scurt timp după aceasta, ei folosesc idiomorfisme (Werner şi Kaplan 1963).<br />

Idiomorfismele (vocabule sau forme fonetice constante) sunt sunete unice pe care le atribuie<br />

copiii, în mod constant, unui obiect sau acţiuni. Deşi aceste idiomorfisme nu sunt cuvinte şi<br />

nu sunt recunoscute astfel, ele au rol <strong>de</strong> cuvinte idiosincretice pentru copil. Unele<br />

idiomorfisme pot avea punctul <strong>de</strong> plecare în imitaţie, precum „rrr” pentru a face referire la o<br />

maşină sau la un câine. În genere, tutorii i<strong>de</strong>ntifică uşor înţelesul idiomorfismelor folosite,


<strong>de</strong>şi alţii nu au această capacitate. Stabilitatea fonetică se poate mări, un proces <strong>de</strong>numit<br />

asociere în lanţ (Vygotsky 1962). De asemenea, idiomorfismele reflectă creativitatea lingvistică<br />

a copilului. În mod frecvent, idiomorfismele sunt combinate cu primele cuvinte (Reich 1986).<br />

1. Vorbirea pentru sine<br />

Teoria <strong>de</strong>zvoltării propusă <strong>de</strong> Vygotsky menţionează achiziţia mentală a limbajului<br />

social şi ajutorul acestuia în rezolvarea problemelor şi în raţionament. Între 2 şi 4 ani,<br />

vorbirea pentru sine capătă un caracter pronunţat, care sca<strong>de</strong> însă pe măsură ce este<br />

convertit în limbaj mental propriu. Furrow (1984) a sugerat că vorbirea pentru sine serveşte<br />

funcţiilor <strong>de</strong> reglare lingvistică proprie, <strong>de</strong>scriere şi expresivitate. Frawley şi Lantolf (1986)<br />

însă, au accentuat faptul că toate formele <strong>de</strong> vorbire pentru sine sunt reglatoare, iar<br />

neapariţia limbajului în efectuarea unei sarcini nu afectează funcţionalitatea. Deşi<br />

<strong>de</strong>scoperirile sunt variate, există o teorie care susţine viziunea lui Vygotsky adaugând că<br />

vorbirea pentru sine este o funcţie cognitivă cu orientare din partea utilizatorului. Aceste<br />

<strong>de</strong>scoperiri atestă şi faptul că funcţiile limbajului sunt în acest punct într-o perioadă <strong>de</strong><br />

tranziţie.<br />

O culegere <strong>de</strong> lucrări <strong>de</strong>spre vorbirea pentru sine editată <strong>de</strong> Diaz şi Berk (1992) se<br />

concentrează asupra lărgirii şi testării perspectivei teoretice propuse <strong>de</strong> Vygotsky. Cele două<br />

mari direcţii prezente în lucrările lui Vygotsky – importanţa vorbirii pentru sine ca stadiu<br />

cognitiv intermediar între colaborarea cu alţii şi propria activitate cerebrală şi, pe <strong>de</strong> altă<br />

parte, natura <strong>de</strong> reglare proprie a vorbirii pentru sine a copiilor – au parte <strong>de</strong> un sprijin<br />

marcat. Lucrările lui Vygotsky oferă, <strong>de</strong> asemenea, o perspectivă în istoria socio-culturală<br />

proprie copiilor şi a evoluţiei cognitive, astfel încât legăturile create între mediu, pe <strong>de</strong> o<br />

parte, şi creşterea şi <strong>de</strong>zvoltarea copilului, pe <strong>de</strong> altă parte, pot fi analizate mai atent<br />

(Behrend, Rosengren şi Perimutter 1989, Smolucha şi Smolucha 1992).<br />

2. Primele cuvinte<br />

De obicei, primele cuvinte apar între 9 şi 12 luni şi se referă la oameni importanţi<br />

pentru copil (mama sau tata) sau la obiecte. Cuvintele pentru obiecte mişcătoare (ex.: maşini)<br />

sau care pot fi manipulate (ex.: suc) sunt mai frecvente <strong>de</strong>cât cuvintele <strong>de</strong> acţiuni (ex.: pa-pa).<br />

Funcţiile asociate cu primele cuvinte sunt, în general, numirea, afirmarea şi cererea.<br />

Denumirile date <strong>de</strong> copii reflectă <strong>de</strong>numiri <strong>de</strong> categorii, „căţeluş,” şi nu <strong>de</strong> entităţi separate,<br />

cum ar fi „câine mare, câine rău” (Baldwin şi Markman 1989). S-a observat o preferinţă a<br />

copiilor pentru primele tipuri <strong>de</strong> cuvinte achiziţionate; copiii care achiziţionează multe<br />

substantive comune sunt <strong>de</strong>numiţi referenţiali, iar cei care îşi însuşesc alte tipuri <strong>de</strong> cuvinte,<br />

expresivi. În timpul folosirii primelor cuvinte, copiii folosesc cuvintele în mod frecvent, fie în<br />

forma fonetică, fie făcând referire la semnificat. În acest stadiu, ei percep cuvintele ca parte<br />

din sistemul lingvistic şi conştientizează valoarea comunicativă a acestora.<br />

Copiii referenţiali sunt consi<strong>de</strong>raţi mai avansaţi în <strong>de</strong>zvoltarea lexicală din punctul <strong>de</strong><br />

ve<strong>de</strong>re al înţelegerii şi producerii, fiind capabili să folosească cuvintele în con<strong>text</strong>e variate.<br />

Deşi copiii expresivi prezintă expresii fixe şi un vocabular eterogen, copiii referenţiali se<br />

concentrează asupra <strong>de</strong>numirii obiectelor şi folosirea substantivelor şi a atributelor acestora.<br />

Copiii se folosesc <strong>de</strong> mai multe strategii pentru achiziţionarea primelor cuvinte. Un<br />

principiu important este contrastul. Conform acestuia, copilul presupune că un termen nou<br />

nu se referă la obiectul menţionat anterior (Markman şi Wachtel 1988). Alt principiu este<br />

presupoziţia că un termen nou cuprin<strong>de</strong> toate părţile constitutive ale unui obiect, şi nu doar<br />

o parte din acesta; acest principiu este <strong>de</strong>numit principiul scopului obiectului (Taylor şi<br />

Gelman 1988). Un alt studiu semnat Taylor şi Gelman menţionează că un copil <strong>de</strong> 2 ani se<br />

foloseşte atât <strong>de</strong> categoria lingvistică formală (ex.: substantiv sau adjectiv), cât şi <strong>de</strong><br />

16


contrastul lexical pentru interpretarea cuvintelor noi. A treia strategie, schiţarea rapidă,<br />

adună informaţii <strong>de</strong>spre înţelesul cuvântului, folosindu-se <strong>de</strong> modul <strong>de</strong> întrebuinţare în<br />

propoziţie şi <strong>de</strong> cuvintele cu care este comparat; această strategie oferă informaţii rapi<strong>de</strong>, dar<br />

incomplete, <strong>de</strong>spre noile cuvinte. Heibeck şi Markman (1987) au arătat că, la 2 ani, copiii pot<br />

îngusta sfera semnificatului cu ajutorul celei <strong>de</strong>-a treia strategii. În plus, copiii cuprind<br />

frecvent noile cuvinte în vocabularul propriu prin formarea <strong>de</strong> ierarhii lingvistice în care<br />

cuvintele noi sunt subordonate unei categorii <strong>de</strong>ja stabilite (Taylor şi Gelman 1989).<br />

Alte investigaţii au format legături între <strong>de</strong>zvoltarea semantică şi cea cognitivă în<br />

timpul etapei enunţurilor formate dintr-un singur cuvânt. Gopnik şi Meltzoff (1986)<br />

formulează teoria specificităţii, care propune conexiuni specifice între anumiţi termeni<br />

lingvistici şi anumite stadii <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>zvoltare cognitivă în etapa enunţurilor formate dintr-un<br />

singur cuvânt.<br />

Sensurile primelor cuvinte pe care copiii şi le formează, <strong>de</strong>şi constante, au tendinţa <strong>de</strong> a<br />

exagera sau minimiza folosirea categorială. Minimizarea survine atunci când copilul observă<br />

că multitudinea <strong>de</strong> semnificaţii aferente unui cuvânt este mai restrânsă <strong>de</strong>cât cea a unui<br />

adult. De exemplu, ceea ce copilul înţelege prin minge ar putea fi restrâns la mingea favorită,<br />

şi nu la mingi în general, cu atât mai mult la mingea <strong>de</strong> rugby. Exagerarea folosirii<br />

categoriale survine atunci când copiii folosesc excesiv un anumit cuvânt – numirea tuturor<br />

bătrânilor „bunic.” Această exagerare este răspândită atât în vorbire, cât şi în înţelegerea<br />

vorbirii altora.<br />

Primele cuvinte rostite au iscat divergenţe <strong>de</strong> opinie cu privire la caracterul simbolic<br />

sau <strong>de</strong> specificare a intenţiilor copilului. Aceasta naşte întrebarea: cuvintele reflectă concepte<br />

fundamentale sau servesc ca mijloc alternativ <strong>de</strong> atingere a unui scop? Piaget susţine că<br />

primele cuvinte nu au caracter simbolic, ci sprijină <strong>de</strong>zvoltarea <strong>de</strong> noi scheme <strong>de</strong> acţiuni în<br />

ve<strong>de</strong>rea stabilirii <strong>de</strong> noi meto<strong>de</strong> pentru atingerea unui scop. Acest proces are loc între 12 şi 18<br />

luni. Unii specialişti susţin ipoteza şi afirmă că aceste vocalizări reprezintă acţiunile care<br />

reflectă direct intenţiile copilului. Acţiunile sunt, <strong>de</strong> obicei, protoenunţiative (comentarii<br />

informative) sau protoimperative (ordine). În continuare, pentru o mai bună înţelegere a<br />

producerii primelor cuvinte, se vor <strong>de</strong>talia explicaţii teoretice alternative <strong>de</strong>spre primele<br />

cuvinte şi <strong>de</strong>spre folosirea acestora.<br />

3. Explicaţii alternative pentru concepte şi primele cuvinte<br />

Owens (1992) susţine că semantica face referire la un sistem <strong>de</strong> reguli care dictează<br />

conţinutul cuvintelor şi combinaţiile dintre cuvinte. Cuvintele nu sunt oglinda realităţii, ci<br />

numai conceptele şi credinţele oamenilor <strong>de</strong>spre realitate. Cunoaşterea cognitivă reflectă<br />

cunoaşterea realităţii – modul în care oamenii împart experienţele şi conceptele în categorii.<br />

Oamenii stochează informaţii <strong>de</strong>spre experienţele trăite (memorie episodică), simboluri,<br />

reguli şi legăturile dintre acestea (memorie semantică). Memoria episodică şi cea semantică<br />

au o bază comună <strong>de</strong> informaţii şi experienţe; formarea conceptelor fiind consi<strong>de</strong>rată cel mai<br />

important proces cognitiv. Când un concept este asociat cu un cuvânt, rezultă cunoaşterea<br />

semantică, luând naştere, în felul acesta, fundamentele înţelesului lingvistic.<br />

Pentru caracteristicile care stau la baza cunoştinţelor semantice au fost propuse câteva<br />

explicaţii:<br />

ipoteza trăsăturilor semantice,<br />

ipoteza nucleului funcţional şi<br />

învăţarea prototipică.<br />

Fiecare dintre aceste perspective susţine că diferitele caracteristici ale referentului sunt<br />

însuşite <strong>de</strong> copii, dar nimeni nu cunoaşte ce se ascun<strong>de</strong> în gândurile altora; oamenii pot doar<br />

<strong>de</strong>duce înţelesuri din cuvinte sau presupuneri.<br />

17


4. Ipoteza trăsăturilor semantice<br />

Eve Clark (1973a, 1973b) argumentează că un copil învaţă un set <strong>de</strong> trăsături universale<br />

care caracterizează toţi referenţii, ca <strong>de</strong> exemplu uman / non-uman, neînsufleţit / însufleţit,<br />

etc. Copiii află înţelesuri noi prin i<strong>de</strong>ntificarea particularităţilor mai importante ale unui<br />

referent. Spre exemplu, o minge poate fi caracterizată prin rotunjime şi proprietatea <strong>de</strong> a<br />

sări. Pe măsură ce copilul creşte, criteriile se pot schimba, putându-se adăuga sau şterge<br />

unele caracteristici, spre exemplu, mărimea, materialul, etc. Clasificarea conform acestor<br />

particularităţi este gradată <strong>de</strong> la trăsăturile cele mai largi la cele mai specifice (Ingram, 1991).<br />

Pentru unii termeni, spre exemplu antonimele, doar unul este consi<strong>de</strong>rat a fi <strong>de</strong> bază,<br />

subliniind dimensiunea semantică. De exemplu, în cazul antonimelor „înalt” şi „scund,”<br />

dimensiunea semantică <strong>de</strong>finitorie este conceptul <strong>de</strong> „înălţime.” Când se doreşte cunoaşterea<br />

înălţimii unei persoane, se întreabă cât <strong>de</strong> înaltă este persoana în cauză; astfel, înălţimea este<br />

dimensiune semantică <strong>de</strong>finitorie şi fundamentală. Dimensiunea <strong>de</strong>finitorie este consi<strong>de</strong>rată<br />

marcată, înţelesul acesteia fiind cel dintâi element achiziţionat (Clark 1973a, 1973b). Alte<br />

categorii, precum pipăitul sau auzul sunt achiziţionate la început. Backschei<strong>de</strong>r, Shatz şi<br />

Gelman (1993) evi<strong>de</strong>nţiază că între 3 şi 4 ani, copiii înţeleg genul ontologic; aceştia<br />

conştientizează că plantele şi animalele pot creşte, dar că obiectele nu au această capacitate.<br />

Unii critici au înaintat presupunerea că această ipoteză nu specifică exact care sunt<br />

caracteristicile cele mai importante. Aceştia susţin că referenţii abstracţi sau cei care implică<br />

ju<strong>de</strong>căţi relative, precum „mai mult,” nu sunt explicaţi <strong>de</strong> această ipoteză.<br />

5. Ipoteza nucleului funcţional<br />

Kathryn Nelson (1974) afirmă că proprietăţile funcţionale ale referentului, şi nu<br />

proprietăţile statice, sunt cele care <strong>de</strong>finesc înţelesul referentului. Copiii încep prin a numi<br />

termenii <strong>de</strong> acţiune; Nelson susţine <strong>de</strong>finirea obiectelor <strong>de</strong> către copii în funcţie <strong>de</strong> calităţile<br />

funcţionale şi adăugarea ulterioară <strong>de</strong> proprietăţi perceptive relevante. Nucleul<br />

semnificatului îl reprezintă folosirea funcţională a unui obiect. Conceptul se achiziţionează;<br />

apoi se adaugă proprietăţile funcţionale, iar la final, proprietăţile nucleului referentului sunt<br />

distinse <strong>de</strong> alte relaţii. De exemplu, mărul reprezintă ceva digerabil, care poate fi aruncat, şi<br />

este, <strong>de</strong> obicei, rotund şi roşu. La un moment dat, faptul că mărul poate fi aruncat este<br />

consi<strong>de</strong>rată o calitate funcţională importantă. Deşi Nelson a adunat dovezi practice, ipoteza<br />

nucleului functional nu a fost susţinută <strong>de</strong> mulţi.<br />

6. Învăţarea prototipică<br />

Bowerman (1978) a criticat atât ipoteza proprietăţilor semantice, cât şi cea a nucleului<br />

funcţional ca fiind limitate în ceea ce priveşte capacitatea copilului <strong>de</strong> a <strong>de</strong>osebi relaţia<br />

constantă dintre referenţi. Teoria susţine existenţa unui mo<strong>de</strong>l sau prototip central pe care<br />

copiii îl asociază cuvintelor; <strong>de</strong> obicei, acest mo<strong>de</strong>l se suprapune, i<strong>de</strong>ntificându-se cu<br />

referentul care a fost folosit cel mai <strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong> adulţi în asociere cu un anumit cuvânt care l-a<br />

<strong>de</strong>numit în primă instanţă. Învăţarea prototipică permite extin<strong>de</strong>rea continuă şi adaptarea<br />

conceptelor. De exemplu, cuvântul „scaun” poate face referire, în primul rând, la taburetul<br />

folosit <strong>de</strong> copil, dar, gradual, <strong>de</strong>numirea va cuprin<strong>de</strong> şi scaunele <strong>de</strong> la masă sau balansoarul<br />

tatălui. Treptat, taburetul va căpăta un înţeles <strong>de</strong> sine stătător, fără a-l mai inclu<strong>de</strong> în<br />

categoria scaunelor <strong>de</strong>oarece nu <strong>de</strong>ţine suficiente caracteristici asemănătoare cu cele ale<br />

semnificaţiei principale <strong>de</strong> „scaun.” Iniţial, toate animalele blănoase, cu patru picioare erau<br />

<strong>de</strong>numite „căţeluş,” dar treptat câinii, pisicile, caii şi veveriţele <strong>de</strong>vin creaturi distincte, <strong>de</strong>şi<br />

toate poartă <strong>de</strong>numirea comună <strong>de</strong> „animal.”<br />

Noţiunea <strong>de</strong> prototipie se bazează pe i<strong>de</strong>ea lui Wittgenstein (1958) potrivit căreia toate<br />

sensurile lexicale nu reprezintă caracteristici invariabile, ci asemănări <strong>de</strong> familie sau un grup<br />

18


<strong>de</strong> proprietăţi. Referenţii care împart caracteristicile <strong>de</strong>finitorii ale unui concept sau obiect<br />

vor <strong>de</strong>veni prototipul respectivului concept sau obiect.<br />

Potrivit ipotezei caracteristicii semantice, copiii <strong>de</strong>zvoltă înţelesuri prin adăugarea <strong>de</strong><br />

proprietăţi; ei au tendinţa <strong>de</strong> a lărgi sfera cuvintelor la început pentru ca ulterior să fie<br />

corespunzătoare cu întrebuinţarea corectă. Pe <strong>de</strong> altă parte, ipoteza nucleului funcţional<br />

susţine existenţa unui nivel conceptual între referent şi cuvânt. Ambele ipoteze sunt<br />

asemănătoare, prin evaluarea înţelesului ca organizat în jurul proprietăţilor invariabile<br />

(Ingram, 1991). Spre <strong>de</strong>osebire <strong>de</strong> aceasta, învăţarea prototipică presupune <strong>de</strong>finirea <strong>de</strong> către<br />

un prototip central a înţelesului principal, alţi referenţi fiind evaluaţi în funcţie <strong>de</strong> prototip.<br />

Deşi nu există o limită bine <strong>de</strong>finită în <strong>de</strong>celarea mecanismelor cognitive, apare totuşi o<br />

abilitate <strong>de</strong>finitorie <strong>de</strong> clasificare a experienţelor, <strong>de</strong> recunoaştere a asemănărilor şi<br />

<strong>de</strong>osebirilor, <strong>de</strong> aplicare a noilor cunoştinţe situaţiilor familiare şi a regulilor familiare<br />

situaţiilor noi.<br />

7. Achiziţia proprietăţilor semantice selectate<br />

Această secţiune va formula câteva concluzii generale şi va analiza unele cuvinte<br />

achiziţionate în anii preşcolari; copiii au nevoie <strong>de</strong> câţiva ani pentru a stăpâni aceşti termeni.<br />

După cum am menţionat anterior, primele cuvinte sunt <strong>de</strong> obicei nominale, în special<br />

cele care fac referire la obiectele <strong>de</strong>s întâlnite în jur, sau la persoanele familiare. Cuvintele<br />

care exprimă acţiuni sunt comune, dar sunt mai puţin frecvente. Nominalele sunt<br />

achiziţionate, <strong>de</strong> asemenea, la început, în cadrul nivelului intermediar <strong>de</strong> generalizare. De<br />

exemplu, la nivelul intermediar, „câine” poate <strong>de</strong>veni termen abstract şi general şi poate fi<br />

înlocuit <strong>de</strong> „animal” sau poate <strong>de</strong>veni specific, fiind înlocuit <strong>de</strong> „câinele lup.” Nivelul<br />

intermediar este, probabil, generic şi folositor pentru clasificare, astfel încât ar părea<br />

rezonabil ca acesta să fie printre primele însuşite.<br />

Cuvintele englezeşti care încep cu wh- folosite în propoziţiile interogative sunt<br />

achiziţionate în ordinea aparentului caracter abstract. What, who şi where (ce, cine, un<strong>de</strong>) sunt<br />

primele achiziţionate; acestea privesc, în general, referenţi concreţi prezenţi în interacţiunea<br />

zilnică, în consecinţă nu au un grad <strong>de</strong> abstractizare atât <strong>de</strong> ridicat, precum how, why sau<br />

when (cum, <strong>de</strong> ce, când). „How” are un caracter mai concret, în sensul că se poate ve<strong>de</strong>a cum<br />

ceva se produce, dar why şi when sunt cele mai abstracte. Alţi factori care contribuie la<br />

achiziţia acestor termeni sunt funcţiile sintactice ale diferitelor forme verbale care conţin<br />

grupul wh, verbele din propoziţiile interogative care cuprind elemente din grupul wh şi<br />

utilizarea interogaţiilor wh în discurs (Bloom, Merkin şi Wootten, 1982). Alte studii<br />

anterioare arată că preşcolarii nu <strong>de</strong>ţin raţionament bidirecţional, fiind limitaţi din punct <strong>de</strong><br />

ve<strong>de</strong>re al ordinii (ex.: răspun<strong>de</strong>au mai corect la întrebări ca “Ce s-a întâmplat după x” faţă <strong>de</strong><br />

întrebări ca “Ce s-a întâmplat înainte <strong>de</strong> x”). Însă, French (1989) observă că preşcolarii<br />

răspund mai ferm la întrebările conţinând „după” <strong>de</strong>cât la întrebări <strong>de</strong>spre evenimente<br />

petrecute la care s-a făcut referire prin „când.” Acesta a mai observat că dacă se oferă un<br />

con<strong>text</strong> a<strong>de</strong>cvat, răspunsurile bidirecţionale sunt posibile şi relevante în circumstanţele<br />

respective.<br />

Aceste constatări dovedind influenţele complexităţii cognitive (sau gradul <strong>de</strong><br />

conceptualizare cognitivă) asupra însuşirii semnificatului, pot constitui o ipoteză plauzibilă<br />

în cazul achiziţiei cuvintelor <strong>de</strong> relaţie („mare,” „mic”), <strong>de</strong> schimbare („acesta,” „acela” referitor<br />

la distanţa dintre referent şi vorbitor) şi gra<strong>de</strong>le <strong>de</strong> ru<strong>de</strong>nie („unchi,” „văr”). Coley şi Gelman<br />

(1989) afirmă că utilizarea cuvântului „mare” <strong>de</strong>pin<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> factorii con<strong>text</strong>uali, şi <strong>de</strong><br />

inter<strong>de</strong>pen<strong>de</strong>nţa factorilor semantici şi cognitivi. În studiul acestora, copiii mai mari se bazau<br />

pe înălţime în <strong>de</strong>terminarea obiectului cel mai mare; copiii <strong>de</strong> 3 ani se foloseau <strong>de</strong> înălţime în<br />

ceea ce priveşte oamenii, nu <strong>de</strong> lăţime / grosime, însă toţi subiecţii se ghidau după spaţiul în<br />

care se aflau pentru <strong>de</strong>terminarea obiectului celui mai mare.<br />

19


Însuşirea conceptelor şi reprezentările lingvistice respective ar trebui să fie paralele. De<br />

exemplu, copiii care folosesc corect expresia „în faţa” ar trebui supuşi testelor <strong>de</strong> nonverbalitate<br />

pentru conceptele <strong>de</strong> apropiere şi <strong>de</strong> caracteristici ale obiectelor, pentru a dovedi<br />

stăpânirea conceptelor şi caracteristicilor obiectelor înainte <strong>de</strong> folosirea acestei forme<br />

lingvistice; ei ar trebui să <strong>de</strong>monstreze însuşirea înţelesurilor formei „în faţa” în aceeaşi<br />

ordine ca în cazul achiziţiei <strong>de</strong> concepte relaţionate non-verbale. Astfel, ordinea <strong>de</strong>zvoltării<br />

cognitive conceptuale ar trebui să preceadă şi, respectiv, să se regăsească în formele<br />

lingvistice aferente. Retrospectiva formulată <strong>de</strong> Johnston (1986) arată că frecvenţa<br />

întrebuinţării şi complexitatea lingvistică şi semantică pot influenţa ordinea achiziţiei<br />

termenilor relaţionaţi. Urmând o i<strong>de</strong>e similară, E. Clark (1980) spune că „sus” este cel dintâi<br />

cuvânt folosit corect din perechea „sus-jos,” iar abia mai apoi „jos,” la fel şi în cazul perechii<br />

„faţă-spate.” Ea argumentează că aceste înţelesuri sunt achiziţionate în ordinea <strong>de</strong>terminată<br />

<strong>de</strong> strategiile non-lingvistice anterioare folosite <strong>de</strong> copii pentru aceiaşi termeni.<br />

8. Termenii <strong>de</strong> schimbare<br />

Termenii <strong>de</strong> schimbare sunt termeni ai căror referenţi se schimbă în funcţie <strong>de</strong> vorbitor,<br />

<strong>de</strong> un<strong>de</strong> şi când se adresează vorbitorul. Termenii reprezentând gra<strong>de</strong>le <strong>de</strong> ru<strong>de</strong>nie,<br />

pronumele, „acesta” sau „acela” provoacă schimbarea referentului în funcţie <strong>de</strong> vorbitor.<br />

Pronumele <strong>de</strong> persoana întâi şi a doua nu sunt însuşite <strong>de</strong>cât după anii preşcolari (Reich,<br />

1986). Referinţele anaforice, în care un pronume poate fi ataşat la mai mult <strong>de</strong>cât un singur<br />

substantiv, ca în propoziţia „Bogdan i-a spus lui Nae că îl cunoaşte pe Batman,” sunt<br />

stăpânite în timp, pe măsură ce copiii pot alterna între perspective (Smyth, 1995).<br />

Diferenţierea între „aici” şi „acolo” şi „acesta” şi „acela” se <strong>de</strong>finitivează abia în jurul vârstei<br />

<strong>de</strong> 7 ani. Astfel, termenii <strong>de</strong> schimbare şi <strong>de</strong> relaţie sunt achiziţionaţi <strong>de</strong>-a lungul unei întinse<br />

perioa<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> timp. Înţelegerea acestor termeni presupune localizarea obiectelor cu referire la<br />

sine sau la punctul <strong>de</strong> ve<strong>de</strong>re al vorbitorului.<br />

9. Termenii psihici<br />

Termenii psihici ca „a gândi,” „a cunoaşte,” încep a fi folosiţi între 2 şi 3 ani. Wellman<br />

şi Estes (1987) spun că acest tip <strong>de</strong> termeni au fost mai întâi utilizaţi drept funcţii ale<br />

conversaţiei, majoritatea fiind folosiţi pentru referinţe psihice distincte, explicite. Copiii au<br />

abilitatea <strong>de</strong> a face diferenţa între termeni <strong>de</strong> ordin psihic şi planul real. Până la 4 – 5 ani ei<br />

înţeleg întrebuinţarea termenilor <strong>de</strong> ordin psihic, precum „a cunoaşte,” „a gândi” pentru<br />

acţiuni sigure. Până la 4 ani, copiii fac distincţia între „a cunoaşte” şi „a gândi” şi „a ghici” şi<br />

percep termenul „a cunoaşte” ca o ju<strong>de</strong>cată sigură (Moore, Bryant şi Furrow 1989).<br />

Evoluţia semantică, în special a primelor cuvinte, este o sarcină complicată care<br />

<strong>de</strong>pin<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> maturitatea şi complexitatea cognitivă, <strong>de</strong> frecvenţa utilizării şi a oportunităţii.<br />

Copiii folosesc o gamă variată <strong>de</strong> strategii lingvistice şi non-lingvistice pentru achiziţionarea<br />

înţelesului. Proprietăţile semantice joacă, <strong>de</strong> asemenea, un rol important în enunţurile din<br />

perioa<strong>de</strong>le <strong>de</strong> tranziţie. Enunţurile formate din două cuvinte se construiesc, în mod frecvent,<br />

pe conexiunile semantice constituite înainte <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>zvoltarea şi formarea relaţiilor sintactice.<br />

Referinţe<br />

Backschei<strong>de</strong>r, A.G., Shatz, M., Gelman, S.A. (1993). Preschoolers’ ability to distinguish living kinds as<br />

a function of self-healing, in Child Development, 64, 1242–1257.<br />

Baldwin, D.A., Markman, E.M. (1989). Establishing word-object relations: A first step, in Child<br />

Development, 60, 381–398.<br />

Bloom, L., Merkin, W., Wootten, J. (1982). Wh-questions: Linguistic factors that contribute to the<br />

sequence of acquisition, in Child Development, 53, 1084-1092.<br />

Bowerman, M. (1978). Systematizing semantic knowledge: changes over time in the child’s<br />

20


organization of word meaning, in Child Development, 41, 977-987.<br />

Clark, E.V. (1973a). What’s in a word? On the child’s acquisition of word meanings, in Cognition, 161-<br />

182.<br />

Clark, E. (1973b). What’s in a word? On the child’s acquisition of semantics in his first language, in T.<br />

Moore (ed.), Cognitive <strong>de</strong>velopment and the acquisition of language, New York: Aca<strong>de</strong>mic Press, 267-<br />

278.<br />

Coley, J., Gelman, S. (1989). The effect of object orientation and object type on children’s interpretation<br />

of the word big, in Child Developmen, 60, 372-380.<br />

Diaz, R., Berk, L. (1992, pp 706-708). Private speech, Hillsdale: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.<br />

Frawley, W., Lantolf, J. (1986). Private speech and self-regulation: A commentary on Frauenglass and<br />

Diaz, in Developmental Psychology, 22.<br />

French, L. (1989). Young children’s responses to ”when” questions: Issues of directionalities, in Child<br />

Development, 60, 225-236.<br />

Furrow, D. (1984). Social and private speech at two years, in Child Development, 55, 355-362.<br />

Gopnik, A., Meltzoff, A.N. (1986). Words, plans, things, and locations: Interactions between semantic<br />

and cognitive <strong>de</strong>velopment in the one-word stage, in S.A. Kuczaj, M. Barrett (eds.), The <strong>de</strong>velopment<br />

of word meaning, New York: Springer-Verlag, pp390-401.<br />

Heibeck, T.H., Markman, E.M. (1987). Word learning in children: an examination of fast mapping, in<br />

Child Development, 58, 1021-1034.<br />

Ingram, D. (1991, pp 21-39). First language acquisition, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.<br />

Johnston, J. (1986). Cognitive prerequisites: The evi<strong>de</strong>nce from children learning English, in D. Slobin<br />

(ed.) Cross-linguistic study of language acquisition, Hillsdale: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, pp 257-<br />

277.<br />

Markman, R., Wachtel, C. (1988). Children’s use of mutual exclusivity to constrain the meaning of<br />

words, in Cognitive Psychology, 20, 121-157.<br />

Moore, C., Bryant, D., Furrow, D. (1989). Mental terms and the <strong>de</strong>velopment of certainty, in Child<br />

Development, 60, 167-171.<br />

Nelson, K. (1974). Concept, word and sentence: Interrelations in acquisitions and <strong>de</strong>velopment, in<br />

Psychological Review, 81, 267-285.<br />

Owens, S. (1992, pp 87-90). Language <strong>de</strong>velopment, New York: Macmillan.<br />

Piaget, J. (1980, pp 146-183). Les formes élémentaires <strong>de</strong> la dialectique, Paris: Gallimard.<br />

Reich, P. (1986, pp 56-71). Language <strong>de</strong>velopment, Englewood Cliffs: Prentice-Hall.<br />

Smolucha, L., Smolucha, F. (1992). Vygotskian theory: An emerging paradigm with implications for a<br />

synergistic psychology, in Creativity Research Journal, 5, 87–96.<br />

Smyth, J. (1995, pp 25-32). Aca<strong>de</strong>mic work: The changing labour process in higher education, Buckingham:<br />

Open University Press.<br />

Taylor, M., Gelman, S.A. (1989). Incorporating new words into the lexicon: Preliminary evi<strong>de</strong>nce for<br />

language hierarchies in two-year-old children, in Child Development, 60, 625-636.<br />

Veneziano, E. (1989). Les proto-conversations et les actes <strong>de</strong> langage : <strong>de</strong> l’alternance <strong>de</strong>s tours <strong>de</strong><br />

rôles aux significations partagées, in Revue Internationale <strong>de</strong> Psychologie sociale, T. 2 – 1, 23-36.<br />

Veneziano, E., Sinclair, H. & Berthoud, I. (1990). From one word to two words. In Journal of Child<br />

Language, 17, 633.<br />

Vygotsky, L. (1962, pp 55-70). Thought and language, Cambridge: MIT Press.<br />

Wellman, H.M., Estes, D. (1987). Children's early use of mental verbs and what they mean, in<br />

Discourse process, 10, 141-156.<br />

Werner, H., Kaplan, B. (1963). Symbol Formation in An Organismic-Developmental Approach to Language<br />

and the Expression of Thought, New York: Wiley, pp 21-25.<br />

Wittgenstein, J. (1958, pp 127-133). Philosophical Investigations, Oxford: Blackwell.<br />

Abstract<br />

In the con<strong>text</strong> of an ever-growing globalization and multiculturalism, the present paper wishes to<br />

analyze the methods that evince the acquisition of the native linguistic structures in the case of the<br />

Romanian and English preschoolers. We shall also try to <strong>de</strong>monstrate the link between cognitive<br />

21


<strong>de</strong>velopment and lexical complexity as well as the different strategies adopted by the preschoolers<br />

for the production of idiosyncratic words. We consi<strong>de</strong>r that it is precisely these primary methods<br />

that form a reliable basis for the later acquisition of other complex techniques of lexical<br />

<strong>de</strong>velopment.<br />

The semantic evolution, especially of the first words, is a complicated task that <strong>de</strong>pends on the<br />

cognitive complexity and maturity, on the frequency of use and con<strong>text</strong>. Children use a wi<strong>de</strong> range<br />

of linguistic and non-linguistic strategies in or<strong>de</strong>r to acquire meaning. The semantic properties are<br />

surely of great importance in the productions of this transition period. Two-word productions<br />

usually rely on the semantic links that have been formed before the <strong>de</strong>velopment and establishment<br />

of the syntactic relations.<br />

Résumé<br />

Dans le con<strong>text</strong>e d’une globalisation et d’un multiculturalisme en plein essor, ce papier se propose<br />

d’analyser les métho<strong>de</strong>s qui mettent en évi<strong>de</strong>nce l’acquisition <strong>de</strong>s structures linguistiques<br />

maternelles, dans le cas <strong>de</strong>s préscolaires roumains et anglais. Nous essayeront <strong>de</strong> démontrer la<br />

relation entre le développent cognitif et la complexité lexicale aussi comme les différentes stratégies<br />

adoptées par les préscolaires pour la production <strong>de</strong> quelques mots idiosyncratiques. Nous<br />

considérons que ces métho<strong>de</strong>s primaires jouent le rôle le plus important dans la formation d’une<br />

base pour l’acquisition, plus tard, <strong>de</strong>s autres techniques complexes du développement lexical.<br />

L’évolution sémantique, surtout, celle <strong>de</strong>s premiers mots est une tâche compliquée et dépendante<br />

<strong>de</strong> la complexité et maturité cognitive, <strong>de</strong> la fréquence <strong>de</strong> l’utilisation et du con<strong>text</strong>e. Les enfants<br />

utilisent une gamme large <strong>de</strong>s stratégies linguistiques et non-linguistiques pour acquérir du sens.<br />

Les propriétés sémantiques sont, certainement, très importantes surtout dans le cas <strong>de</strong>s<br />

productions <strong>de</strong> cette pério<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> transition. Les productions qui contiennent <strong>de</strong>ux mots, d’habitu<strong>de</strong>,<br />

se basent sur les relations sémantiques formées avant le développement et l’établissement <strong>de</strong>s<br />

relations syntactiques.<br />

Rezumat<br />

În con<strong>text</strong>ul unei globalizări şi al unui multiculturalism în continuu progress, lucrarea <strong>de</strong> faţă îşi<br />

propune să analizeze meto<strong>de</strong>le care evi<strong>de</strong>nţiază dobândirea structurilor lingvistice materne în<br />

cazul preşcolarilor români şi englezi. Vom încerca să <strong>de</strong>monstrăm şi legătura dintre <strong>de</strong>zvoltarea<br />

cognitivă şi complexitatea lexicală precum şi strategiile diferite adoptate <strong>de</strong> preşcolari pentru<br />

producerea unor cuvinte idiosincretice. Consi<strong>de</strong>răm că aceste meto<strong>de</strong> primare joacă rolul cel mai<br />

important în alcătuirea bazei pentru însuşirea, mai târziu, a celorlalte tehnici complexe ale<br />

<strong>de</strong>zvoltării lexicale. Evoluţia semantică, mai ales a primelor cuvinte, este o sarcină complicată şi<br />

care <strong>de</strong>pin<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> gradul <strong>de</strong> complexitate şi maturitate cognitivă, <strong>de</strong> frecvenţa utilizării şi <strong>de</strong> con<strong>text</strong>.<br />

Copiii folosesc o gamă largă <strong>de</strong> strategii lingvistice şi non-lingvistice pentru a-şi însuşi sensuri.<br />

Proprietăţile semantice sunt, <strong>de</strong>sigur, <strong>de</strong>osebit <strong>de</strong> importante în cazul producţiilor acestei perioa<strong>de</strong><br />

<strong>de</strong> tranziţie. Producţiile alcătuite din două cuvinte se bazează, <strong>de</strong> obicei, pe legăturile semantice<br />

formate înaintea <strong>de</strong>zvoltării şi consolidării relaţiilor sintactice.<br />

22


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 23-14<br />

A FEW CONSTRAINTS ON STUDENT QUESTIONING<br />

Anca Cehan<br />

23<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

In education, it is believed that much of the learning that takes place in the classroom is<br />

the result of the questions asked by the teachers, and that the better the teacher’s questions,<br />

the better the teacher’s teaching and the class learning. Aristotle, in Posterior Analitics, 89b<br />

(quoted by Dillon 1988: 7) says ‘These, then, are the kinds of questions we ask, and it is in the<br />

answers to these questions that our knowledge consists’. In other words, stu<strong>de</strong>nt questions<br />

prece<strong>de</strong> teacher questions in the learning process, and when stu<strong>de</strong>nts ask questions, learning<br />

follows in answer. According to Aristotle, questions arise in ignorance and perplexity, and<br />

the stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s un<strong>de</strong>rstanding is shaped by the relation s/he builds between question and<br />

answer as questions and answers conjoin to form knowledge and un<strong>de</strong>rstanding. Questions<br />

invite both a search for answers and other questions which follow from these answers. The<br />

stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s knowledge consists in the proposition that s/he forms of question and answer.<br />

Even if asking questions is believed to stimulate thoughtfulness and to encourage<br />

expression, education is in many ways, an activity similar to other fields where questioning<br />

is an exercise of power and control. James Dillon (1988) showed that in fields that encourage<br />

both talking and thinking, such as counselling and personal interviewing, practitioners avoid<br />

questions. In other fields, such as courtroom advocacy and public opinions surveying, where<br />

the goal is to limit thoughtfulness and to control the utterances of the people being<br />

questioned, the practitioners are highly skilled in asking questions. In other words, social<br />

superiors ask questions and subordinates answer them. This pattern where the questions of<br />

the social subordinates are rare or miss altogether is normal practice: physicians seldom<br />

answer questions from patients, lawyers are never questioned by witnesses, adults do not<br />

always answer questions from children. In the classroom, the stu<strong>de</strong>nt has years of experience<br />

with only the teachers asking questions and answers being given by self and classmates.<br />

Although stu<strong>de</strong>nt questions are often mentioned in theory, there is small room for them in<br />

classroom practice.<br />

Since Aristotle and before him, questioning by the stu<strong>de</strong>nts has been wi<strong>de</strong>ly regar<strong>de</strong>d<br />

by pedagogues as the starting point for effective education. In reality, questioning by<br />

teachers seems to actually be an exercise of power and control, as it is in other fields, where<br />

questions limit authentic discussion. In theory, stu<strong>de</strong>nt questioning and questions, together<br />

with the answers given to them, are encouraged and supported in the classroom, and no<br />

teachers would admit that they do not <strong>de</strong>sign lessons which encourage stu<strong>de</strong>nts’ questions<br />

and answers. However, although as Aristotle showed, learning follows in answer to a<br />

question, few stu<strong>de</strong>nt questions are asked aloud in the classroom.<br />

In normal classroom practice, classes in which no question is asked by stu<strong>de</strong>nts are not<br />

the exception but the rule. This is explained by the fact that stu<strong>de</strong>nts have few opportunities<br />

or reasons to ask questions, as they are busy giving answers to teacher questions. Classroom<br />

activities are organised in ways that do not motivate stu<strong>de</strong>nts to formulate questions, while<br />

the classroom setting gives stu<strong>de</strong>nts reasons not to ask many questions.


We have never walked into a classroom, irrespective of the level of English of the<br />

stu<strong>de</strong>nts, where the stu<strong>de</strong>nts asked a lot of questions 1. In fact, the ol<strong>de</strong>r the stu<strong>de</strong>nts get, the<br />

fewer questions they ask, although their level of proficiency in a foreign language gets<br />

higher. Apparently, children ask a lot of questions, but not in the classroom. In 26 classroom<br />

recordings 2, with approximately 600 pupils participating, only one genuine stu<strong>de</strong>nt<br />

information question could be heard (“What’s the English for roabă?”), while the questions<br />

from the teachers account for over 60% of the teacher’s talking time. Such features are not<br />

uncommon for foreign language classroom practice or for classroom practice in general.<br />

Even if one could argue that most of class recordings mentioned were done in primary and<br />

lower secondary schools (18), and that most of these classes were taught in countrysi<strong>de</strong><br />

schools (14), still we have to admit that this is the rule and not the exception. In fact, the<br />

teacher’s asking a lot of questions does not by any means guarantee the stimulation of the<br />

stu<strong>de</strong>nts’ interaction by the latter asking questions. Actually, certain types of teacher<br />

questions may discourage interactive learning (Kinsella 1991, quoted by Brown, D.H. 2001):<br />

display questions, obvious questions that may insult the stu<strong>de</strong>nts’ intelligence, vague or<br />

abstract ones, questions that are too wordy or too complex, rhetorical and random questions<br />

(i.e., questions that do not fall into a well-planned sequence).<br />

Although not represented in the corpus mentioned, besi<strong>de</strong>s information, knowledge<br />

and comprehension questions, stu<strong>de</strong>nts use other interrogative strategies, such as<br />

application, inference, analysis and synthesis, evaluation and procedural questions and<br />

<strong>de</strong>vices (Dillon, 1988). Procedural questions (e.g.: Is this going to be on the test?) are the most<br />

strategic, as they are used effectively by stu<strong>de</strong>nts to solve their problems, to execute routines<br />

and to negotiate over obligations. Conversational questions can also be heard formulated in<br />

Romanian (e.g. What? I didn’t hear, Poftim?). Self-answered and rhetorical questions are not<br />

uncommon during stu<strong>de</strong>nt project presentations, used to express some feeling or to make<br />

some point. They have the role of statements, and a common response to them is a remark<br />

such as ‘Good point’ or ‘Yeah, but…’ These other interrogative strategies are completely absent<br />

in the corpus mentioned.<br />

One can argue that in the classroom, many of the questions that the stu<strong>de</strong>nts formulate<br />

and keep in their minds, remaining unasked, are answered by something said by the teacher<br />

or another stu<strong>de</strong>nt later on, as the discussion proceeds. In the same way, an unasked<br />

question that comes to a stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s mind may be asked in the next part of the lesson.<br />

However, in classroom interaction, in the talk between teacher and stu<strong>de</strong>nts, it is sensible<br />

that stu<strong>de</strong>nts ask questions: the non-asking <strong>de</strong>nies the very purpose of interacting. To refrain<br />

from asking is not to join in the discussion. Questions are due to arise and be shared, and it is<br />

a failing for a participant in the interaction not to speak his / her mind on the current issue,<br />

by withholding the questions instead of contributing them. On the other hand, it is true that<br />

some people learn just by listening and following along, but in a discussion, this <strong>de</strong>fines nonparticipation,<br />

and is just an alibi. Some unspoken questions may be answered, others are not;<br />

in either case the answering is acci<strong>de</strong>ntal. This thwarts the essence of the pedagogical<br />

activity, whose aim is to teach and to make the stu<strong>de</strong>nt learn that which is taught. The nonasking<br />

impairs the activity of teaching, turning it into something else.<br />

Paradoxically, classroom teaching involves planned behaviour, adjusted in the process<br />

of enacting it. When planning a lesson, the teacher needs to anticipate the questions in the<br />

stu<strong>de</strong>nts’ minds. If s/he is unable to do so, the teacher can neither plan nor act in accordance.<br />

In this process the teacher cannot know whose questions will be answered and whose will<br />

not, or which ones. However, when stu<strong>de</strong>nts do not ask questions, both teaching and<br />

learning suffer, and classroom interaction is affected.<br />

However, it is normal and un<strong>de</strong>rstandable for the stu<strong>de</strong>nts not to ask questions in<br />

class. A stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s question may be an exceptional event as there are many powerful factors<br />

accounting for the rarity of stu<strong>de</strong>nt questions. Although all these factors operate in the<br />

24


classroom, they do not necessarily originate in the classroom; nor are they located in either<br />

the stu<strong>de</strong>nt or the teacher. They operate systematically, and have to do with the structures<br />

and conditions of society and schooling, with rules of socialisation in schools and with<br />

situational authority rules. They inclu<strong>de</strong> the whole complex of ways that other classrooms<br />

use with the same stu<strong>de</strong>nts, the curriculum itself, the nature of the subject-matter and the<br />

character of materials and <strong>text</strong>books.<br />

Of all these factors, we will examine only the constraints of classroom discourse on<br />

stu<strong>de</strong>nt questions, showing that stu<strong>de</strong>nt questions are almost exclu<strong>de</strong>d by the cycles of<br />

interaction, rules, and norms of classroom discourse.<br />

1. The IRF cycle<br />

Typical classroom interaction leaves little room for the stu<strong>de</strong>nts to ask questions as<br />

they find it hard to fit a question into the ongoing IRF cycle. When a stu<strong>de</strong>nt bids for a<br />

question, the teacher has to think how to stop everything in or<strong>de</strong>r to let the stu<strong>de</strong>nt start in.<br />

However, most of the time the teacher has no reason to stop the ongoing cycle, since no one<br />

seems to have a question when they are all engaged in the ongoing interaction. The teacher<br />

and stu<strong>de</strong>nts are talking back and forth, and the cycle of talk is closed to everything but<br />

stu<strong>de</strong>nts’ answers. The cycle typically begins with (a) a teacher’s question, then turns to (b) a<br />

stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s answer, and then to (c) the teacher’s evaluation of answer plus (a) next question.<br />

Stu<strong>de</strong>nts can do nothing but answer in this cycle, and there is no turn at talk for them.<br />

However, when a stu<strong>de</strong>nt asks a question, the cycle turns quite differently. The cycle<br />

does not begin with a stu<strong>de</strong>nt question, as in his subordinate position, the stu<strong>de</strong>nt must first<br />

gain permission to ask a question. To do that, the stu<strong>de</strong>nt must first gain the floor. Therefore,<br />

before the stu<strong>de</strong>nt can formulate a question, two exchanges are required:<br />

1. Stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s bid for the floor<br />

Teacher’s nomination of stu<strong>de</strong>nt<br />

2. Stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s request to ask a question<br />

Teacher’s permission to stu<strong>de</strong>nt<br />

These preliminary exchanges are not easy to get going from the position of the stu<strong>de</strong>nt.<br />

This is because when a stu<strong>de</strong>nt bids for the floor, the teacher’s assumption is that s/he wants<br />

to give an answer. On the other hand, when the stu<strong>de</strong>nt does get the floor, s/he is in the<br />

awkward position of having to substitute an answer with a question at that juncture, and<br />

therefore switch things around. However, the preliminary exchanges are usually smoothly<br />

executed:<br />

1. Stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s bid<br />

Teacher’s nomination: Yes, Anda.<br />

2. Stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s question: What is the English for ‘roabă’?<br />

The stu<strong>de</strong>nt may be waving a hand for bidding and the teacher may nod or say the<br />

stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s name. Permission to ask might be asked for and granted parenthetically instead of<br />

in actual words. Even so, everyone knows that permission is involved. In our example, the<br />

question was prece<strong>de</strong>d by a non-verbal bid from the stu<strong>de</strong>nt. Although we haven’t found<br />

any example in our limited corpus, such exchanges may also involve the stu<strong>de</strong>nt specifically<br />

asking for permission to ask a question, using formulas like Can I ask (you) a question?, I want<br />

to ask a question, or even Romanian formulas to the same effect. The teacher’s accord can also<br />

be verbal or non-verbal: OK, Yes, Go ahead, What is it? or a simple nod.<br />

While after a teacher question, the next move is always a stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s answer, after a<br />

stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s question, the next move always belongs to the teacher. This move is more<br />

unpredictable: it can be either a reply or a non-reply to the question. In the reply, the teacher<br />

25


may answer the question, but other replies may involve a counter-question, a redirection, a<br />

reformulation, or even a disparaging of the question or of the stu<strong>de</strong>nt who asked the<br />

question. This shows why asking a question may sometimes be a <strong>de</strong>motivating move for the<br />

stu<strong>de</strong>nt.<br />

After a stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s answer, the next move is teacher’s feedback. This is most often, the<br />

evaluation of the stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s answer, which is then followed by the next question. After a<br />

teacher’s answer to a stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s question, the next move always belongs to the teacher.<br />

Optionally, the teacher may allocate this turn to the stu<strong>de</strong>nt who asked the question, but if<br />

the stu<strong>de</strong>nt takes it, s/he can only acknowledge the answer and never evaluates it. More<br />

typically, the teacher keeps the floor and continues with the next move, which is another<br />

teacher’s question, and the cycle repeats itself: teacher initiates / asks – stu<strong>de</strong>nt answers –<br />

teacher provi<strong>de</strong>s feedback / evaluation. By contrast, the cycle for a stu<strong>de</strong>nt question turns<br />

uncertainly at every turn:<br />

1. Stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s bid<br />

T’s nomination<br />

2. (Stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s request to ask question)<br />

T’s permission)<br />

3. Stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s question<br />

4. Teacher’s move<br />

a. reply<br />

b. non-reply<br />

5a. Stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s acknowledgement (optional)<br />

5b. Teacher’s move (question)<br />

2. IRF and politeness rules<br />

General rules of politeness, learnt both at home and in the years of schooling, also<br />

govern talk in the classroom. These rules do not encourage stu<strong>de</strong>nt questions, either. The<br />

cycle involving a stu<strong>de</strong>nt question takes remarkable tact and <strong>de</strong>licacy to find a suitable<br />

moment to begin, although no teacher would ever institute a rule against the stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s<br />

questions. A general politeness rule says ‘one speaker at a time’, meaning that a stu<strong>de</strong>nt may<br />

not interrupt a speaker, whether the teacher or another stu<strong>de</strong>nt, with a question. On the<br />

other hand, a superordinate school rule holds that the teacher can talk at any time and that<br />

the teacher can interrupt the stu<strong>de</strong>nt, typically with a question. In other words, the teacher<br />

always has the floor, and the next turn at talk, and a stu<strong>de</strong>nt cannot take it to ask a question.<br />

In<strong>de</strong>ed, the next turn at talk always belongs to the teacher, even when a stu<strong>de</strong>nt is speaking,<br />

as it is the teacher who allocates the turn to a stu<strong>de</strong>nt, and can take it back at any time.<br />

Unlike other interactions where speakers negotiate turns and topics, in the classroom<br />

interaction, the turns are allocated by the teacher, who <strong>de</strong>signates both the next speaker and<br />

the topic. A consequence of this is that a stu<strong>de</strong>nt cannot, as a rule, interrupt with a question<br />

when the turn is already taken, and the speaker and topic are <strong>de</strong>signated. As the cycle<br />

follows its course, it is a real feat for a stu<strong>de</strong>nt to break it and ask a question. The corollary to<br />

these rules is that a stu<strong>de</strong>nt does not have a right to speak unless s/he is <strong>de</strong>signated to do so<br />

by the teacher, and then s/he has the obligation to address the teacher and the topic<br />

specified. In other words, the stu<strong>de</strong>nt is supposed to answer the teacher’s question and then<br />

stop and wait for the teacher’s evaluation of the answer followed by the next question.<br />

To conclu<strong>de</strong>, in or<strong>de</strong>r for the stu<strong>de</strong>nt to ask a question, s/he must locate an appropriate<br />

juncture, make a bid to talk, gain the floor, obtain permission to ask the question, and, very<br />

often, change the topic. This kind of move, <strong>de</strong>termines a change in classroom dynamics,<br />

which reverses the usual one: from passivity, reactivity, expectancy and <strong>de</strong>pen<strong>de</strong>nce to<br />

26


initiative, in<strong>de</strong>pen<strong>de</strong>nce, proactive attitu<strong>de</strong>, energetic action, and even aggression. All these<br />

are contrary to habit and violate the norms of classroom behaviour.<br />

3. Stu<strong>de</strong>nt behaviour norms<br />

Although not written, the norms of class behaviour are also very powerful. These<br />

norms do not support the stu<strong>de</strong>nt in the act of asking either, as displaying ignorance in<br />

school is against the norms. Even when the stu<strong>de</strong>nt has followed all the rules of talk and<br />

entered the cycle of interaction in the right way, s/he must ask the right question at the right<br />

time. If the stu<strong>de</strong>nt asks a question too soon or too late, the teacher’s reaction will be We’ll get<br />

to that later or We have already <strong>de</strong>alt with that. Moreover, the question should be about<br />

something that nearly everyone does not know. Otherwise, the stu<strong>de</strong>nt who asks the<br />

question will lose face when sighs or comments of What a dumb question! will be heard. One<br />

strategy to avoid this, used by some more advanced stu<strong>de</strong>nts is to <strong>de</strong>precate self in the<br />

asking, prefacing the question by I was just won<strong>de</strong>ring or This may be kind of dumb,<br />

but…Moreover, the stu<strong>de</strong>nt must take care not to ask one question too many or two<br />

questions in a row.<br />

A stu<strong>de</strong>nt’s question is expected to meet with negative reactions on the part of both<br />

classmates and teacher. A negative reaction may consist in a non-reply or a reprimand from<br />

the teacher and / or <strong>de</strong>preciation from classmates. Perplexity, incomprehension and the need<br />

for asking are disapproved, especially when the topic at hand seems so simple to everyone<br />

else and only the questioner still does not un<strong>de</strong>rstand. Moreover, in many classes, it is<br />

against the group rules to display interest in the subject-matter or the teacher.<br />

To conclu<strong>de</strong>, powerful social forces insi<strong>de</strong> and outsi<strong>de</strong> the classroom make difficult the<br />

asking of questions by the stu<strong>de</strong>nts. These forces involve peers, teacher, status, language<br />

proficiency, the IRF cycle and norms of discourse, class dynamics and years of school<br />

experience. Stu<strong>de</strong>nts have every reason but one not to ask the questions that occur to them in<br />

class. This one reason is <strong>de</strong>sire of knowledge and un<strong>de</strong>rstanding.<br />

Notes<br />

1. We do not refer here to the practice of foreign language interrogative structures.<br />

2. The recordings were done in the lessons taught in February and March 2008 by the participants in<br />

the MA in ELT Programme at the English Department, “Alexandru Ioan Cuza” University of Iaşi.<br />

References<br />

Brown, D. H. (2001). Teaching by Principles: An Interactive Approach of Language Pedagogy, Addison<br />

Wesley Longman Inc.<br />

Clark, M. (1972). Perplexity and knowledge: An inquiry into the structures of questioning, The Hague:<br />

Mouton.<br />

Dillon, J.T. (1988). Questioning and Teaching. A Manual of Practice, New York: Teachers College Press.<br />

Malamah-Thomas, A. (1988) Classroom Interaction, Oxford: Oxford University Press.<br />

Abstract<br />

This paper presents the constraints which complicate and restrict the questions the learners<br />

formulate during the foreign language class. These concern the other participants in interaction,<br />

the status of the one who risks asking one question, the structure of the cycle initiation – response<br />

– feedback, the dynamics of the class as well as the general norms of politeness and those of school<br />

conduct.<br />

27


Résumé<br />

L’article présente les contraintes qui ren<strong>de</strong>nt difficile et qui limitent la formulation <strong>de</strong>s questions<br />

par les élèves pendant une leçon. Celles-ci se réfèrent aux autres participants à l’interaction, au<br />

statut <strong>de</strong> celui qui risque une question, à la structure du cycle Initiation–Réponse–Feedback, à la<br />

dynamique <strong>de</strong> la classe aussi comme aux normes générales <strong>de</strong> politesse et <strong>de</strong> conduite scolaire.<br />

Rezumat<br />

Lucrarea prezintă constrângerile care îngreunează şi limitează formularea întrebărilor <strong>de</strong> către<br />

elevi în timpul lecţiei. Aceste constrângeri se referă la ceilalţi participanţi la interacţiune, la<br />

statutul acelui participant care riscă şi formulează o întrebare, la structura ciclului Iniţiere–<br />

Răspuns–Feedback, la dinamica lecţiei precum şi la normele generale <strong>de</strong> politeţe şi <strong>de</strong> conduită<br />

şcolară.<br />

28


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 29-34<br />

IRONIE ET ALLEGORIE POLITIQUE<br />

DANS L’ŒUVRE DE<br />

GRIGORE ALEXANDRESCU<br />

Ana-Elena Costandache<br />

29<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

Située à la jonction avec <strong>de</strong>s éléments <strong>de</strong> l’Ouest, d’une part, et <strong>de</strong>s éléments <strong>de</strong>s<br />

Balkans, d’autre part, à une époque où il y avait <strong>de</strong> nombreuses sources d’inspiration, la<br />

littérature roumaine a subi <strong>de</strong>s changements <strong>de</strong>s formes en fonction <strong>de</strong>s événements<br />

politiques <strong>de</strong> la première moitié du XIX e siècle (la Révolution, l’Union), mais aussi en<br />

fonction <strong>de</strong>s affinités <strong>de</strong>s auteurs pour les exemples culturels déjà renommés. Dans ce<br />

con<strong>text</strong>e, ce qui a attiré l’attention a été l’abondance <strong>de</strong>s genres et leur influence, alors que les<br />

troubles sociaux et politiques <strong>de</strong> l’époque ont fait une marque décisive sur les écrits, en<br />

dévoilant “<strong>de</strong>s changements imprévus dans la conscience <strong>de</strong>s écrivains”. 1<br />

Vrai pionnier du genre, confronté avec les difficultés spécifiques aux débuts littéraires,<br />

surtout celles qui tenaient à la modalité d’expression poétique du XIX e siècle, Grigore<br />

Alexandrescu aspirait, dès le commencement <strong>de</strong> son écriture, “à enrichir la langue<br />

roumaine”. En valorisant la simplicité et la sobriété, en alliant le classicisme et le<br />

romantisme, l’auteur a été en mesure <strong>de</strong> se différencier <strong>de</strong>s autres auteurs romantiques<br />

Roumains <strong>de</strong> l’époque, mais aussi <strong>de</strong>s romantiques occi<strong>de</strong>ntaux.<br />

Lucia Simona Dinescu, suite à ses étu<strong>de</strong>s culturelles expliquées dans <strong>de</strong>s discours<br />

prononcés sur la mo<strong>de</strong>rnité, a conclu qu’ “en Roumanie, la culture s’est formée à la suite <strong>de</strong><br />

différentes influences [...] et a servi à la politique”. 2 Pourtant, les interdictions brutales et les<br />

thèmes imposés ont été dépassés <strong>de</strong> manière diplomatique:<br />

“En 1840, les principautés étaient trop intégrés dans le domaine intellectuel ou<br />

économique <strong>de</strong> l’Europe, et leur développement comprenait trop d’éléments <strong>de</strong> rupture<br />

avec l’ordre féodal pour qu’une politique rétrogra<strong>de</strong>, étroite et hostile à l’intérêt national<br />

ne puisse avoir <strong>de</strong>s chances <strong>de</strong> réussite”. 3<br />

Le discours politique <strong>de</strong> l’époque en question (celle <strong>de</strong> ’48) a été particulièrement<br />

connu dans la vie culturelle, dans les œuvres littéraires, par l’intermédiaire <strong>de</strong> la promotion<br />

<strong>de</strong>s idéologies libérales et révolutionnaires. Les réactions <strong>de</strong>s groupes d’intellectuels à tout ce<br />

qui représentait la vie politique n’ont pas retardé, que ce soit au niveau <strong>de</strong>s thèmes et <strong>de</strong>s<br />

raisons littéraires, ou au niveau <strong>de</strong>s espèces visées. Les variantes étaient multiples: certaines<br />

satirisaient, comme dans le cas d’Ion Ghica “les mœurs <strong>de</strong> la société et <strong>de</strong>s pratiques<br />

rétrogra<strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong> l’époque, [...] la phraséologie et la démagogie politique, les arrangements en<br />

coulisses, le carriérisme, le faux démocratisme et la corruption <strong>de</strong>s médias” 4, tandis que<br />

d’autres discours proposaient aux lecteurs un langage assez violent. Parmi les écrivains qui<br />

ont agi d’une manière où d’autre, Alexandrescu s’est fait remarquer, en proposant <strong>de</strong>s types<br />

<strong>de</strong> politiques, mais surtout en créant <strong>de</strong>s “types d’intrigue d’où sa propre imagination<br />

pourrait tirer les éléments nécessaires à la création d’une histoire, d’un conte...” 5


En participant à la vie politique <strong>de</strong> l’époque, mais sans une implication particulière<br />

dans les mouvements révolutionnaires <strong>de</strong> 1848, Alexandrescu s’est révélé être un simple<br />

observateur politique et surtout morale. “Esprit Gaulois” 6, (surnom attribué par N.<br />

Manolescu), Alexandrescu a fait partie <strong>de</strong> la génération qui<br />

“a créé <strong>de</strong>ux <strong>de</strong>s paradigmes durables <strong>de</strong> la poésie roumaine, celui dérivé du latin (sous<br />

les influences italienne et française, lamartinisme, alexandrin iambique, élégiaque,<br />

méditation, mélancolie, etc.) et celui du folklore autochtone (mythe national et passé<br />

historique, militantisme, etc.), sans réduire la valeur <strong>de</strong> la langue littéraire, restée jusqu’à<br />

présent sous la même forme, mais en introduisant <strong>de</strong>s espèces et <strong>de</strong>s genres mo<strong>de</strong>rnes”. 7<br />

Grigore Alexandrescu n’a pas excellé en reliant les rimes, mais les espèces littéraires<br />

qu’il a promues à cette époque-là étaient différentes: l’élégie (Minuit, Adieux. A Târgovişte),<br />

la méditation (L’ombre <strong>de</strong> Mircea. A Cozia), la satire (Satire. A mon esprit), la fable (La<br />

hache et la forêt, Le chien et le chiot, La justice du lion). L’attention du lecteur est attirée<br />

par les œuvres qui versifient l’esprit politique <strong>de</strong> l’époque, en particulier la fable et la satire<br />

et, par conséquent, les œuvres <strong>de</strong> l’écrivain roumain “sont variées et très précieuses. Sa<br />

composition est réussie et tout à fait claire. Pourtant, la versification n’est pas parfaite”. 8<br />

Que ce soit <strong>de</strong> la satire ou <strong>de</strong> la fable comme espèces prises par connexion française, ou<br />

que ce soit <strong>de</strong>s productions originales, Alexandrescu a été en mesure d’y ajouter <strong>de</strong>s notes<br />

personnelles: “Dans ces productions didactiques, le poète démontre une constante affinité<br />

pour le classicisme plutôt que pour le romantisme français.” 9 Parmi les modèles que la<br />

littérature occi<strong>de</strong>ntale a proposés comme une catégorie d’espèces littéraires à part et<br />

auxquelles Alexandrescu a accordé une attention particulière s’inscrivent les espèces<br />

cultivées par La Fontaine. En effet, le fabuliste roumain doit beaucoup au grand poète<br />

français par certains éléments <strong>de</strong> technique artistique. Les faits politiques <strong>de</strong> l’époque ont<br />

“mis en forme” sa poésie et la fable d’Alexandrescu est tributaire à la fable <strong>de</strong> La Fontaine,<br />

quant au niveau <strong>de</strong>s données techniques du genre. Le poète, lui-même, avait dévoilé les<br />

significations politiques et satiriques, les physionomies et les moralités, par l’intermédiaire<br />

<strong>de</strong> certaines <strong>de</strong> ses œuvres, ce qui lui avait donné l’occasion d’une longue méditation. Mais<br />

l’allusion satirique est justement une caractéristique du genre, dont le développement est<br />

soumis à <strong>de</strong>s régimes stricts <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>spotisme et d’interdiction <strong>de</strong> la liberté d’expression. Ainsi,<br />

La Fontaine est actuel par ses fables en présentant, <strong>de</strong> façon dramatique, les réalités <strong>de</strong> sa<br />

nation. Son œuvre constitue la “source” <strong>de</strong>s situations politiques et sociales locales,<br />

caractéristiques aux réalités <strong>de</strong> Roumanie à cette époque-là: “Les fables sont aussi célèbres<br />

dans notre littérature que celles <strong>de</strong> La Fontaine dans la littérature française ou celles <strong>de</strong><br />

Krîlov dans la littérature russe”. 10<br />

L’ironie d’Alexandrescu est celle d’un esprit qui se moque <strong>de</strong> tout et <strong>de</strong> tous dans <strong>de</strong>s<br />

épîtres et <strong>de</strong>s satires (dans L’Union <strong>de</strong>s principautés): “Dans leurs tombeaux, Bogdan et<br />

Mircea ont convenu / D’unir les Roumains…” 11 et sa satire est, par excellence, politique.<br />

D’ailleurs, la fable était, à cette époque-là, un moyen <strong>de</strong> contourner la censure et l’ironie<br />

d’Alexandrescu s’avérait être insensible à l’art <strong>de</strong>s contemporains. Sa prédilection pour la<br />

fiction est expliquée par les nombreuses possibilités <strong>de</strong> satiriser les événements politiques.<br />

Sous le masque <strong>de</strong> la versification, on pourrait tout dévoiler et, par l’humour, l’auteur<br />

affirme ce qu’il semble nier - dans L’épître à M. Majeur Voinescu II. 12 Silvian Iosifescu<br />

appréciait que “le scepticisme adopté dans L’épître D.V.II était en accord avec son style<br />

ironique. Le poète défend, <strong>de</strong>rrière un sourire, l’innocence <strong>de</strong> ses fables”. 13 Par ailleurs, dans<br />

la correspondance, Alexandrescu préfère dissimuler discrètement l’ironie, le dégoût et<br />

l’amertume qui lui a inspiré le déni, tout aussi que les concessions morales <strong>de</strong> l’époque. Dans<br />

son œuvre, l’ironie est une sorte <strong>de</strong> déguisement <strong>de</strong> la fable et la “la censure la plus sage”,<br />

rappelée dans L’Epître à M. Voinescu 14 suggère une telle qualification.<br />

30


En plus <strong>de</strong> la mission d’éduquer et <strong>de</strong> former, la fable a le rôle <strong>de</strong> divertir. Le conflit<br />

présenté a un résultat immédiat, ce qui fait que la fable soit presqu’une comédie. Chez<br />

Alexandrescu, l’histoire est spécifique aux premiers écrits désignés comme <strong>de</strong>s fables,<br />

prenant la forme d’une croquis <strong>de</strong> mœurs et <strong>de</strong> caractères et en culminant dans <strong>de</strong>s écrits<br />

bien rédigés tels que Le chien et le chiot ou Le bœuf et le veau: “Quoi! Nous, tes frères! / Je<br />

vais te donner un coup…” 15 Le veau, arrivé chez son oncle, “un bœuf comme tous les<br />

autres”, mais qui occupait une bonne place «aidé par le <strong>de</strong>stin», reste surpris qu’un parent a<br />

changé ses habitu<strong>de</strong>s. “Quoi! Il dort, maintenant? / […] il a changé, le monsieur…, non pas<br />

comme vous le savez…” 16<br />

Le “spectacle” <strong>de</strong> la fable est mis en scène avec un excellent sens <strong>de</strong> la morale et <strong>de</strong>s<br />

situations, car l’auteur est bien conscient <strong>de</strong> la “manipulation” par sa langue.<br />

Habituellement, ses écrits commencent par une mise en question directe du sujet, en attirant<br />

l’attention par la formule <strong>de</strong> début, tout comme dans les contes <strong>de</strong> fées: “Dans les temps<br />

anciens, toutes les bêtes, / Dégoûtées du Roi lion...” (L’éléphant) ou comme une réflexion:<br />

“je ne vois plus <strong>de</strong> miracles à nos jours”. (La hache et la forêt). Parfois, Alexandrescu utilise<br />

le ton du narrateur, comme un conseiller d’enfants: “Le loup, <strong>de</strong> toute la bêtise / Gouvernait<br />

le pays”. (Le chien pourchassé).<br />

Les animaux personnages mettent en évi<strong>de</strong>nce les aspects du comportement humain,<br />

en particulier la conduite négative. L’éléphant - “tête dure”, chef du royaume, désigne le<br />

loup comme “ministre <strong>de</strong>s moutons”. Quand les autres animaux viennent se plaindre chez le<br />

maître que ”les moutons sont mala<strong>de</strong>s“ et que ”les agneaux sont abattus“, le roi écoute son<br />

ministre qui répond sincèrement qu’il ne prend qu’ [...] ”une peau <strong>de</strong> mouton, comme<br />

d’habitu<strong>de</strong>“. 17 (L’éléphant)<br />

Dans une autre fable, Le loup moraliste, le roi loup convoque «une réunion publique»,<br />

car il a entendu que ”les responsables poilus“ font rages et que ”la loi est faite à l’ai<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s<br />

griffes“, puis il commence à prêcher sur la modération et les bonnes mœurs, mais portant<br />

lui-même ”une veste <strong>de</strong> mouton écorché.“ Ainsi, le loup est <strong>de</strong>mandé par un autre, plus<br />

vieux, qui ”faisait l’éloge du travail“, d’où il avait acheté ”son manteau en peau <strong>de</strong> mouton»,<br />

occasion pour l’auteur <strong>de</strong> conclure: ”Quand votre manteau est en peau <strong>de</strong> mouton, /<br />

Assurez-vous ensuite que les juges tirent les boutons. “ 18<br />

La démagogie est un autre objectif <strong>de</strong>s fables. Le renard dans Le renard libéral parle<br />

sur le manque <strong>de</strong> raison, mais il est ”mis au service au département <strong>de</strong>s volailles“ et il cesse<br />

alors toute critique. Par ailleurs, la morale <strong>de</strong> la fable d’Alexandrescu concernait directement<br />

ses contemporains: ”Je sais que beaucoup <strong>de</strong> libéraux parlent en vain / Mais d’un os ils se<br />

noient à la fin.“ 19<br />

La fable La hache et la forêt révèle, <strong>de</strong> manière allégorique, les circonstances<br />

répréhensibles <strong>de</strong> l’époque. Les actes patriotiques, tels que ceux liés à la Révolution <strong>de</strong> 1848<br />

et le syndicat ont été sapés non seulement par les étrangers, mais aussi par <strong>de</strong>s ”citoyens<br />

d’entre nous, <strong>de</strong>venus <strong>de</strong>s traîtres“. 20<br />

Un thème <strong>de</strong> prédilection <strong>de</strong> Gr. Alexandrescu est représenté par l’arrogance. Le bœuf<br />

<strong>de</strong> la fable Le bœuf et le veau ne reconnaît plus son neveu, le veau arrivé pour <strong>de</strong>man<strong>de</strong>r<br />

”un peu <strong>de</strong> foin“, en déclarant qu’il n’a pas <strong>de</strong> tels parents. Alors, il ordonne à ses sujets <strong>de</strong><br />

”l’éloigner.“ 21<br />

L’égalité entre les adultes <strong>de</strong> la court est tenue par le grand chien Samson, qui est prêt<br />

d’appliquer la peine la plus sévère au chiot Samurache; ce <strong>de</strong>rnier avait osé lui s’adresser par<br />

l’appellation ”frère“ : ”Quoi ! Nous, tes frères! / Je vais te donner un coup…“ 22 (Le chien et<br />

le chiot)<br />

Le caractère dominant <strong>de</strong>s fables d’Alexandrescu est représenté par le comique <strong>de</strong><br />

caractère et <strong>de</strong> situation. Les personnages sont bien individualisés et l’action est bien située.<br />

L’individualisation est cependant limitée par les espèces spécifiques en jeu, allégoriques. Les<br />

personnages font partie du mon<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s animaux auxquels le folklore et le discours normal,<br />

31


populaire, offrent certains traits (le lion symbolise la force, le renard - la ruse, l’âne et le bœuf<br />

- la bêtise). Pourtant, il y a dans les fables d’Alexandrescu une telle individualisation et un<br />

langage comique qui placent les personnages dans une époque différente : les conseillers du<br />

roi lui s’adressent <strong>de</strong> manière fausse élégante, ”Vous, monsieur le bœuf“ et, ce <strong>de</strong>rnier, ”au<br />

cours du Carême“ apprend que son neveu est venu lui rendre visite: il s’agit du fils <strong>de</strong> Mme<br />

la Vache.<br />

Le changement <strong>de</strong> registre langagier se réalise dans certaines fables qui proposent<br />

comme thème la presse officielle <strong>de</strong> l’époque. Ce thème se retrouve comme symbole dans Le<br />

peintre et le portrait: ”Lorsque le beau <strong>de</strong>vient laid, le peintre prend un bon salaire: / T’es<br />

noir, il te fait blanc; t’es faible, il te fera grossir…“ 23<br />

Une place différente occupe Satire. A mon esprit où le commentaire satirique refait<br />

fidèlement l’image <strong>de</strong>s salons <strong>de</strong> 1840. Le raffinement du mon<strong>de</strong> occi<strong>de</strong>ntal – concrétisé en<br />

jeu <strong>de</strong> cartes, flirt, danse, mo<strong>de</strong> – est refusé: les dames jouent au whist, conscientes que ”la<br />

vie passe“. Un jeune homme galant et élégant porte <strong>de</strong>s vêtements cousus à Paris. Le<br />

bavardage et le snobisme sont propres aux salons; les <strong>de</strong>moiselles prétentieuses ne parlent à<br />

personne pendant toute une semaine lorsqu’elles ont l’occasion et l’honneur d’être<br />

remarquées par un jeune homme ”<strong>de</strong> bonne famille“. Dans ce con<strong>text</strong>e, la critique <strong>de</strong> l’auteur<br />

prend la forme <strong>de</strong>s reproches faits d’une manière humoristique. Ainsi, le poète fait preuve<br />

d’une bonne conduite en société: au whist (ou ”vist“), il gagne toujours, tandis qu’à la danse<br />

il séduit toutes les dames. Au contraire, il ne peut pas ignorer les situations ridicules partout<br />

où il y en a le cas. 24 Ainsi, la satire <strong>de</strong>vient une série <strong>de</strong> scènes: les cartes à jouer, le jeune<br />

homme qui se moque <strong>de</strong>s dames, la danse, la conversation, tout dans le même décor – les<br />

salons bourgeois d’autrefois.<br />

La contribution <strong>de</strong> Gr. Alexandrescu au développement <strong>de</strong>s moyens artistiques est<br />

incontestable. La critique littéraire a été d’avis que ”son travail a conduit à l’enrichissement<br />

<strong>de</strong> la langue roumaine, mais d’une manière négative au niveau <strong>de</strong> la versification“ 25 ;<br />

pourtant, le poète s’est avéré être un chercheur <strong>de</strong> la langue et du langage artistique. Sa<br />

contribution la plus gran<strong>de</strong> a été au niveau stylistique, sur les moyens comiques, par la<br />

manipulation <strong>de</strong> l’ironie et <strong>de</strong> l’humour, compte tenant <strong>de</strong> la place que le langage occupe<br />

dans les versets satiriques écrits à la première personne. D’ailleurs, le comique tient à la<br />

manière <strong>de</strong> savoir raconter et d’apprécier, tout aussi que le comique est fourni par<br />

l’utilisation inattendue du ton familier, léger.<br />

Pour conclure, on peut affirmer que l’œuvre d’Alexandrescu reste le témoignage d’un<br />

travail assidu. Son rôle a été important pour ”le <strong>de</strong>stin“ du XIX e siècle, en restant un poète<br />

toujours actuel.<br />

Notes<br />

Şerban Cioculescu, Istoria literaturii române mo<strong>de</strong>rne, Eminescu, Bucureşti, 1985, p. 10<br />

2 Vatra (L’Âtre), no 4/ avril 2008, p. 21<br />

3 Paul Cornea, Originile romantismului românesc, Cartea românească, Bucureşti, 2008, p. 370-371<br />

4 Teodor Vârgolici, Aspecte ale romanului românesc din secolul al XIX-lea, Eminescu, Bucureşti, 1985,<br />

p. 32<br />

5 Nicolae Iorga, Istoria literaturii româneti. Arta şi literatura românilor, Editura Fundaţiei Culturale<br />

Române, Bucureşti, 1999, p. 161<br />

6 Nicolae Manolescu, Poeţi romantici, Editura Fundaţiei Culturale Române, Bucureşti, 1999, p. 76<br />

7 Al. Piru, Istoria literaturii române <strong>de</strong> la început până azi, Univers, Bucureşti, 1981, p. 63<br />

8 Ghe. Adamescu, Istoria literaturii române, Eminescu, Bucureşti, 1998, p. 136<br />

9Şerban Cioculescu, Vladimir Streinu, Tudor Vianu, Istoria literaturii române mo<strong>de</strong>rne, Eminescu,<br />

Bucureşti, 1985, p. 45<br />

10 Nicolae Manolescu, œuvre citée, p. 92<br />

11 Gr. Alexandrescu, Satiră. Duhului meu, Porto-Franco, Galaţi, 1993, p. 44<br />

32


12 Ibi<strong>de</strong>m, p. 63<br />

3 Silvian Iosifescu, Gr. Alexandrescu, Editura tineretului, Bucureşti, 1965, p. 100<br />

4 Gr. Alexandrescu, œuvre citée, p. 45<br />

5 Gr. Alexandrescu, œuvre citée, p. 84<br />

6 Ibi<strong>de</strong>m, p. 89<br />

7 Ibi<strong>de</strong>m, p. 76<br />

18 Ibi<strong>de</strong>m, p. 88<br />

19 Ibi<strong>de</strong>m, p. 91<br />

20 Gr. Alexandrescu, Opere, volumul I, Editura <strong>de</strong> stat pentru literatură şi artă, Bucureşti, 1957, p. 75<br />

2 Ibi<strong>de</strong>m, p. 89<br />

22 Ibi<strong>de</strong>m, p. 84<br />

23 Ibi<strong>de</strong>m, p. 324<br />

24 Ibi<strong>de</strong>m, pp. 190-191<br />

25 Ibi<strong>de</strong>m, p. 36<br />

Bibliographie sélective<br />

Adamescu, Gh. (1998). Istoria literaturii române, Bucureşti: Eminescu.<br />

Alexandrescu, Gr.(1957). Opere, tom I, Bucureşti: Editura <strong>de</strong> Stat pentru Literaturǎ şi Artǎ.<br />

Alexandrescu, Gr.(1993). Satiră. Duhului meu, Galaţi: Porto-Franco.<br />

Cioculescu, Ş., Streinu, V., Vianu, T. (1985). Istoria literaturii române, Bucureşti: Eminescu.<br />

Cioculescu, Ş. (1985). Istoria literaturii române mo<strong>de</strong>rne, Bucureşti: Eminescu.<br />

Cornea, P. (2008). Originile romantismului românesc, Bucureşti: Cartea Româneascǎ.<br />

Iorga, N. (1999). Istoria literaturii româneşti. Arta şi literatura românilor, Bucureşti: Editura Fundaţiei<br />

Culturale Roumâne.<br />

Iosifescu, S. (1965). Gr. Alexandrescu, Bucureşti: Editura Tineretului.<br />

Manolescu, N. (1999). Poeţi romantici, Bucureşti: Editura Fundaţiei Culturale Roumâne.<br />

Piru, Al. (1981). Istoria literaturii române <strong>de</strong> la început până azi, Bucureşti: Univers.<br />

* * * * * Vatra, no 4/ avril 2008<br />

Vârgolici, T. (1985). Aspecte ale romanului românesc din secolul al XIX-lea, Bucureşti: Eminescu.<br />

Abstract<br />

Grigore Alexandrescu played an important role in the lyrical <strong>de</strong>stiny of the 19 th century, being<br />

consi<strong>de</strong>red as the poet of his time. The content of his work was not only meant to outline opinions<br />

and to educate but also to entertain. Obviously influenced by La Fontaine’s literary creation, the<br />

Romanian author succee<strong>de</strong>d in creating a political satire of his times, presenting a conflict of i<strong>de</strong>as<br />

(usually as a dialogue) or imagining dramatic political confrontations which had an immediate<br />

impact, being, most frequently, unexpected for the rea<strong>de</strong>r. The refined allusions and the poetical<br />

language intertwined with satirical notes reveal an important element peculiar to Alexandrescu:<br />

the irony of a witty person who knows how to make jokes by means of puns.<br />

Résumé<br />

Grigore Alexandrescu a joué un rôle important dans le <strong>de</strong>stin lyrique du XIX e siècle, étant<br />

considéré comme un poète à l’époque actuelle. Le contenu <strong>de</strong> son travail a, en plus <strong>de</strong> la mission <strong>de</strong><br />

former et d’éduquer un rôle différent, plus important encore: celui <strong>de</strong> divertir.<br />

Visiblement influencé par l’œuvre <strong>de</strong> La Fontaine, l’écrivain roumain a réussi à réaliser une satire<br />

politique <strong>de</strong> son temps, en présentant un conflit d’idées versifiées (habituellement sous la forme du<br />

dialogue) ou en imaginant <strong>de</strong>s affrontements politiques dramatiques, mais avec un résultat<br />

immédiat et, le plus souvent, inattendu pour le lecteur. Les allusions fines et le langage poétique<br />

entrecoupé <strong>de</strong> notes satiriques „trahissent” un élément important d’Alexandrescu: l’ironie d’un<br />

homme d’esprit qui sait plaisanter par <strong>de</strong>s jeux <strong>de</strong> mots.<br />

33


Rezumat<br />

Grigore Alexandrescu a jucat un rol important în <strong>de</strong>stinul liric al secolului al XIX-lea, fiind<br />

consi<strong>de</strong>rat un poet al epocii actuale. Conţinutul lucrărilor sale are, pe lângă misiunea <strong>de</strong> a forma si<br />

educa, un rol mai important, acela <strong>de</strong> a distra.<br />

Vizibil influenţat <strong>de</strong> opera lui La Fontaine, scriitorul român a reuşit să realizeze o satiră politică a<br />

timpului său, prezentând, în formă versificată, un conflict <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>i (cel mai frecvent, sub forma<br />

unui dialog) sau imaginând confruntări politice dramatice, cu rezultat imediat şi, cel mai a<strong>de</strong>sea,<br />

neaşteptat pentru cititor. Aluziile fine şi limbajul poetic întretăiat <strong>de</strong> note satirice «tră<strong>de</strong>ază» un<br />

element important al operei lui Alexandrescu : iromia unui om <strong>de</strong> spirit care ştie să glumească<br />

prin intermediul jocurilor <strong>de</strong> cuvinte.<br />

34


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 35-38<br />

FRACTAL EXTENSIONS WITHIN THE LITERARY TEXT<br />

Nicoleta Ifrim<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

The fractal theory relates to a specific view on the "natural consciousness", now<br />

focused on as inherently fractal, fragmented and broken up into irregular fragments.<br />

For a fractal as a geometric figure not only does it have irregular shapes - the zig-zag<br />

world of nature - but a hid<strong>de</strong>n or<strong>de</strong>r of these irregular shapes is lurking in that disor<strong>de</strong>r. The<br />

irregular patters are self-similar over scales. The overall pattern of a fractal is repeated, with<br />

similarity, and sometimes even with exactitu<strong>de</strong>, when one looks at a small part of the figure.<br />

It ren<strong>de</strong>rs recursive structures. For instance, if one looks at the irregular shape of a mountain,<br />

and then he looks closer at a small part of the mountain, he will find the same basic shape of<br />

the whole mountain repeated on a smaller scale. When you look closer still you see the same<br />

shape again, and so on to infinity. This happens within the Man<strong>de</strong>lbrot itself where there is<br />

an infinite number of smaller Man<strong>de</strong>lbrot shapes hid<strong>de</strong>n everywhere within the zig-zaggy,<br />

spiral edges of the overall form.<br />

As Man<strong>de</strong>lbrot points out, this i<strong>de</strong>a of recursive self-similarity was originally <strong>de</strong>veloped<br />

by the philosopher Leibniz, but it also can be related to Goethe’s organicist view. Another<br />

basic principle that gives essence to the fractalic perspective is that entropic disor<strong>de</strong>r plays a<br />

constructive way in creating or<strong>de</strong>r. A new approach has been born, as it requires, as N.<br />

Katherine Hayles says, ”a shift from the individual unit to recursive symmetries between<br />

scale levels” (Hayles 1990: 13). That means that the reserch discourse is now focused on the<br />

similarities which are replicated across the scale levels of a system, be it existential, social or<br />

cultural. The phenomena associated to the scale-<strong>de</strong>pen<strong>de</strong>nt symmetries are characteristic to a<br />

fractal point of view.<br />

Therefore, the necessary coexistence of the two ways of approaching fractals in<br />

literature brings about the concept of continuity in rupture which appears to be the only<br />

productive critical pattern suiting the purposes of our approach. Thus, what mathematics<br />

and the science of fractals have finally revealed can be applied in interpreting literature,<br />

namely that: the "microcosm" (the literary <strong>text</strong>) which is smaller or drawn at a lower-level, is<br />

essentially similar to the "macrocosm" (the real world) which is larger and/or levelled<br />

higher; the latter is not somehow superior to the former by virtue of size or level; the<br />

dynamics of literary <strong>de</strong>velopment are such that the macrocosm springs from and is<br />

groun<strong>de</strong>d in the microcosm, not the other way around (the fictionalised real world). What<br />

Blaise Pascal, the French mathematician and philosopher, observed over three centuries ago<br />

can now be truly noted: "Nature (n.b. literature) imitates herself. A grain thrown onto good<br />

ground brings forth fruit; a principle thrown into a good mind brings forth fruit. Everything<br />

is created and conducted by the same Master - the root, the branch, the fruits, the principles,<br />

the consequences."<br />

In our view, literature is a fractal object due to the following arguments: it is subjected<br />

to specific tensional fields such as unforeseeability, <strong>de</strong>viation, ambiguity, its critical<br />

interpretation displays rea<strong>de</strong>r-centrism and hazard, being structured as a fragment ma<strong>de</strong> up of<br />

fragments, the literary work creates a fluctuating geometrical space (different interpretations,<br />

open ends, puzzle-like structures, disseminated characters), the fractal potentiality can be<br />

35


applied in re-interpreting classical works, the contemporary literature becomes an<br />

intermediate fractality within the infinite possible fractalities such as the historical, cultural<br />

or artistic ones.<br />

One can also notice that fractality is complementarily bi-dimensional. There is an overt<br />

fractal literarity as well as a covert one. The former occurs especially in the postmo<strong>de</strong>rn<br />

literature, where the skeptical solution of the mo<strong>de</strong>rnists, who witnessed the failuire of their<br />

utopias, is replaced by the resurrection of the secondary, the fragment and the marginal, by<br />

disregarding hierarchies so that new sensibility might be said to be fractal, post-dichotomist and<br />

post-reductive (Monica Spiridon). The latter is implied by literature in general as its intrinsec<br />

feature.<br />

Un<strong>de</strong>r these circumstances, the literary work reveals itself as a continuum which<br />

ren<strong>de</strong>rs the multiplication of the same root-theme, also structured by means of a collage of<br />

mises en abyme that can make up a liminal sub<strong>text</strong> <strong>de</strong>veloping the main <strong>text</strong>ual i<strong>de</strong>a in<br />

infinite variations and inversions. Being a „major mechanism of <strong>text</strong>ual self-reflection”, as<br />

Stephanie Sieburth puts it, the mise en abyme technique can be <strong>de</strong>fined as a „ <strong>text</strong>ual segment<br />

which constitutes a microcosm, a schematic, con<strong>de</strong>nsed version of the entire <strong>text</strong> as<br />

macrocosm” (Sánchez 1992: 259). This concept is compatible with the i<strong>de</strong>a of a fractal, as both<br />

relate to a <strong>text</strong>ual representation whose complexity can be best approached by regarding at<br />

its inner self-similarity across <strong>text</strong>ual levels. The recursive symmetries of the <strong>text</strong>-system turn<br />

into a puzzle of mutually referential fragments with no dominating voice. From this point of<br />

view, Sieburth <strong>de</strong>scribes the novel as a dynamic, non-liniar system, predominantly fractal, as<br />

it grows out of the infinite replicas of the main story, thematic variations that always reflect<br />

the <strong>text</strong>ual whole. The critic illustrates these i<strong>de</strong>as within Clarín’s novel, La Regenta, where<br />

she notes that<br />

”the meaning of any given fragment constantly shifts, changes, even inverts, <strong>de</strong>pending<br />

on which other fragment is juxtaposed with it (...). Continual dialectic of diversity and<br />

similarity, and the freedom of juxtaposition resulting from the breakdown of the <strong>text</strong>’s<br />

liniarity, cause La Regenta to be a constantly changing body, whose meaning is never<br />

static and <strong>de</strong>terminable, but always being created and dissolving as different segments<br />

are juxtaposed.” (Sánchez 1992: 260)<br />

Dällenbach’s second type of mise en abyme comes into discussion here, namely the<br />

repeated reflection, as the inner <strong>text</strong>ual secquence not only reflects the enclosing <strong>text</strong>, but in its<br />

turn inclu<strong>de</strong>s a fragment which reflects infinitly the reflecting level. Man<strong>de</strong>lbrot’s fractals are<br />

ma<strong>de</strong> up in the same way, as they can be projecting a multitu<strong>de</strong> of specular metaphors that<br />

share the infinite return of cvasi-i<strong>de</strong>ntical forms.[1] Elisabeth Sánchez says that<br />

”the internal mirror, regardless of the aspect of the <strong>text</strong> at which it is aimed, may create<br />

the impression of a faithful copy, but the duplication will always be inexact – a bare<br />

outline, a con<strong>de</strong>nsation, a partial reflection, perhaps even a polar opposite. The <strong>text</strong>ual<br />

mirror provi<strong>de</strong>s only the suggestion of i<strong>de</strong>ntity, but minds bent on finding i<strong>de</strong>ntical<br />

structures will in<strong>de</strong>ed find them, perhaps at the expense of noting the differences. For<br />

this reason, I think that the difference I outlined between the self-reflecting <strong>text</strong> as<br />

<strong>de</strong>fined by the mise en abyme and the quasi-self-similar, mind-boggling structures which<br />

constitute a typical fractal is not so much a difference in kind as one of emphasis. The<br />

shift in emphasis, I believe, corresponds to the transition between structuralism and<br />

poststructuralism. Because our un<strong>de</strong>rstanding of literary <strong>text</strong>s has evolved since the time<br />

Dällenbach pinned down the mise en abyme, our use of the term has also evolved, and it<br />

has evolved in the direction of the fractal. Our <strong>text</strong>ual mirrors are no longer smoothsurfaced,<br />

static reflectors emitting images of unified, regularly self-embedding and<br />

enclosed structures. They have become turbulent and fractured, and the images they<br />

project are of a <strong>text</strong> which is fragmented, dynamic, unpredictable, in<strong>de</strong>terminate, open,<br />

36


and much more complex than many of us had once imagined. Fractal, then may be the<br />

better term (...). Within these <strong>text</strong>ual bounds, an infinite number of <strong>text</strong>s is possible. This<br />

is the beauty of the fractal: it allows for the possibility of infinitu<strong>de</strong> circumscribed within<br />

a finite area.” (Sánchez 1992:261-2)<br />

Or, in the same sense,<br />

”All elements in the novel are part of a network of relations and not entities complete in<br />

themselves. Characters are shown to be merely particular instances of recurring patterns,<br />

while the <strong>text</strong> can be seen to break up into mutually reflecting segments which, like the<br />

characters, participate in an interrelated whole. I realize, of course, that all literary <strong>text</strong>s<br />

are networks of relations, but [...] La Regenta invites us to become aware of its reflexive<br />

structure as well as of the relational nature of its characters.” (Sánchez 1996:6)<br />

Another novel, Pedro Páramo, makes Elisabeth Sánchez note that<br />

”In such a novel as Pedro Páramo, where boundaries dissolve and imagined wholes break<br />

up into fragments that echo each other and one another without ever quite connecting<br />

(except, perhaps, in the mind of the rea<strong>de</strong>r), the notion of fractal spaces – spaces that lie<br />

in the interstices of our thought categories – is ma<strong>de</strong> to or<strong>de</strong>r. We might say that Rulfo<br />

has produced an artistic object that looks very much like a fractal in its unwieldy surface<br />

structure, and that he has intentionally increased the complexity of his work by first<br />

breaking the story into bits and pieces, which in turn may contain smaller, self-similar<br />

bits and pieces, and then or<strong>de</strong>ring the segments in such a manner that they reveal much<br />

more about his story, and in fewer words, than a traditional sequential or<strong>de</strong>ring would.<br />

Whereas it is possible to view the novel as a mosaic to be pieced toghether, or as a broken<br />

mirror, I prefer the metaphor of the fractal, precisely because it brings the i<strong>de</strong>a of the<br />

mirror into play by inviting rea<strong>de</strong>rs to look for recursive symmetry, at the same time that<br />

it suggests a comparison with the mosaic, whose fractured pieces rea<strong>de</strong>rs must reor<strong>de</strong>r<br />

one by one if they hope to discover a recognizable form hid<strong>de</strong>n within fragments.”<br />

(Sánchez 1996: 232)<br />

The act of reading itself seems to bear spectral and fractal features as well. In this<br />

perspective, the <strong>text</strong> to be interpreted surpasses its traditional linear and static characteristics<br />

to turn into a process,<br />

”a fractal in motion, an evolving shape (...). Whether we are attempting to represent our<br />

diachronic movement through the <strong>text</strong> or our synchronic overview of its parts, we always<br />

must do so by imagining or drawing forms in space, and, as we have seen, the form that<br />

best captures the temporal doubling (the spiral) is much more complex than it first<br />

seemed. It is more complex because we have become aware that it is possible to focus on<br />

different aspects or levels of the <strong>text</strong> and to chart their behavior over time. When we<br />

recognize the correspon<strong>de</strong>nces in behavior between the parts and levels (the repetitions<br />

with variations), we return to a synchronic reading. In this we are very much like the<br />

fractal geometricians who likewise have shifted their attention to consi<strong>de</strong>r what is going<br />

on between scale levels.” (Sánchez 1993: 203)<br />

Or<br />

„we can draw maps of our temporal movement through the <strong>text</strong>, following the<br />

plot of a novel, for example, or tracing patterns of imagery or recurring themes; or we can<br />

draw a mo<strong>de</strong>l of relationships among parts or between parts and the whole. There are<br />

many ways that a literary <strong>text</strong> can be represented as a form moving through space or as a<br />

form that the critic has frozen momentarily in or<strong>de</strong>r to examine the relationships between<br />

37


its parts. We should not forget, however, that our diagrams will be mere approximations<br />

of the infinitely rich and complex process of reading–of constructing a world through our<br />

interpretation of verbal signs and continually restructuring that world as our reading<br />

progresses.” (Sánchez 1993: 198-9)<br />

Note<br />

1) See also Antofi S.: The Poetical Discourse – Galati: Europlus, 2005<br />

References<br />

Hayles, N.H. (1990). Chaos Bound: Or<strong>de</strong>rly Disor<strong>de</strong>r in Contemporary Literature and Science, Ithaca:<br />

Cornell University Press.<br />

Sánchez, E. (1992). ”La Regenta as Fractal” in Revista <strong>de</strong> Estudios Hispánicos, 26, 259.<br />

Sánchez, E. (1992). ”Or<strong>de</strong>r/Disor<strong>de</strong>r and Complexity in La Regenta: A Case for Spiraling Outward<br />

and Upward”, in South Central Review. The Journal of the South Central Mo<strong>de</strong>rn Language Association,<br />

13, 4, 6.<br />

Sánchez, E. (1993). ”Spatial Forms and Fractals: A Reconsi<strong>de</strong>ration of Azorín’s Doña Inés”, in Journal of<br />

Interdisciplinary Literary Studies: Innovative Approaches to Hispanic Literature, 5, 2, 203.<br />

Abstract<br />

Against the background of contemporary morphogenetic sciences, the theory of fractals brings up a<br />

new perspective on natural objects generating different processes which can no longer be discussed<br />

in terms of the Eucli<strong>de</strong>an geometry. B.Man<strong>de</strong>lbrot, the foun<strong>de</strong>r of this theory, said that various<br />

natural forms have irregular, fragmented structures so that Nature bears a higher qualitative level<br />

of intrinsec complexity than the one ren<strong>de</strong>red by the Eucli<strong>de</strong>an geometry. Thus, the theory of<br />

fractals bears a <strong>de</strong>eper level of structuring world which turns into a multi-faceted complexity of<br />

forms and meanings. Man<strong>de</strong>lbrot shows mathematically and graphically how nature uses the<br />

fractal dimensions and what he calls self-constrained chance to create the complex and irregular<br />

forms of the real world.<br />

Résumé<br />

Dans le con<strong>text</strong>e général <strong>de</strong>s sciences morphogénétiques contemporaines, la théorie <strong>de</strong>s fractales<br />

ouvre une nouvelle perspective sur les objets naturels, en générant <strong>de</strong>s procès qu’on peut plus<br />

analyser dans les termes <strong>de</strong> la géométrie euclidienne. B. Man<strong>de</strong>lbrot, le créateur <strong>de</strong> cette théorie,<br />

soutient que les différentes formes naturelles ont une structure fragmentaire et irrégulière, et que<br />

l’espace naturel relève un niveau qualitatif intrinsèque <strong>de</strong> complexité tout à fait différente <strong>de</strong> celui<br />

montre par le filtre euclidien. Ainsi, la théorie <strong>de</strong> fractales développe une image ordonnée du<br />

mon<strong>de</strong> dans un univers avec <strong>de</strong>s multiples facettes <strong>de</strong>s formes et significations. Man<strong>de</strong>lbrot<br />

démontre a l’ai<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s mathématiques et graphiquement la manière dans laquelle la nature utilise la<br />

dimension fractale pour re-créer les formes complexes et irrégulières <strong>de</strong> l’univers.<br />

Rezumat<br />

În con<strong>text</strong>ul general al ştiinţelor morfogenetice contemporane, teoria fractalilor oferă o nouă<br />

perspectivă asupra obiectelor naturale, generând diferite procese care nu mai pot fi analizate în<br />

termenii geometriei euclidiene liniare. B.Man<strong>de</strong>lbrot, fondatorul acestei teorii, afirmă ca variatele<br />

forme naturale au structură fragmentară şi iregulată, încât spaţiul natural relevă un nivel<br />

calitativ intrinsec <strong>de</strong> complexitate total diferit <strong>de</strong>cât cel evi<strong>de</strong>nţiat prin filtrul euclidian. Astfel,<br />

teoria fractalilor <strong>de</strong>zvoltă o imagine a lumii ordonată într-un univers multifaţetat <strong>de</strong> forme şi<br />

semnificaţii. Man<strong>de</strong>lbrot <strong>de</strong>monstrează matematic şi grafic modul în care natura foloseşte<br />

dimensiunea fractală pentru a re-crea formele complexe şi iregulate ale universului.<br />

38


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 39-42<br />

39<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

DAS BILD NAPOLEONS IN DER DEUTSCHEN LITERATUR<br />

Gabriel Isto<strong>de</strong><br />

“Egal wie stark sie meine Verdienste vermin<strong>de</strong>rn, ob sie mich<br />

beiseitezuschaffen o<strong>de</strong>r zu verstümmeln versuchen, es wird sehr schwer sein,<br />

mich ganz und gar zum Verschwin<strong>de</strong>n zu bringen. Der französische Historiker<br />

wird verpflichtet sein, sich mit <strong>de</strong>m Kaiserreich zu beschäftigen und, wenn er ein<br />

Herz haben sollte, wird er gezwungen sein, mir etwas zurückzugeben, und mir<br />

mein Recht zu gewähren. “<br />

Napoleon I. Bonaparte<br />

Epos, Drama und Lyrik haben sich mit <strong>de</strong>m Leben Napoleons beschäftigt, sowohl in<br />

<strong>de</strong>r Zeit seines Lebens als auch nach seinem To<strong>de</strong>. Wenn zur Zeit seines Lebens ein<br />

Hassgefühl bei <strong>de</strong>n feindlichen Völkern sich leicht bemerkbar macht, schon mit <strong>de</strong>m To<strong>de</strong><br />

<strong>de</strong>s großen Menschen vermin<strong>de</strong>rt und eben verliert sich dieses Gefühl zugunsten <strong>de</strong>s Hel<strong>de</strong>n<br />

und <strong>de</strong>s Genies: “ … die Musen wer<strong>de</strong>n bessere Sänger zum Feier ihres Lieblings begeistern,<br />

und wenn einst Menschen verstummen, so sprechen die Steine…“<br />

Hellere o<strong>de</strong>r düstere Farben spiegeln Napoleon nach <strong>de</strong>r politischen Richtung <strong>de</strong>s<br />

Autors: Einerseits bleiben die begeisterten Dichter Italiens und Polens, die ihn für ein Symbol<br />

<strong>de</strong>s nationalen Freiheitskampfes hielten, dann die, die in ihm <strong>de</strong>n Mann mit einem Herz für<br />

sein Volk und für seine getreuen Grenadiere und Invali<strong>de</strong>n sahen und nicht letzendlich die,<br />

die das Genie und <strong>de</strong>n großen Hel<strong>de</strong>n <strong>de</strong>s Jahrhun<strong>de</strong>rts verstan<strong>de</strong>n und ehrlich schätzen<br />

wollten.<br />

Zu dieser III. Kategorie könnten wir auch Heine zählen, wenn man nicht so stark in<br />

Anbetracht nimmt - wie einige behaupten - dass er Napoleon verehrte, weil er <strong>de</strong>n Ju<strong>de</strong>n<br />

seiner Heimat die bürgerliche Gleichberechtigung gebracht hätte.<br />

An<strong>de</strong>rerseits stan<strong>de</strong>n Bourbonentreue, Liberale und Napoleons Gegner, Anhänger <strong>de</strong>r<br />

Revolution (in Frankreich) und meistens englische o<strong>de</strong>r politisch gegnerisch - orientierte<br />

Schriftsteller. Lyriker <strong>de</strong>r Befreiungskriege, wie Kleist, Körner, Arndt, Rückert und<br />

Schenkendorf entwickelten in Preußen dieses negative Napoleon-Bild. So wur<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>r Held,<br />

das Genie, <strong>de</strong>r Titan mit seinen großen Leistungen, <strong>de</strong>r Volkskaiser mit seinem Mythos, <strong>de</strong>r<br />

Sieger und <strong>de</strong>r Herrscher, <strong>de</strong>m Renegaten, <strong>de</strong>m Immoralisten, <strong>de</strong>m Attila und Tamerlan, <strong>de</strong>m<br />

Tyrannen, Nationalfeind, Gotteslästerer und Menschenverächter entgegengestellt.<br />

Die Zeit und die Geschichte haben doch – so wie es aussieht – <strong>de</strong>n zuerst genannten<br />

Kombatanten mehr Achtung und Anerkennung erwiesen.<br />

In <strong>de</strong>r <strong>de</strong>utschen Literatur belegen Höl<strong>de</strong>rlins Hymnen: Bonaparte und Dem<br />

Allgenannten (1798), wie sehr <strong>de</strong>r Aufstieg <strong>de</strong>s Generals die Miterleben<strong>de</strong>n blen<strong>de</strong>te. Wie<br />

weit sich auch in <strong>de</strong>r jüngst wie<strong>de</strong>rgefun<strong>de</strong>nen Frie<strong>de</strong>nsfeier das Bild <strong>de</strong>s Völkerbezwingers<br />

spiegelt, ist umstritten. Die Lyriker <strong>de</strong>r Befreiungskriege entwickeln das negative Napoleon<br />

Bild zu einer gewissen literarischen Höhe und zu schärferen Umrissen. Das Bild behielt aber


die einseitig gesteigerten Züge <strong>de</strong>s Nationalfein<strong>de</strong>s und Tyrannen, <strong>de</strong>s Menschenverchters<br />

und Gotteslästerers, <strong>de</strong>ssen militärischer Größe man, nach Kleist, erst Bewun<strong>de</strong>rung zollen<br />

könne, wenn er gestürzt sei.<br />

Diesem negativen Bild stehen entgegen das zwischen Tyrannenhass und Geniekult<br />

schwanken<strong>de</strong> Napoleon-Porträt Lord Byrons - “Du mehr als Mensch, im Schlimmen wie im<br />

Guten” - (O<strong>de</strong> to Bonaparte, 1814 ) sowie Goethes Auffassung von <strong>de</strong>m “Bändiger <strong>de</strong>r<br />

Revolution” und einem <strong>de</strong>r “produktivsten Menschen”.<br />

Gedichte auf <strong>de</strong>m Tod <strong>de</strong>s großen Kaisers entstan<strong>de</strong>n mit <strong>de</strong>r Nachricht von seinem<br />

En<strong>de</strong> (F. Grillparzer, 1821; A.v. Chamisso). Byron (O<strong>de</strong> to Napoleon, 1814 und The Age of<br />

Bronce,1823) benutzter Vergleich Napoleons mit Prometheus, <strong>de</strong>r an <strong>de</strong>n Felsen geschmie<strong>de</strong>t<br />

wur<strong>de</strong>, ist häufig wie<strong>de</strong>rholt wor<strong>de</strong>n und er erscheint auch bei Heine in seiner Reise von<br />

München nach Genua:<br />

„Vielleicht nach Jahrtausen<strong>de</strong>n, wird ein spitzfindiger Schulmeister beweisen, daß<br />

<strong>de</strong>r Napoleon Bonaparte ganz i<strong>de</strong>ntisch sei mit jenem an<strong>de</strong>rn Titane, <strong>de</strong>r <strong>de</strong>n Göttern<br />

das Licht raubte und für dieses Vergehen auf einem einsamen Felsen, mitten im Meere<br />

angeschmie<strong>de</strong>t wur<strong>de</strong>, preisgegeben einem Geier, <strong>de</strong>r täglich sein Herz zerfleischte”.<br />

Ein richtiger Napoleon - Kult wird <strong>de</strong>utlich in Heines Buch Le Grand (1827) und<br />

Nordseebil<strong>de</strong>r (1827). Die großartige Persönlichkeit von Napoleon Bonaparte hat Heine<br />

eigentlich während seines ganzen Lebens beschäftigt. Das Bild <strong>de</strong>s Kaisers erscheint mit<br />

einer unablässigen Beharrlichkeit in <strong>de</strong>n verschie<strong>de</strong>nsten Werken <strong>de</strong>s Dichters: Dieses fängt<br />

mit <strong>de</strong>r berühmten Balla<strong>de</strong> Die Grenadiere (1820) an, und geht weiter mit I<strong>de</strong>en. Das Buch Le<br />

Grand (1826), Reisebil<strong>de</strong>r (1862-1831), Französische Maler (1831), Französische Zustän<strong>de</strong> (1832),<br />

Deutschland. Ein Wintermärchen (1844), Geständnisse (1854) und die monumentale Lutetia, die<br />

zwischen <strong>de</strong>n Jahren 1840 - 1846 verfasst wur<strong>de</strong> und 1854 vollständig erschienen ist. Der<br />

<strong>de</strong>utsche Schriftsteller macht <strong>de</strong>m Kaiser in einer seiner Werken ein Bild, das Napoleon uns<br />

fast zum Gott vorstellt :<br />

“…neue Geschlechter wer<strong>de</strong>n aus <strong>de</strong>r Er<strong>de</strong> hervorwachsen, wer<strong>de</strong>n schwin<strong>de</strong>lnd an<br />

jenes Bild hinaufsehen und sich wie<strong>de</strong>r in die Er<strong>de</strong> legen; -und die Zeit, unfähig, solch<br />

Bild zu zerstören, wird es in sagenhafte Nebel zu hüllen suchen, und seine ungeheure<br />

Geschichte wird endlich ein Mythos .“<br />

Das sind aber nur die be<strong>de</strong>utendsten Werke <strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong>utschen Schriftstellers, in <strong>de</strong>nen<br />

dieser sukzessive und obsessive Auftritt Napoleons o<strong>de</strong>r seines Namens eine Art Leitfa<strong>de</strong>n<br />

bil<strong>de</strong>t; es gibt aber noch viele von Heines Schriften, in <strong>de</strong>nen von Zeit zu Zeit <strong>de</strong>r Name <strong>de</strong>s<br />

großen Mannes mit Bezug auf verschie<strong>de</strong>ne Aspekte und Situationen erscheint.<br />

Es ist doch nicht nur so, dass Napoleon in <strong>de</strong>n obengenannten Werken erscheint,<br />

son<strong>de</strong>rn er wird in<strong>de</strong>ssen zu einem wahren Wertkriterium seiner Epoche.<br />

Und wo <strong>de</strong>r Kaiser Napoleon vor unseren Augen in <strong>de</strong>n ersten Schriften Heines wie<br />

Die Harzreise, I<strong>de</strong>en. Das Buch Le Grand, Die Reise von München nach Genua und Englische<br />

Fragmente unter solchen epopeischen Dimensionen enthüllt wird, wo er sich immer<br />

irgendwo zwischen einer überschwenglichen und einer pathetischen mit “mythischem<br />

Fa<strong>de</strong>n” gewebten Verherrlichung fin<strong>de</strong>t, da zeigt Heine später in seinen Französischen<br />

Zustän<strong>de</strong>n und Lutetia nur eine abweisen<strong>de</strong> Haltung, die eine stark ausgeprägte Nüchternheit<br />

bewies.<br />

So wird Napoleon “<strong>de</strong>r eiserne Mann, fußend auf seinen Kanonenruhm”, so wird er<br />

nur ein “Genie, in <strong>de</strong>ssen Haupte die Adler <strong>de</strong>r Begeisterung horsteten, während in seinem<br />

Herzen die Schlangen <strong>de</strong>s Kalküls sich ringelten”, so wird seine “Religion am En<strong>de</strong><br />

langweilig wie je<strong>de</strong> an<strong>de</strong>re”, so wird er “Feind <strong>de</strong>r Freiheit”, “Despot und gekrönte<br />

40


Selbstsucht”, und so wird <strong>de</strong>r “große Kaiser”, “stockblind für je<strong>de</strong> Erscheinung”, worin sich<br />

die Zukunft ankündigt.<br />

Das Bild <strong>de</strong>s Volkskaisers, an <strong>de</strong>n sich anekdotische Züge heften, wur<strong>de</strong> weiter in<br />

Balla<strong>de</strong> (H. Heine, Die Grenadiere, 1827; Frhr. v. Zedlitz, Die nächtliche Heerschau; F.v. Gandy,<br />

Kaiserlie<strong>de</strong>r, 1835) in Erzählung (W. Hauff, Das Bild <strong>de</strong>s Kaisers, 1828) und im Roman (F. Stolle,<br />

Napoleon in Ägypten, 1813, Elba und Waterloo, 1838–1844) verbreitet.<br />

Die Gestalt <strong>de</strong>s französischen “empereur” war bald sieghafter General, bald grimmiger<br />

Unterdrücker o<strong>de</strong>r einsamer Träumer. Die Dramatiker haben aber einerseits wegen<br />

Rücksicht auf die Zensur, an<strong>de</strong>rerseits wegen <strong>de</strong>s mangeln<strong>de</strong>n Abstan<strong>de</strong>s, <strong>de</strong>n Kaiser nur in<br />

historischer Verkleidung o<strong>de</strong>r Verschlüsselung darzustellen gewagt (Z. Werner, Attila, 1808;<br />

A. Müllner, Yngurd, 1817; F. Grillparzer, König Ottokars Glück und En<strong>de</strong>, 1825).<br />

Die erste wesentliche Dramatisierung <strong>de</strong>s Napoleon Schicksals gelang in Grabbes<br />

Napoleon o<strong>de</strong>r die hun<strong>de</strong>rt Tage (1881).<br />

Hebbel verzichtete nach langem Durch<strong>de</strong>nken <strong>de</strong>s Stoffes auf eine Gestaltung; er<br />

glaubte nicht, <strong>de</strong>m Stoff einen “i<strong>de</strong>ellen Gehalt” einimpfen zu können.<br />

Nietzsche sah in Napoleon eine Verkörperung seines Übermenschen - I<strong>de</strong>als; K.<br />

Bleibtreu zeigt in <strong>de</strong>r Tragödie Der Übermensch (1896) Napoleons glücks - tragen<strong>de</strong>s<br />

Geheimnis: seine Verbindung mit <strong>Jos</strong>éphine; die Trennung von ihr wird <strong>de</strong>m Kaiser die<br />

Wen<strong>de</strong> seiner Laufbahn bringen.<br />

Der Übermensch Napoleon präsentiert sich bei R.Voss in <strong>de</strong>m Drama Wehe <strong>de</strong>m<br />

Besiegten (1888) als sentimentaler Schwärmer, als tragischer, in <strong>de</strong>n Gegensatz von<br />

politischem Genie und leiten<strong>de</strong>m Menschen aufgespaltener Dul<strong>de</strong>r bei E. Ludwig (1906) und<br />

als seelenvoller bei C. Hauptmann in <strong>de</strong>r Dramen Bürger Bonaparte; Kaiser Napoleon (1911).<br />

Das Bild <strong>de</strong>s legendären französischen Kaisers, die dominante Figur im Werk Heinrich<br />

Heines, enthält eine Vielfältigkeit von Eigenschaften: von einem wahren Wertmassstab für<br />

die Kontemporaneität zu einem “Despoten” und einem “Feind <strong>de</strong>r Freiheit”. Am Anfang<br />

war er “je<strong>de</strong>r Zoll ein Gott”, er war <strong>de</strong>r “teure Prometheus”, einer <strong>de</strong>r “Großen dieser Er<strong>de</strong>”,<br />

<strong>de</strong>r Gulliver in unsriger “Liliput”-Welt, “<strong>de</strong>r große Kaiser”, “<strong>de</strong>r Riese unseres<br />

Jahrhun<strong>de</strong>rts”, <strong>de</strong>r “Mann, worin diese Zeit so leuchtend sich abspiegelt, daß wir dadurch<br />

fast geblen<strong>de</strong>t wer<strong>de</strong>n” und <strong>de</strong>r Mann <strong>de</strong>ssen Namen “ein Losungswort unter <strong>de</strong>n Völkern”<br />

gewor<strong>de</strong>n ist. Er war <strong>de</strong>r “sterben<strong>de</strong> Löwe”, wobei ein Gegner zum “preußischen Esel” wird.<br />

Auf <strong>de</strong>r an<strong>de</strong>ren Seite aber, H. Essig sieht in Napoleon nur einen Stellvertreter <strong>de</strong>s<br />

Teufels in seinem Drama Napoleons Aufstieg (1912). 1926 fand B.Blum das Böse nicht in<br />

Napoleons Charakter, son<strong>de</strong>rn in seinen Wirkungen, und 13 Jahre später stellt ihn uns A.<br />

Zweig in Bonaparte in Jaffa als Verräter an <strong>de</strong>n I<strong>de</strong>en <strong>de</strong>r Französischen Revolution. So ist es<br />

leicht eine Enti<strong>de</strong>alisierung <strong>de</strong>r Gestalt im 20. Jahrhun<strong>de</strong>rt zu erkennen, und Napoleon wird<br />

- wie gezeigt - als ein Unterdrücker und Räuber <strong>de</strong>r menschlichen Freiheit und ein<br />

Verhöhner <strong>de</strong>r sittlichen Werte charakterisiert.<br />

Die privaten menschlichen Züge <strong>de</strong>s großen Mannes wer<strong>de</strong>n ebenfalls gezeigt,<br />

beson<strong>de</strong>rs in K. Biesenthals Stern <strong>de</strong>s Korsen (1890), H. Bohrs <strong>Jos</strong>efine (1898), R.H. Bartschs<br />

Wenn Majestäten lieben (1949) und K. Bartzs Benimm dich, Paulette (1952); die Gestalt wur<strong>de</strong><br />

aber auch ironisch umspielt bei W. Hasenclever (Napoleon greift ein, 1929), G. Kaiser (Napoleon<br />

in New Orleans, 1941) und H. Menzel (Noch einmal Napoleon ?, 1943).<br />

Das Napoleon - Epos bil<strong>de</strong>t eine reiche, unerschöpfbare Inspirationsquelle für eine<br />

große Zahl von <strong>de</strong>n Schriftstellern <strong>de</strong>utscher, wie auch französischer, italienischer,<br />

polnischer und russischer Zunge. Die Weltliteratur - man darf es sagen - ist viel reicher<br />

gewor<strong>de</strong>n nach dieser Napoleon - Ära und vielleicht wird Name Napoleon noch lange Zeit<br />

an von nun an in Schriften vieler Län<strong>de</strong>r erscheinen. Man kann heutzutage ruhig behaupten,<br />

dass die Zahl <strong>de</strong>r Werke, in <strong>de</strong>nen Napoleon als Vor<strong>de</strong>rgrunds-, Rand- o<strong>de</strong>r Neben- und<br />

Hintergrundsfigur auftritt, kaum erstellbar ist.<br />

Und wenn wir doch die positiven beziehungsweise die negativen Bezüge auf die<br />

41


Persönlichkeit Napoleons in <strong>de</strong>r ganzen <strong>de</strong>utschen Literatur auf Waageschalen setzen<br />

wür<strong>de</strong>n, dürfte man ruhig behaupten, dass man <strong>de</strong>n Ersteren von umfassen<strong>de</strong>n Größen - nur<br />

viel zu wenig entgegensetzen könnte, dass man die ersteren positiven Bezüge kaum<br />

aufwiegen kann.<br />

Referenzen:<br />

Frenzel, E. (1970). Stoffe <strong>de</strong>r Weltliteratur, Stuttgart:Alfred Kröner Verlag.<br />

Castelot, A. (1970). Napoleon Bonaparte, Bucureşti: Editura Politică.<br />

Pigeard, A. (2000). L' armée <strong>de</strong> Napoléon : 1800 - 1815 organisation et vie quotidienne, Paris: Tallandier.<br />

Broers, M. (1996). Europe un<strong>de</strong>r Napoleon, 1799 – 1815, London: Arnold.<br />

Tarle, (1964). Napoleon, Bucureşti: Editura pentru Literatură Universală.<br />

Goethe, J. W. (1962). “Kampagne in Frankreich 1792“, in Goethes Werke, Band 27, München: Deutscher<br />

Taschenbuch Verlag.<br />

Carlyle, T. (1921). Napoleon und Cromwell, Freilassing: Panonia Verlag.<br />

Descotes, M. (1967). L'obsession <strong>de</strong> Napoléon dans le 'Cromwell' <strong>de</strong> Victor Hugo, Paris: Minard.<br />

Fuerst, R. (1926). Heinrich Heines Leben, Werke und Briefe, Leipzig: Tempel-Verlag.<br />

Heine, H. 1972). Heinrich Heine - Werke und Briefe, 10 Bän<strong>de</strong>r, Verlag Berlin, Weimar.<br />

Heine, H. (Hrsg. Walzel, O.), (1972). Heinrich Heines Sämtliche Werke, in zehn Bän<strong>de</strong>n, Insel-Verlag,<br />

Leipzig.<br />

Abstract<br />

This work intends to display one of Napoleon’s pictures in the German literature. The reason<br />

un<strong>de</strong>rlying our choice is accounted for by Napoleon’s all-pervasive personality in what has come to<br />

be known as the Napoleonic and post-Napoleonic era. We could say that for writers as well as their<br />

literary en<strong>de</strong>avours, Napoleon was an obsession that they tried to dispose of yet, return over and<br />

over again. No matter how excessive it may sound, Napoleon’s controversial personality is certain<br />

to have had a great impact upon the social or<strong>de</strong>r in Europe, in his time as well as ever after,<br />

implying the political and the socio-cultural environment, the world literature being, in fact,<br />

highly in<strong>de</strong>bted to his life experience as a great emperor.<br />

Résumé<br />

Ce papier a l'intention <strong>de</strong> présenter l‘image <strong>de</strong> Napoleon dans la littérature alleman<strong>de</strong>. Nous<br />

traitons ici l‘image <strong>de</strong> Napoleon parce qu'il nous apparaît une figure dominante dans la littérature<br />

entière <strong>de</strong>s temps <strong>de</strong> Napoleon et après lui. On pourrait dire, cette figure est une obsession dont les<br />

auteurs sortent et auquel ils reviennent à maintes reprises. Pourtant, cela peut sembler comme un<br />

peu excessif. Quand même, grâce à nombreux refferences sur la personnalité <strong>de</strong> Napoleon et<br />

l'impact <strong>de</strong> Napoleon sur l'ordre social européen entier (avec la relation implicite sur la politique<br />

et l'environement socio-culturel), est certain que la littérature mondiale entière est hautement<br />

en<strong>de</strong>tté "à l'empereur" et à les événements <strong>de</strong> sa vie.<br />

Rezumat<br />

Lucrarea <strong>de</strong> faţă intenţionează să prezinte imaginea lui Napoleon în literatura germană. Tratăm<br />

aici imaginea lui Napoleon <strong>de</strong>oarece aceasta apare ca o figură dominantă în întreaga literatură<br />

napoleoniană şi post-napoleoniană. S-ar putea spune că această figură este o reală obsesie <strong>de</strong> la care<br />

autorii pornesc şi la care se reîntorc permanent. Desigur, acest lucru ar putea suna puţin exagerat.<br />

Cu toate acestea, datorită numeroaselor referinţe la personalitatea lui Napoleon precum şi<br />

impactului produs <strong>de</strong> acesta asupra întregii ordini sociale (cu referire implicită la mediul politic şi<br />

socio-cultural), rămâne cert faptul că întreaga literatură mondială îi este datoare „împăratului“<br />

precum şi vieţii acestuia.<br />

42


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 43-46<br />

IRONISATION DE LA FICTION ET THEMATISATION<br />

DES<br />

REFERENCES LITTERAIRES<br />

Doinita Milea<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

Lire un <strong>text</strong>e littéraire par rapport à un genre littéraire ou à un autre <strong>text</strong>e qu’on peut<br />

ou qu’on pourra reconnaître, a pour fonction essentielle <strong>de</strong> soutenir et d’orienter l’acte <strong>de</strong><br />

lecture par <strong>de</strong>s régularités structurales ou thématiques, qui laissent peu <strong>de</strong> liberté au lecteur<br />

,,modèle’’. Les étu<strong>de</strong>s critiques mettent en évi<strong>de</strong>nce les efforts <strong>de</strong>s écrivains pour mettre en<br />

évi<strong>de</strong>nce les effets <strong>de</strong> l’inter<strong>text</strong>ualité qui puissent offrir à un public dont l’horizon d’attente<br />

a été touché, la séduction du plaisir <strong>de</strong> reconnaître les figures <strong>de</strong>s héros, <strong>de</strong>s thèmes ou <strong>de</strong>s<br />

stratégies issus du dialogue avec les anciennes lectures. Umberto Eco dans La mystérieuse<br />

flamme <strong>de</strong> la reine Loana, 2005, semble vouloir expliquer son <strong>text</strong>e puisque le syntagme<br />

„roman illustré” désigne en général les productions romanesques <strong>de</strong>stinés aux enfants,<br />

ban<strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong>ssinées, histoires illustrées, mais Eco envoie le lecteur à l'univers romanesque, ainsi<br />

qu’il l’avait déjà fait en 1992 , en Diario minimo, quand il avait commenté ses stratégies<br />

d’écriture dans la préface , comme une clé <strong>de</strong> lecture pour le lecteur qui en aurait besoin.<br />

La <strong>de</strong>marche comparatiste permet la mise en relation, dans l’acte <strong>de</strong> lecture, et le<br />

dépassement du <strong>text</strong>e en faveur <strong>de</strong>s modèles qui fonctionnent comme <strong>de</strong>s archi<strong>text</strong>es pour<br />

les attentes et les compétences génériques. Les métho<strong>de</strong>s qui visent la superposition <strong>de</strong>s<br />

<strong>text</strong>es, l’exploitation <strong>de</strong>s principes <strong>de</strong>s <strong>text</strong>es secon<strong>de</strong>s, <strong>de</strong> la parodie et <strong>de</strong> la pastiches, <strong>de</strong>s<br />

invariants et <strong>de</strong>s stéréotypes, a permis un changement <strong>de</strong> la réception et <strong>de</strong> l’intérpretation<br />

<strong>de</strong> l’espace littéraire.<br />

Les romans métafictionnels <strong>de</strong> David Lodge, les dialogues inter<strong>text</strong>uels <strong>de</strong> John Fowles<br />

(The French Lieutenant's Woman ,Magus), les colages littéraires inter<strong>text</strong>uels <strong>de</strong> Salman<br />

Rushdie (Haroun and The Sea of Stories), les livres d’un téoricien tel Umberto Eco( Le Nom <strong>de</strong> la<br />

Rose),fonctionnent par la reconnaisance <strong>de</strong>s co<strong>de</strong>s littéraires, au XXe siècle,tout comme<br />

Orlando furioso au XVIe siècle ou Madame Bovary au XIXe siècle.<br />

Les formes évoluent dans le temps, les thèmes et le goût du public aussi, <strong>de</strong> nouvelles<br />

œuvres synthétisent ces transformations pour générer <strong>de</strong> nouvelles formes. Des parodistes<br />

comme Cervantes exploitent cette procédure qui transforme les <strong>text</strong>es du roman <strong>de</strong><br />

chevalerie par la réalité quotidienne, donnant naissance à Don Quichotte. Rabelais, dans son<br />

Gargantua et Pantagruel propose un dialogue explicite avec les <strong>text</strong>es et les clichés <strong>de</strong><br />

l’Antiquité, ainsi qu’avec les espaces <strong>de</strong> la réalité sociale et politique du temps, supposés,<br />

reconnaissables par ses lecteurs. Le contraste héroï-comique est fondé sur une structure<br />

imitative, manière qui produit Le Télémaque travesti, parodie du roman pédagogique <strong>de</strong><br />

Fénelon. Au Moyen Âge, aux stratégies parodiques qui opèrent dans le Roman <strong>de</strong> Renart,<br />

parodie du mon<strong>de</strong> chevaleresque et courtois, on ajoute l’allégorie, tout comme par<br />

l’allégorie, en Espagne, au XVIe siècle, Cervantes parodie les romans <strong>de</strong> chevalerie du<br />

Moyen Âge, et leurs clichés ; En France, au XVIIe siècle, la mo<strong>de</strong> du burlesque offre en usant<br />

ces stratégies une parodie, tel le Virgile travesti <strong>de</strong> Scarron. La parodie, dans ces cas, pourrait<br />

être le signe qu'une forme ou qu'une convention est en train <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>venir usée. Dans Tristram<br />

43


Shandy, Sterne transmet au lecteur la conscience <strong>de</strong>s clichés <strong>de</strong> la forme romanesque, par un<br />

renvoi explicite aux conventions <strong>de</strong> ce genre, donnant naissance à une autre forme narrative,<br />

qu'on appelle aujourd'hui ,,métafiction’’, ou la narration est présentée comme un artifice<br />

démonstratif. En fait, le métaroman, parfois, reprend et commente ses propres thèmes et<br />

motifs, thèmes et motifs communs à maints <strong>text</strong>es, comme est le cas d’Alain Robbe-Grillet(<br />

La Reprise),qui propose ses thèmes à variations: le thème <strong>de</strong> l’errance dans les rues (et dans le<br />

labyrinthe), le thème <strong>de</strong> la pièce, <strong>de</strong> maisons où le récit prend naissance, toiles, dont les<br />

personnages semblent traverser la vie réelle en réunissant le passé au présent et aboutissant à<br />

l’effacement complet <strong>de</strong>s traces <strong>de</strong> chronologie. À mesure que l’histoire avance, on a le<br />

sentiment <strong>de</strong> plusieurs déjà-vu, qui dépasse ses <strong>text</strong>es, en opérant les stratégies<br />

inter<strong>text</strong>uelles: la montée dans le train et le compartiment rappellent Michel Butor (l’incipit<br />

<strong>de</strong> la Modification); les <strong>de</strong>ux personnages masculins i<strong>de</strong>ntiques évoluent selon la formule <strong>de</strong><br />

Poe <strong>de</strong> William Wilson; l’atmosphère du compartiment <strong>de</strong> train évoque la sale du procès <strong>de</strong> K,<br />

l’obsession <strong>de</strong>s yeux <strong>de</strong> poupée et les frayeurs <strong>de</strong> l’enfance déplacées dans ce mon<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong><br />

l’adulte; les femmes – poupée redisent L’homme <strong>de</strong> sable, commenté par Freud. D’autres<br />

séquences renvoient explicitement à l’univers proustien, commenté par Freud, “ une tasse<br />

d’infusion <strong>de</strong> tilleul ‘’, ,, le baiser inespéré <strong>de</strong> la mère’’, le baiser dont le petit garçon a besoin<br />

comme <strong>de</strong> l’air pour retrouver son calme. L’adolescente – sœur, petite fille, fille qui nourrit<br />

les rêveries érotiques, renvoie explicitement par <strong>de</strong>s reprises obsessives sexuelles à Lolita <strong>de</strong><br />

Nabokov. Les cauchemars où le narrateur reconnaît les thèmes récurrents <strong>de</strong>s rêves qu’il fait<br />

dès l’enfance: <strong>de</strong>s toilettes introuvables pendant une recherché déroutante et inquiétante,<br />

l’escalier en colimaçon auquel il manque <strong>de</strong>s marches, peuplent ces jeux <strong>text</strong>uels, comme si<br />

au narrateur étendu sur le canapé du psychanalyste et parlant <strong>de</strong> ses obsessions, on<br />

corrigerait et annoterait les relations. Les couvertures extérieures offrent plusieurs miroirs<br />

dans lesquels le roman peut se voir (au-<strong>de</strong>là du résume sommaire présenté par l’auteur<br />

comme le schéma d’une histoire d’espionnage et <strong>de</strong> souvenir nostalgiques. Les chroniques<br />

<strong>de</strong> signal <strong>de</strong> l’édition roumaine y voient soit ,,une reprise” <strong>de</strong> certains thèmes – fantasmes<br />

<strong>de</strong>s <strong>text</strong>es <strong>de</strong> l’écrivain (le double, l’inceste, Œdipe, l’érotisme) soit un grand roman qui défie<br />

l’idée que le Nouveau Roman et le mouvement Tel Quel auraient tué la littérature française.<br />

Dans l’antiroman peut apparaître une transformation <strong>text</strong>uelle à fonction ludique, si l’on<br />

prend en compte, d’une part le choix littéraire (transformation, fonction ludique) <strong>de</strong> l’auteur<br />

dans la création d’un tel roman, d’autre part, la dimension métadiégétique où<br />

la transformation ludique repérée par le lecteur est une rupture <strong>de</strong> l’illusion fictionnelle<br />

voulue et exhibée par le parodiste. La dimension méta<strong>text</strong>uelle <strong>de</strong> la parodie a été mise en<br />

<strong>text</strong>e par les romanciers dans les pays anglo-saxons, afin <strong>de</strong> rendre compte <strong>de</strong>s pratiques<br />

parodiques mo<strong>de</strong>rnistes (Joyce) et post-mo<strong>de</strong>rnes (J. Fowles, J. Barth).<br />

Dans la pratique, on distingue la parodie du pastiche, bien que le mécanisme ait un<br />

coté commun, se referant au fait que tant le pastiche que la parodie produisent <strong>de</strong>s <strong>text</strong>es<br />

issus <strong>de</strong>s transformations d'un original. La différence consiste dans l’effet particulier du<br />

décalage comique du <strong>text</strong>e dérivé par rapport au <strong>text</strong>e base. L'imitation parodique était<br />

souvent considérée vulgaire, au Moyen Age ou à la Renaissance, parce qu'elle ne montrait<br />

pas <strong>de</strong> respect envers ses modèles, n'hésitant pas à utiliser <strong>de</strong>s procédés comiques assez<br />

grossiers (tel étant le cas <strong>de</strong> Rabelais). Les pastiches, en revanche, imposent une compétence<br />

culturelle, d’autant plus que l'imitation <strong>de</strong>s classiques, à travers les époques, à eu souvent<br />

une fin pédagogique, travaillant sur l'amplification <strong>de</strong> <strong>text</strong>e, la transposition d'un style dans<br />

un autre, ou la réécriture d'un <strong>text</strong>e versifié en prose. Dans ces cas, les exercices qui tombent<br />

sur les pastiches sélectionnent les <strong>text</strong>es et les auteurs célèbres, dont l'écriture es particulière,<br />

comme est le cas <strong>de</strong>s démonstration <strong>de</strong> Prévert dans son poème Cortèges, ou <strong>de</strong> la<br />

présentation <strong>de</strong> la vie idyllique <strong>de</strong> bergers chez Cervantes, autant <strong>de</strong> traits pertinents,<br />

reconnaissables. En parlant du dialogisme et du plurilinguisme propres au roman, Bakhtine<br />

(Du discours romanesque p. 83), définit la parodie comme un type particulier <strong>de</strong> stylisation<br />

44


qui fait partie intégrante <strong>de</strong> l’écriture romanesque, la stylisation parodique. Selon Bakhtine,<br />

les discours <strong>de</strong>s personnages caricaturaux, satirique et comique, ainsi que <strong>de</strong>s jargons<br />

professionnels, comme discours littéraires, entrent dans le champ <strong>de</strong> la parodie, d’où sa<br />

conception sur le carnavalesque dans le discours du roman, <strong>de</strong> Rabelais à Dostoïevski.<br />

Dans Palimpsestes, G. Genette propose une classification <strong>de</strong>s pratiques qui mettent en<br />

relation <strong>de</strong>s <strong>text</strong>es, qu’il appelle ,,hyper<strong>text</strong>uelles’’, dont la parodie n’est qu’un cas<br />

particulier. Les critères analysés par Genette sont <strong>de</strong> types structuraux, mais il prend en<br />

compte aussi l’intention ou l’effet, qui peut être ludique, satirique ou sérieuse, et la différence<br />

entre une transformation et une imitation. La parodie est, dans ces termes, une<br />

transformation <strong>text</strong>uelle à fonction ludique (Genette 1982 : 40, Détournement <strong>de</strong> <strong>text</strong>e à<br />

transformation minimale, Transformation ludique d’un <strong>text</strong>e singulier, Genette 1982 : 202).<br />

Genette décrit et étudie ces transformations à partir du Télémaque travesti <strong>de</strong> Marivaux, 1714.<br />

(Une analyse similaire appartient à Daniel Sangsue, dans son essai sur la parodie, 1982).<br />

Linda Hutcheon parle <strong>de</strong> la parodie (Theory of Parody, 1986), en analysant les stratégies<br />

postmo<strong>de</strong>rnes. Dans la parodie, le terme relation est important, parce qu’il rappelle que la<br />

parodie repose sur la relation d'une oeuvre base à une oeuvre secon<strong>de</strong>, dérivée, et qu'elle<br />

n'existe que lorsque cette relation est reconnue par le lecteur (ou le spectateur), car le genre<br />

se trouve également au théâtre. Au-<strong>de</strong>là <strong>de</strong> tout indice <strong>text</strong>uel ou <strong>de</strong> toute source générique,<br />

souvent difficiles à i<strong>de</strong>ntifier, la parodie, notamment celle théâtrale, se définit par un espace<br />

où se jouent les polémiques <strong>de</strong> l’actualité. Les pièces <strong>de</strong> Molière sont remplies <strong>de</strong> parodies<br />

ponctuelles où l’auteur se moque du jargon <strong>de</strong>s mé<strong>de</strong>cins, <strong>de</strong>s femmes savantes, <strong>de</strong>s<br />

précieuses. Chapelle, Racine et Boileau parodient le Cid <strong>de</strong> Corneille (le Chapelain décoiffé,<br />

1665) et Adrien-Thomas Perdou <strong>de</strong> Subligny, acteur, écrivain et dramaturge du XVIIe siècle,<br />

parodie Andromaque <strong>de</strong> Racine (la Folle Querelle, 1668). Au XVIIIe siècle, Voltaire utilise le<br />

genre dans ses pamphlets. Pangloss, dans son Candi<strong>de</strong> (1759), est une parodie <strong>de</strong> philosophe<br />

optimiste. Les parodies <strong>de</strong> drames <strong>de</strong> Victor Hugo apparaissent au siècle suivant: par<br />

exemple, celle d’Hernani réalisée par le vau<strong>de</strong>villiste Augustin Théodore <strong>de</strong> Lauzanne<br />

(Harnali ou la Contrainte par cor) est bien connue.<br />

Les œuvres <strong>de</strong> Laurence Sterne, suivent les techniques romanesques pour dialoguer<br />

par la parodie et la pastiche, les <strong>text</strong>es <strong>de</strong> voyages cachent la satire chez Jonathan Swift, et<br />

James Joyce,propose par Ulysse (1922) une parodie allégorique <strong>de</strong> l’épopée grecque, trouvant<br />

un écho au XXe siècle chez Samuel Beckett et Harold Pinter (par absur<strong>de</strong> et par la dérision).<br />

La transformation parodique répond, chaque fois, à <strong>de</strong> nouveaux horizons d’attente,<br />

par rapport à <strong>de</strong>s conventions d’écriture qui commencent à vieillir, et par cela, elle<br />

s’apparente aux fêtes carnavalesques qui reprennent une figure déjà usée. La parodie,<br />

postmo<strong>de</strong>rne, dont parle Linda Hutcheon, est à la fois un hommage respectueux et ironique<br />

à la tradition. C'est ce qu'ont fait Fowles, Barth, Borges, Nabokov, pour lesquels la parodie<br />

est un acte d'incorporation.<br />

John Fowles, dans The French Lieutenant's Woman, romancier narrateur, juxtapose les<br />

conventions du roman victorien et du roman mo<strong>de</strong>rne, pour détruire la classique illusion<br />

mimétique d'authenticité, le jeu <strong>de</strong>s conventions,la réorganisation <strong>de</strong> ces conventions<br />

littéraires étant doublée par une reconstruction, qui laisse au lecteur la liberté <strong>de</strong> choisir une<br />

variante <strong>de</strong> l’organisation du sujet, à travers les conventions qu’il aime. La pratique littéraire<br />

<strong>de</strong> la réécriture postmo<strong>de</strong>rne, ou la littérature du second <strong>de</strong>gré, selon la formule déjà<br />

classique <strong>de</strong> Genette, supposent un <strong>text</strong>e <strong>de</strong> base qui s’ouvre dans un nouveau <strong>text</strong>e par les<br />

jeux allusives qui s’appuient sur les procédés <strong>de</strong> l’inter<strong>text</strong>ualité, du palimpseste<br />

(superposition <strong>de</strong> <strong>text</strong>es), et, évi<strong>de</strong>ment, la métafiction, comme stratégie qui mette en<br />

évi<strong>de</strong>nce les modèles, délestés <strong>de</strong> leur sens premier, et leur transplantation. Comme tout<br />

<strong>text</strong>e littéraire, une transformation réclame également un lecteur, mais un collaborateur<br />

particulier. En d'autres termes, outre la reconnaissance <strong>de</strong>s co<strong>de</strong>s littéraires usuels d’un<br />

genre, le lecteur doit aussi reconnaître que ce qu'il est en train <strong>de</strong> lire est un <strong>text</strong>e dérivé, qu’il<br />

45


soit parodie ou autre type, et qu’il doit également accepter le pacte <strong>de</strong> lecture, pour s’en<br />

réjouir.<br />

Bibliographie<br />

Aron, P. (2005). Histoire du pastiche, Paris : Presses universitaires <strong>de</strong> France.<br />

Bakhtine, M. (1978). Du discours romanesque, dans Esthétique et théorie du roman, Paris : Gallimard.<br />

Compagnon, A. (1979). La secon<strong>de</strong> main, ou le travail <strong>de</strong> la citation, Paris: Seuil.<br />

Genette, G. (1982). Palimpsestes. La littérature au second <strong>de</strong>gré, Paris: Seuil.<br />

Hutcheon, L. (1986). A Theory of Parody, London: Methuen.<br />

Sangsue, D. (1994). La Parodie, Paris: Hachette Supérieur.<br />

Tomachevski, B. (1965). Thématique, dans Théorie <strong>de</strong> la littérature, <strong>text</strong>es <strong>de</strong>s formalistes russes réunis,<br />

présentés et traduits par T. Todorov, Paris: Seuil.<br />

Abstract<br />

As literature has evolved along the centuries, literary conventions have played their crucial role in<br />

the <strong>de</strong>velopment of new literary mo<strong>de</strong>ls accepted through the perspective of innovation. The<br />

intensification of the parodic exploitation of literary forms, the parody itself is a strategy which<br />

eventually culminates in Postmo<strong>de</strong>rnism, where the author may choose to emphasize the<br />

“literarity” of the illusion created by the <strong>text</strong>, making use of a certain type of value minimization.<br />

Against the <strong>text</strong> background there will always be examples of irony, the main rhetorical<br />

mechanism which draws the rea<strong>de</strong>r’s attention to the possibility of actualization, which in its<br />

essence, is a kind of process, neither parody nor irony being able to function as such, but creating<br />

actions and strategies inten<strong>de</strong>d for the rea<strong>de</strong>r to interpret and assess the <strong>text</strong>s according to the<br />

author’s intention.<br />

Résumé<br />

Les conventions littéraires au cours <strong>de</strong> l'évolution littéraire ont leur rôle crucial dans le<br />

développement <strong>de</strong> nouveaux mo<strong>de</strong>s littéraires, par leur rapport avec le désir d’innovation.<br />

L'intensification <strong>de</strong> l’exploitation parodique <strong>de</strong>s formes littéraires, stratégie déjà usée elle-même,<br />

culmine avec le Postmo<strong>de</strong>rnisme où l'auteur peut choisir <strong>de</strong> mettre en relief la ,,littérarité’’ <strong>de</strong><br />

l'illusion provoquée par son <strong>text</strong>e, en usant d'un certain type <strong>de</strong> dévalorisation. À l'arrière-plan <strong>de</strong><br />

son <strong>text</strong>e sera, toujours, l'ironie –principal mécanisme rhétorique qui attire l'attention du lecteur<br />

sur cette actualisation, qui est en elle-même, aussi, une sorte <strong>de</strong> procédé d'actualisation; ni la<br />

parodie ni l'ironie ne peuvent pas fonctionner comme telle, mais en donnant naissance à <strong>de</strong>s<br />

actions, à <strong>de</strong>s stratégies <strong>de</strong>stinées à permettre au lecteur d'interpréter et d’évaluer, en relation,<br />

<strong>de</strong>s <strong>text</strong>es, peut- être selon l’intention <strong>de</strong> l’auteur.<br />

Rezumat<br />

Convenţiile literare <strong>de</strong>-a lungul evoluţiei literare îşi au rolul crucial în <strong>de</strong>zvoltarea noilor mo<strong>de</strong>le<br />

literare, acceptate prin prisma dorinţei <strong>de</strong> inovare. Intensificarea exploatării parodice a formelor<br />

literare, ea însăşi o strategie <strong>de</strong>ja culminează cu Postmo<strong>de</strong>rnismul, un<strong>de</strong> autorul poate alege<br />

punerea în relief a “literarităţii” iluziei provocate <strong>de</strong> <strong>text</strong>, utilizând un anume tip <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>valorizare.<br />

In planul secund al <strong>text</strong>ului se va afla tot<strong>de</strong>auna ironia, principalul mecanism retoric, care atrage<br />

atenţia cititorului asupra acestei actualizări, care este, în esenţă, un fel <strong>de</strong> proce<strong>de</strong>u <strong>de</strong> actualizare;<br />

nici parodia nici ironia nu pot funcţiona ca atare, ci dând naştere acţiunilor, strategiilor <strong>de</strong>stinate<br />

să permită lectorului să interpreteze şi să evalueze <strong>text</strong>ele conform intenţiei autorului.<br />

46


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 47-52<br />

47<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

SOME THEORETICAL CONSIDERATIONS ON IMAGOLOGY<br />

Ioana Mohor-Ivan and Michaela Praisler<br />

Since the nineteenth century, originating from the German concept of a “psychology of<br />

the peoples”, there has been a long-standing interest in “national characters”. For the most<br />

part, this interest has been essentialist, stemming from the belief that “nations” were discrete<br />

and distinguishable groups, each characterised by its own character that could be analysed<br />

from that “nation’s” cultural activity. In the course of the twentieth century, the essentialist<br />

implications of “national characteristics” have attracted criticism, and, especially in the field<br />

of Comparative Literature, they have come to be studied as subjective terms, un<strong>de</strong>rstood as<br />

attitu<strong>de</strong>s and perceptions that affect cultural and social praxis. In the 1950s, imagology<br />

crystallised as a specialization in Comparative Literature in France, and has since gained<br />

currency among scholars and journalists interested in studying the discursively constructed<br />

nature of many social and cultural values, as a means of counter-acting re-emergent<br />

nationalisms.<br />

Imagology (imago=image + logos=word, account, study) may be <strong>de</strong>fined as the study<br />

of intercultural relations in terms of mutual perceptions, images and self-images, i.e. the<br />

ways in which perceived national / ethnic / racial / cultural characters and i<strong>de</strong>ntities – both<br />

one’s own and that of others–are expressed in a wi<strong>de</strong> range of discourses, including<br />

literature, film and the media. Because stress is laid on perception and not on the “truth” or<br />

accuracy of an image, the aim of imagology is to un<strong>de</strong>rstand the structures of images and<br />

<strong>de</strong>monstrate their conventional nature, by focusing on the intersection between linguistic<br />

(aesthetic / rhetorical) and historical (i<strong>de</strong>ological / socio-cultural) aspects of discourse<br />

(Moyle, 2004: 9).<br />

In recognizing the i<strong>de</strong>ological character of images and drawing attention to their sociocultural<br />

differences and similarities, imagology consi<strong>de</strong>rs this mo<strong>de</strong> of reciprocal<br />

characterization as pivotal in un<strong>de</strong>rstanding national perception and representation in terms<br />

of the self-other dichotomy, which also un<strong>de</strong>rlies the dialectic of i<strong>de</strong>ntity and alterity<br />

(Voestermans 1991: 219). As the i<strong>de</strong>ntity of a human <strong>de</strong>velops along the line of<br />

differentiation between (what is consi<strong>de</strong>red to be) the ‘self’ and everything which is not the<br />

self, the two are thus mutually <strong>de</strong>pendable, investing each other with meaning. The same<br />

dialectic characterises the articulation of cultural and national i<strong>de</strong>ntities, because<br />

“all human cultures articulate, situate themselves by categorizing the world […], a<br />

predicative act [which] involves a distinction between that which is allowed into the<br />

sphere of culture and that which is exclu<strong>de</strong>d” (Corbey and Leerssen 1991: vi).<br />

“Otherness” is thus created as both the contrastive as well as the cognitive background<br />

against which a cultural or national i<strong>de</strong>ntity is circumscribed.<br />

As its name asserts, image is the main working concept in the field. On the one hand,<br />

image is un<strong>de</strong>rstood as communication, especially visual communication or presentation; on<br />

the other hand, image is un<strong>de</strong>rstood as a “mental picture” or i<strong>de</strong>a. Imagology has adopted


the latter meaning, whereby image is “the mental or discursive representation or reputation<br />

of a person, group, ethnicity or ‘nation’” (Leerssen 2003: 342.) In this, it resembles a cognitive<br />

“knowledge structure” or schema that controls our opinion and behaviour towards the<br />

“other”. A fundamental distinction is ma<strong>de</strong> between auto-image (or ‘self-image’) and heteroimage:<br />

the first one refers to a characterological reputation current within and shared by a<br />

group, the latter to the opinion that others have about a group’s purported character. Apart<br />

from these, imagemes, a term coined by Joep Leerssen, would refer to ambivalent images<br />

that can be applied to different kinds of situations (Leerssen, 2000). If images change, they do<br />

so not because the character of the nation changes, but because the attitu<strong>de</strong> towards the<br />

nation changes, as cultural discontinuities and differences (in the form of languages,<br />

mentalities, everyday habits, and religions) trigger positive or negative judgements and<br />

attitu<strong>de</strong>s.<br />

When an image remains constant <strong>de</strong>spite historical changes, it turns into a stereotype<br />

or cliché (Schnei<strong>de</strong>r, 2005). According to a dictionary <strong>de</strong>finition, a stereotype is “a<br />

standardized mental picture that is held in common by members of a group and that<br />

represents an oversimplified opinion, prejudiced attitu<strong>de</strong>, or uncritical judgement” (Webster<br />

1996: 1394) about a person or an entire group of people. In the absence of ‘the total picture’ of<br />

an environment which is “too big, too fleeting for direct acquaintance” (Lippman 1922: 16),<br />

we build up ‘intellectual images’ that create simplified representations, categories or values<br />

which help us orient through and make sense of the world. In addition to this, stereotypes<br />

also play an important role in i<strong>de</strong>ntity building, because if an individual’s sense of self is<br />

closely related to the group to which he or she belongs – which may extend from school<br />

affiliation to race and nationality -, i<strong>de</strong>ntifying with this ‘in-group’ means internalizing its<br />

own stereotypes. As such, the same as in the case of “image”, stereotypes may be classified<br />

into auto-stereotypes (evolved at ‘in-group’ level) and hetero-stereotypes (relating to ‘outgroups’,<br />

i.e. the other groups to which the individual does not belong or i<strong>de</strong>ntify with.) The<br />

dialectic of the two is often based on contrastive stereotyping, because the ten<strong>de</strong>ncy is to<br />

assign negative characteristics to the out-group in or<strong>de</strong>r to create positive auto-stereotypes.<br />

National stereotypes, which involve the assignation of specific characteristics to members of<br />

a given nation, exhibit the same binary nature, often occurring in the oppositional pairs of<br />

auto- versus hetero-stereotypes, or positive versus negative ones. Because national<br />

stereotypes transcend the individual, they may be modified by changes in the group<br />

experience or the con<strong>text</strong> of intergroup relations ranging from conflict to alliances. When<br />

economic and political rivalry characterizes the relations between two countries, there is a<br />

marked negativity in hetero-stereotyping, which gives rise to xenophobia. The reverse,<br />

when positive terms are employed to characterize a national group, leads to exoticism or<br />

xenophilia.<br />

Though closely related to the concept of stereotype, the term cliché does not always<br />

connote the moral and metaphysical implications of the latter, referring rather to stylistic<br />

turns of phrase, images or gestures that have nothing to do with the expression of racism or<br />

ethnocentrism, nor do they give rise to prejudice.<br />

Originally a judicial term, prejudice has become another key concept in imagology,<br />

referring to “any preconceived and unsupported opinion and attitu<strong>de</strong> that influences our<br />

perception, <strong>de</strong>scription and judgement of others” (Beller 2003: 404). Though in recent<br />

literature, prejudice and stereotype tend to be used interchangeably, “stereotypes are beliefs<br />

or opinions about attributes of a social group or members, whereas prejudice is<br />

conceptualized as a negative intergroup attitu<strong>de</strong>” (Moyle 2004: 22; Stroebe and Insko 1989:<br />

8). As such, prejudice plays an important part in hetero-stereotyping, being a key to<br />

<strong>de</strong>ciphering intergroup attitu<strong>de</strong>s and relations.<br />

In point of the methodology that a critical study of cultural representations and of<br />

images of national i<strong>de</strong>ntity presupposes, critics agree that the imagological approach blends<br />

48


different aims in an integrative type of analysis, sharing thus its concerns with anthropology,<br />

cultural studies and literary criticism.<br />

� In common with Cultural Anthropology, imagology starts from the premise that<br />

groups and cultures differ. One mo<strong>de</strong>l for assessing differences among national<br />

cultures consi<strong>de</strong>rs that four aspects (namely, power distance; collectivism/<br />

individualism; femininity / masculinity; uncertainty avoidance) variously combine to<br />

differently mark mentalities within a given group (Hofste<strong>de</strong>, 1991, Gavriliu, 2002). The<br />

specific question that an imagologist asks relates then to how these differences are<br />

treated in mutual imagery.<br />

� In common with the field of Cultural Studies, imagology views culture as dynamic, a<br />

process through which a particular group of people constructs or <strong>de</strong>constructs a series<br />

of maps of meanings to make sense of everyday practices and experience (Mohor-Ivan,<br />

2004: 4). Given that an image is one means of “mapping” experience, an imagologist<br />

would be interested in surveying the representational terrain of a given culture,<br />

investigating the form and function of the image within its discursive con<strong>text</strong> and<br />

signalling changes in the perception of both in- and out-groups as markers of<br />

historical/political/social relativity in inter-cultural relations.<br />

� Given its literary ancestry, imagology works primarily on “imagined discourse”, i.e.<br />

discourse that lies outsi<strong>de</strong> the area of verifiable report statements (Leerssen 2003: 28).<br />

While the literary <strong>text</strong> is a primary resource to investigate the formation, perpetuation<br />

and dissemination of images, other more recent “poetically-ruled and fictionalnarrative<br />

media” – such as film or some genres of journalism – which “often work[s]<br />

on the presupposition of a suspension of disbelief and some (at least aesthetic)<br />

appreciative credit among the audience” (Leerssen 2003: 26) can be searched into for<br />

patterns of national characterization.<br />

In analysing such “imagined discourse”, Leerssen (2003: 26-30) consi<strong>de</strong>rs that other<br />

methodological assumptions are likely to be at work. According to his survey of the history<br />

and method of the field:<br />

� Imagology adheres to a theory of cultural or national stereotypes, concerning itself<br />

with representations as <strong>text</strong>ual strategies and as discourse, with referentiality<br />

contained within a <strong>text</strong>ual and inter<strong>text</strong>ual frame and not vis-à-vis empirical reality.<br />

� Imagology acknowledges the subjectivity of its sources and takes it into account in the<br />

analysis of the dynamics between auto- and hetero-images, by placing it in the<br />

perspectival con<strong>text</strong> of the representing <strong>text</strong> or discourse. Moreover, such images,<br />

usually categorized in national terms, do not reflect empirical real-world collectives,<br />

but possible i<strong>de</strong>ntifications for such groups.<br />

� Imagology consi<strong>de</strong>rs that images work effectively in the cultural and communicative<br />

field because they are tropes, commonplaces turned familiar by repetition and<br />

resemblance. As such, one must uncover the tradition of a given trope by establishing<br />

its inter<strong>text</strong>. The trope becomes thus doubly con<strong>text</strong>ualized: within a background<br />

tradition, which is echoed, reinforced or negated in the <strong>text</strong> of its occurrence, and<br />

within the latter itself, by analysing the given <strong>text</strong>-based function of the image.<br />

� Imagology is also interested in con<strong>text</strong>ualizing the image in its socio-cultural con<strong>text</strong>,<br />

by resorting to a pragmatic-functionalist perspective through which it aims to<br />

investigate the way in which the rhetoric and <strong>de</strong>ployment of stereotypes is geared<br />

towards a target audience, or the critical reception and the impact that a certain image<br />

has.<br />

� Imagology goes beyond the self-other dichotomy that plays an important role in<br />

i<strong>de</strong>ntity formation when it focuses on the role played by auto-images, which thematise<br />

the filiations between past and present through historical remembrance and cultural<br />

49


memory, in the maintenance of a sense of national i<strong>de</strong>ntity.<br />

� Nevertheless, imagology remains a comparative enterprise, addressing cross-national<br />

relations by drawing attention to the fact that any image is constructed in accordance<br />

to a differential principle which restricts i<strong>de</strong>ntity to particularism. When studied as a<br />

multicultural phenomenon, dichotomic coordinates like those established between the<br />

pragmatic North vs. the sensuous South, the backward periphery vs. the mo<strong>de</strong>rn<br />

centre, or the masculine West vs. the feminine East become nationally unspecific,<br />

helping us realize that i<strong>de</strong>ntity should <strong>de</strong>fine one as part of, and not in<br />

contradistinction to, humanity as a whole.<br />

As such, the following are meant as practical gui<strong>de</strong>lines for the integrative type of analysis<br />

that the critical study of our mental images of national character (expressed in terms of the<br />

Other / Self dichotomy) presupposes.<br />

� I<strong>de</strong>ntify the type of <strong>text</strong> chosen for analysis. The distinction between fictional (e.g.<br />

literary works and feature films) and factual (e.g. newspaper articles and<br />

documentaries) <strong>text</strong>s is important in establishing “the <strong>de</strong>gree of referential reliability of<br />

the reality communicated by the <strong>text</strong>” (Gavriliu, 2002: 101).<br />

� I<strong>de</strong>ntify the author of the <strong>text</strong> and the audience s/he is addressing. Are they members<br />

of the same in-group, or are they differentiated along gen<strong>de</strong>r, class, i<strong>de</strong>ological, ethnic,<br />

etc. criteria? This helps clarify the position that the author and her/his <strong>text</strong> take in<br />

relation to the target audience: e.g. solidarity/disaffiliation/discord.<br />

� I<strong>de</strong>ntify the type of images constructed by the <strong>text</strong> in terms of the distinction<br />

between auto- and hetero-images. This distinction is useful in assessing both the <strong>text</strong>based<br />

function of an image (how the author handles the self-other dialectic in her / his<br />

<strong>text</strong>) and its extra-<strong>text</strong>ual one (what the author wants to achieve by employing a given<br />

image) (Moyle, 2004: 11). It may be further employed to distinguish between the force<br />

lines un<strong>de</strong>rlying the respective cultural groups, which “account for the how and the why<br />

of a certain representation” (Gavriliu, 2002: 6) of the self vs. the Other in Hofste<strong>de</strong>’s<br />

mo<strong>de</strong>l (1991).<br />

� Focus on the <strong>text</strong>’s hetero-images. How is alterity constructed by the <strong>text</strong>?<br />

o Isolate the linguistic/visual elements which help circumscribe the Other (e.g.<br />

consi<strong>de</strong>r the distribution of lexical/auditory/visual signs in terms of the rate of<br />

occurrence of certain units, clusters.)<br />

o Assess the terms in which Otherness is articulated (national, ethnic, gen<strong>de</strong>r, etc.)<br />

o I<strong>de</strong>ntify the un<strong>de</strong>rlying attitu<strong>de</strong>s (e.g. xenophilia, tolerance, cosmopolitanism vs.<br />

xenophobia, ethnocentrism) which lead to positive or negative attribution of<br />

characteristics to the Other. Such valorisation is also indicative of attitu<strong>de</strong>s such<br />

as: assimilation, i.e. the appropriation of the Other by turning it into the familiar,<br />

or rejection, i.e. the exclusion of the Other “into utopia, dystopia or irreducible<br />

marginalisation” (Gavriliu 2002: 7).<br />

o Consi<strong>de</strong>r the extent to which hetero-images are recognisable as stereotypes.<br />

Because stereotypes are inter<strong>text</strong>ual constructs, i.e. the referential signification<br />

process takes place not between <strong>text</strong> and reality, but between <strong>text</strong> and <strong>text</strong><br />

(Leerssen 1998), establish their <strong>text</strong>ual tradition. Refer to the function that<br />

stereotypes play in the <strong>text</strong> at hand: e.g. a starting point for characterisation;<br />

ironic markers; i<strong>de</strong>ntifiers for alterity; invested with symbolic value; used to ‘go<br />

against the grain’ (Moyle 2004:11). This helps establish the role played by<br />

stereotypes either in sustaining tradition (e.g. reinforcing myths of otherness or<br />

prejudices) or, by contrary, in un<strong>de</strong>rmining it.<br />

o I<strong>de</strong>ntify the dichotomic coordinates which un<strong>de</strong>rlie the representation of the<br />

Other. Phenotypical features, gestures, speech (e.g. foreign vocabulary or<br />

onomastic preferences marked by caricatural intentions) may be employed to<br />

50


cast characters as statements of alterity, triggering oppositions as those<br />

established between self / other; civilian / barbarian; human / beastly; good /<br />

evil; superior / inferior (Gavriliu, 2002: 101, Mohor-Ivan, 2004: 19). Indicators of<br />

place and time may similarly point to contrasts like: North / South, West/ East,<br />

urban / pastoral, centre / margin, which further connote oppositions such as<br />

progress / primitivism; pragmatic / spiritual; individualist / collectivist; prosaic<br />

/ idyllic, <strong>de</strong>velopment / backwardness, or<strong>de</strong>r / chaos (Leerssen 1988, Mohor-<br />

Ivan, 2004: 86.) Such structural i<strong>de</strong>ntifications may reveal the extent to which<br />

alterity is exclu<strong>de</strong>d, ascribed a negative role as a manifestation of disor<strong>de</strong>r and<br />

cultural inadaptability in the out-group or the emitting culture, or, by contrary,<br />

conceived in more congenial terms, appropriated and inclu<strong>de</strong>d into the patterns<br />

of the in-group or the receiving culture. Moreover, they may help discern<br />

whether alterity is represented as continuous and homogeneous, similar to other<br />

instances of Otherness, discontinuous and contradictory, able thus to become<br />

fluid and incorporate the Self.<br />

� Corroborate the investigation of the form and function of images within the <strong>text</strong><br />

with a macro-con<strong>text</strong>ual analysis. Placing an image in its cultural and historical<br />

con<strong>text</strong> is indicative of political, economic, or diplomatic circumstances that condition<br />

the apparition of the <strong>text</strong> (Gavriliu, 2002: 102). As images shift with changing<br />

con<strong>text</strong>ual circumstances, the i<strong>de</strong>ntification of the cultural line forces that govern a<br />

certain period may explain why a particular representation is favoured over a range of<br />

possible alternatives. It also ensures a clarification of the referential frame, as well as of<br />

the cultural values and presuppositions that both author and audience involve in the<br />

communication process in or<strong>de</strong>r to enco<strong>de</strong>/<strong>de</strong>co<strong>de</strong> a given image. Finally, disclosing<br />

the properties of the con<strong>text</strong> that makes an image available as a pattern of i<strong>de</strong>ntification<br />

for a group of people may prompt a better un<strong>de</strong>rstanding of the difference between<br />

“an ‘image’ and objective information” (Leerssen 1988), by explaining its role as a<br />

subjective construct which influences and is influenced by the cultural, historical and<br />

social praxis.<br />

Though a specialism rooted in the field of Comparative Literary Study, this technical<br />

neologism referred to as imagology in many languages has come to transcend the field of<br />

literary analysis and to provi<strong>de</strong> “a viable and fruitful approach to neighbouring specialisms<br />

(from cultural studies to postcolonial studies, and from social psychology and anthropology<br />

to art history)” (Beller 2003, xv). Because it shares the interests in i<strong>de</strong>ntity constructs and<br />

cultural stereotypes with so many disciplines within the wi<strong>de</strong>r and interdisciplinary area of<br />

human and social studies, the task of pinpointing the outlines of the field would remain an<br />

open-en<strong>de</strong>d one, as the on-going dialogue between imagology and its neighbours can only<br />

enrich both theoretical premises and practical research in the study of different forms of<br />

cultural representation.<br />

References<br />

Beller, M., Leerssen, J. (eds). (2003). IMAGOLOGY: a Handbook on the Literary Representation of National<br />

Characters, Amsterdam: Rodopi.<br />

Corbey, R., Leerssen, J. (1991). “Studying Alterity: Backgrounds and Perspectives” in Alterity, I<strong>de</strong>ntity,<br />

Image: Selves and others in society and scholarship. Amsterdam: Rodopi, vi-xviii .<br />

Gavriliu, E. (2002). Theory and Practice of Imagology. Experiencing the Other in Anglo-Romanian Cultural<br />

Encounters, Galaţi: Editura Fundaţiei Universitare “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>”.<br />

Hofste<strong>de</strong>, G. (1991). Cultures and Organisations. Intercultural Cooperation and Its Importance for Survival.<br />

Software of the Mind. London: Harper Collins Publishers.<br />

Leerssen, J. (2003). “Imagology: History and Method” in Beller, M., Leerssen, J. (eds). IMAGOLOGY: a<br />

Handbook on the Literary Representation of National Characters, Amsterdam: Rodopi, 17-32.<br />

51


Leerssen, Joep (2000) “The Rhetoric of National Character: A Programmatic Survey.” in Poetics Today,<br />

Porter Institute for Poetics and Semiotics.<br />

Leerssen, J. (1998). National I<strong>de</strong>ntity and National Stereotype, retrieved from http://cf.hum.uva.nl/<br />

images/info/leers.html<br />

Mohor-Ivan, I. (2004). Representations of Irishness: Culture, Theatre and Brian Friel’s Revisionist Stage,<br />

Bucuresti: EDP.<br />

Moyle, L. M. (2004). An Imagological Survey of Britain and the British and Germany and the Germans in<br />

German and British Cartoons and Caricatures: 1945-2000. Retrieved from http:// elib.ub.uniosnabrueck.<strong>de</strong>/publications/diss/E-Diss389_thesis.pdf<br />

Schnei<strong>de</strong>r, D. J. (2005). The Psychology of Stereotyping, New York: The Guildford Press.<br />

Stroebe, W., Insko, C. (1989). “Stereotype, Prejudice and Discrimination: Changing Conceptions in<br />

Theory and Research” in Stereotype and Prejudice. Changing Conceptions, New York: Spinger (3-34)<br />

Voestermans, P. (1991). “Alterity/I<strong>de</strong>ntity: A Deficient Image of Culture” in Alterity, I<strong>de</strong>ntity, Image:<br />

Selves and Others in Society and Scholarship. Amsterdam: Rodopi, 219-50.<br />

Abstract<br />

The paper attempts to facilitate research in different forms of cultural representations by supplying<br />

a basic outline of imagology, a technical neologism which, though rooted in Comparative Literary<br />

Studies, has increasingly come to be positioned in the wi<strong>de</strong>r and interdisciplinary area of cultural<br />

and social studies. As such, after some preliminary consi<strong>de</strong>rations on the history, <strong>de</strong>finition and<br />

basic assumptions un<strong>de</strong>rlying the field of image studies, the paper enlists and briefly explains its<br />

basic concepts, to conclu<strong>de</strong> with both theoretical and practical gui<strong>de</strong>lines for the integrative type of<br />

analysis that the critical study of our mental images of national character (expressed in terms of<br />

the Other/Self dichotomy) presupposes.<br />

Résumé<br />

Cet ouvrage se propose <strong>de</strong> faciliter l’analyse <strong>de</strong> divers aspects <strong>de</strong>s représentations culturelles et<br />

offre un bref exposé sur l’imagologie. Bien qu’émergeant <strong>de</strong>s étu<strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong> littérature comparée,<br />

l’imagologie est <strong>de</strong> plus en plus souvent incluse dans le domaine plus large et interdisciplinaire <strong>de</strong>s<br />

étu<strong>de</strong>s sociales et culturelles. Ainsi, après quelques considérations préliminaires sur l’histoire, la<br />

définition et les prémisses fondamentales <strong>de</strong>s étu<strong>de</strong>s d’images, l’ouvrage indique et explique<br />

brièvement les concepts principaux <strong>de</strong> l’imagologie et s’achève par un gui<strong>de</strong> qui inclus <strong>de</strong>s aspects<br />

théoriques et pratiques pour l’analyse intégrative que l’étu<strong>de</strong> critique <strong>de</strong> nos images mentales du<br />

caractère national (exprimé en termes dichotomiques par l’opposition Moi/ L’Autre) implique.<br />

Rezumat<br />

Lucrarea îşi propune să faciliteze analiza diverselor reprezentări culturale, prezentând, succinct,<br />

principalele direcţii <strong>de</strong> cercetare ale imagologiei. Avându-şi originea în domeniul literaturii<br />

comparate, imagologia este din ce în ce mai <strong>de</strong>s inclusă în sfera <strong>de</strong> interes mai largă şi<br />

interdisciplinară caracteristică studiilor sociale şi culturale. Aşadar, după o introducere privind<br />

istoricul, <strong>de</strong>finiţia şi premisele care se află la baza studiului imaginilor, lucrarea trece în revistă şi<br />

explică pe scurt conceptele sale fundamentale. În ultima parte sunt avansate o serie <strong>de</strong> consi<strong>de</strong>raţii<br />

teoretice dar şi practice asupra modalităţilor <strong>de</strong> explorare, din perspectiva critică, ale<br />

reprezentărilor i<strong>de</strong>ntitare asociate unui caracter naţional.<br />

52


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 53-55<br />

CULTURAL DECONSTRUCTIONS OF<br />

TRANSLATED LITERATURE<br />

Lidia Mihaela Necula<br />

53<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

Merely translating literal meaning from one language to another can prove difficult.<br />

However, translating literature that is written into a certain source language and that is<br />

naturally and culturally enco<strong>de</strong>d into it is, in some ways, an unattainable venture.<br />

Literature is an art that exploits words as its tool, as confined to the language, and so to<br />

the culture in which they exist: one cannot have one without the other: language is culture.<br />

Consequently, translating a culturally construed piece of art work removes it from what it is.<br />

Translation is the process of changing something into what it is not so that it will be itself -<br />

but for another audience, in another time.<br />

Language is culture, and hence, to translate literature often means to inappropriately<br />

translate culture. As cultural interpreters, translators are the first to <strong>de</strong>ci<strong>de</strong> what gives<br />

literature impact in its native language, and then find some analogous way to convert that<br />

(adapting and altering) into the inten<strong>de</strong>d language. According to Bassnet (1989), much of the<br />

outcome of cultural interpreters <strong>de</strong>pends on how they un<strong>de</strong>rstand and value not only<br />

aspects of the original work but also the work itself as a whole in its original language.<br />

It is known that <strong>de</strong>construction challenges limits of language, writing and reading by<br />

pointing how the <strong>de</strong>finitions of the very terms used to discuss concepts set boundaries for<br />

the specific theories they <strong>de</strong>scribe. Therefore, while not offering a specific cultural translation<br />

theory of its own, <strong>de</strong>construction does use translation often both to raise questions regarding<br />

the nature of language and being-in-language / culture, as well as to suggest that in the<br />

process of translating <strong>text</strong>s, one can come as close as possible to that elusive notion or<br />

experience of (cultural) différence, which un<strong>de</strong>rlies their approach. Both Roland Barthes and<br />

Jacques Derrida (Culler, 1979) started out in the belief that structuralist methodology could<br />

explain and examine the whole range of cause and effect through language and culture<br />

implicitly.<br />

What transpires from <strong>de</strong>constructionist translation theory, of course, is the renewed<br />

pre-eminence of the critic, not only as the almost divinely intuitive cultural interpreter of the<br />

literary work but also as an artist himself.<br />

It takes art to talk about art (Lodge, 1966), that is, art cannot be paraphrased or<br />

translated into any other form. Besi<strong>de</strong>s, Barthes’ view that it is the rea<strong>de</strong>r and not the author<br />

who finds meaning in a <strong>text</strong> leads logically to the conclusion that it is the translator / critic /<br />

rea<strong>de</strong>r that acquires the cultural meaning of a given work. The <strong>de</strong>constructionist cultural<br />

interpreter and critic feel and <strong>de</strong>scribe their feelings but there is no objective standard<br />

measurement with which to state that their feelings are true or illusory. And in the end, the<br />

cultural translator is left to <strong>de</strong>lineate true from illusory feelings.<br />

The originality of the initial <strong>text</strong> is called into question and most importantly, the<br />

meaning of a <strong>text</strong> is reconsi<strong>de</strong>red and silenced: the process of cultural conversion resists<br />

systems of categorization which separate source <strong>text</strong> from target <strong>text</strong> or language from


meaning and <strong>de</strong>nies the existence of un<strong>de</strong>rlying forms in<strong>de</strong>pen<strong>de</strong>nt of culture. (Holeton,<br />

1992).<br />

In English through Translations (2004), Croitoru mentions that in translating literary<br />

<strong>text</strong>s, both translation theories, on the one hand, and translation criticism, on the other, have<br />

to consi<strong>de</strong>r a criterion for the analysis of the ST and TT, covering both extralinguistic and<br />

linguistic factors that are very important in interpreting and translating the <strong>text</strong>. Due to the<br />

fact that among the most important coordinates of literary translation, intentionality<br />

<strong>de</strong>termines the translator’s choices, the author’s intention being as important as the recipient<br />

that <strong>de</strong>fines the communicative situation and the function of the <strong>text</strong>, Derrida’s translation<br />

theory according to which one thinks less in terms of copying or reproducing, and more in<br />

terms of how languages relate to each other seems to apply to the culture conversion<br />

phenomenon of translating / translated literature.<br />

Clearly, there are many drawbacks to face with when translating literature because the<br />

material is actually a sample of the culture ren<strong>de</strong>red through the language of that source <strong>text</strong><br />

that, most often than not, does not have a correspon<strong>de</strong>nt into the cultural labels of the target<br />

<strong>text</strong>. For most of the cases these cultural conversions are so different from the original <strong>text</strong><br />

that the new translated <strong>text</strong> writes back its translator as a cultural construal: the final result is<br />

a différent <strong>text</strong>, a culturally re-created original <strong>text</strong> subjected to a translational individuality<br />

principle and as such, basically an unrepeated event.<br />

In a wi<strong>de</strong>r sense, this re-creation of the SLT in the TL by different means, reminds of R.<br />

Jakobson’s likeness in difference. The translators may have a greater or lesser <strong>de</strong>gree of<br />

competence, but their work also reflects an inevitable element of subjectivity or style which<br />

can be traced through certain lexical usages and syntactic forms, <strong>de</strong>velopment of<br />

mannerisms or a certain approach to translating, i.e. different reactions to the same <strong>text</strong> or to<br />

the contact with reality. In general, during such a cultural conversion it is impossible to<br />

observe one fundamental translation principle, namely, that the translation should<br />

accurately reflect the meaning of the original <strong>text</strong>s and nothing should be ad<strong>de</strong>d or removed<br />

arbitrarily, though occasionally part of the meaning can be transposed.<br />

A (cultural) recreation of the SLT would impose an interpretation of the author’s<br />

universe (the <strong>de</strong>notations and the connotations of the TL and the meaning they convey) as<br />

well as a categorization of the author’s universe in the TL system.<br />

In Con<strong>text</strong>s in Translating (2001), Nida distinguishes between the referential or cognitive<br />

meaning of translation, related to the extralinguistic object in its cultural con<strong>text</strong>, and the<br />

emotive meaning, related to the subjective reactions. A very important aspect in translating,<br />

interpreting and analyzing literature from a cultural standpoint is that the specific flavor of<br />

the works, the genius of the language, and the richness of the culture prevents translation<br />

operators from analyzing the specific source <strong>text</strong> characteristics, and leads to a conclusion of<br />

cultural untranslatability. In most cases, untranslatability is somehow supplemented for by<br />

invented and / or re-created constructions that would fit into the cultural background of the<br />

SL because culture is a specific collection of features which need examining in each<br />

translation situation.<br />

Besi<strong>de</strong>s, <strong>de</strong>construction and translation prove to be inexorably interconnected,<br />

intimating that the process of translation, that elusive impossible presence Derrida refers to<br />

as cultural différence, may be visible: cultural interpreters are challenged to think and<br />

rethink every moment a translation solution is posed, an item named, an i<strong>de</strong>ntity fixed or a<br />

sentence inscribed. With each naming gesture the cultural interpreter might feel compelled<br />

to provi<strong>de</strong> explanations for each solution chosen. Thus, the process of cultural conversion of<br />

literary <strong>text</strong>s offers a mo<strong>de</strong> of differing / <strong>de</strong>ferring that subverts mo<strong>de</strong>s of traditional<br />

thinking. By applying the <strong>de</strong>constructive translation method to literary <strong>text</strong>s it is possible to<br />

separate source <strong>text</strong> from target <strong>text</strong> or language from meaning: eventually, the discourse of<br />

the <strong>text</strong> reveals the <strong>de</strong>/re-structured cultural discontinuities as brought together un<strong>de</strong>r the<br />

54


cover of a unified, ahistorical, transcen<strong>de</strong>ntal, original <strong>text</strong>. In addition (im)possible<br />

meanings are returned to words, but covered up by the nature of the evolution of the<br />

discourse.<br />

Cultural equivalence is a fluid and relative concept, for it has the notion of difference<br />

inscribed in it, alongsi<strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>ntity (Rosaldo, 1992). Thus, a process of cultural conversion<br />

rejects the <strong>de</strong>finition of translation as transporting, reproducing, representing or<br />

communicating the meaning of the original: cultural translation/ projection is viewed as one<br />

instance in which language can be seen as always in the process of modifying the original<br />

<strong>text</strong>, of <strong>de</strong>ferring and displacing for ever any possibility of grasping that which the original<br />

<strong>text</strong> <strong>de</strong>sired to name.<br />

To conclu<strong>de</strong>, different approaches to culturally translated literature may have a<br />

positive or a negative feedback, i.e. the TT resulted might be original in its treatment of the<br />

translation and thus tend to break down the power of the transcen<strong>de</strong>ntal signified and free<br />

the field from evaluating translations in terms of their proximity to pure cultural<br />

equivalence.<br />

References<br />

Bassnet, S. (1989). “Translation, Tradition, Transmission” in Beyond Translation, New Comparison, 8<br />

(Autumn).<br />

Croitoru, E. (2004). English Through Translations, Galati: Editura Fundatiei Universitare ‘<strong>Dunarea</strong> <strong>de</strong><br />

<strong>Jos</strong>’.<br />

Culler, J. (1979). Structuralism and Science, From Lévi-Strauss to Derrida, London: Oxford University<br />

Press.<br />

Holeton, R. (ed.) (1992). Encountering Cultures. Reading and Writing in a Changing World, New Jersey:<br />

Prentice Hall.<br />

Lodge, D. (1966). The Language of Fiction, London: Routledge and Kegan Paul.<br />

Nida, E. (2001). Con<strong>text</strong>s in Translating, Amsterdam and Phila<strong>de</strong>lphia: John Benjamins Publishing<br />

Company.<br />

Rosaldo, R. (1992). “Culture and Truth: The Erosion of Classic Norms” in Encountering Cultures,<br />

Reading and Writing in a Changing World, Holeton, R. (ed.), New Jersey: Prentice Hall.<br />

Abstract<br />

The article aims at investigating the translation of literature from un<strong>de</strong>r a cultural lens, with<br />

particular emphasis on <strong>de</strong>constructionist translation theories, according to which not only do<br />

languages (source and target) relate to each other but also they apply to and are mediated towards<br />

an entire culture(al) conversion phenomenon.<br />

Résumé<br />

L’article se propose d’investiguer la traduction <strong>de</strong> la littérature d’une perspective culturelle, tout<br />

en s’appuyant sur <strong>de</strong>s théories <strong>de</strong> traduction déconstructivistes dont le principe fondamental est<br />

que les langues (source et cible) se trouvent dans une relation <strong>de</strong> réciprocité.<br />

Rezumat<br />

Articolul investighează procesele <strong>de</strong> traducere ale literaturii dintr-o perspectivă culturală,<br />

acordând atenţie <strong>de</strong>osebită teoriilor <strong>de</strong>constructiviste <strong>de</strong> traducere conform cărora limbile (sursă şi<br />

ţintă) nu doar relaţionează ci se şi pretează unui fenomen şi sunt mediate către un fenomen <strong>de</strong><br />

conversie culturală.<br />

55


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 56-60<br />

ON IDENTITY, ALTERITY AND HYBRIDITY WITH<br />

ENGLISH EPONYMS IN CHEMISTRY<br />

Floriana Popescu and Carmen Opriţ-Maftei<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

Introduction<br />

Lexicographical approaches to English eponyms may be found in the form of<br />

dictionaries, encyclopedia, pocket gui<strong>de</strong>s and handbooks, most of them <strong>de</strong>scribing medical<br />

eponyms. Since eponymization has also been active in other sciences whose terminologies<br />

may probably be <strong>de</strong>dicated specialized dictionaries or glossaries in the future, the current<br />

paper focuses on one category of such eponyms ‘in waiting’ for an a<strong>de</strong>quate lexicographic<br />

explanatory volume, i.e., the eponyms in chemistry (chemical eponyms from now on).<br />

Defined as overlapping three meanings (in McArthur 1996: 350), an eponym refers<br />

either to (a) “a personal name from which a word has been <strong>de</strong>rived”, or to (b) “the person<br />

whose name is so used” (also eponymist, in the recent literature on eponyms) or to (c) “the<br />

word so <strong>de</strong>rived” (the recent terminology has suggested the use of eponymism for this<br />

meaning). For the last thirty years, English eponyms have interested linguists (Hellweg 1995,<br />

Crystal 1995, Crystal 2007), lexicographers (Manser 1996, Manser 2005), medical doctors<br />

(Matteson and Woywodt 2006, Whitworth 2007), and specialists in ethics (Cubelli and Sala<br />

2008).<br />

That eponymization tends to become a consi<strong>de</strong>rably productive word creating process<br />

is obvious in the case of LSP. Nevertheless, little has been stated in this regard in the<br />

lexicological literature.<br />

In addition, specialized terminologies of sciences (mathematics, physics and chemistry)<br />

abound in eponyms (most of them became operative in the 19 th and 20 th centuries).<br />

Specialized eponyms were observed to be either peculiar to one science or to be shared by<br />

two or all of the three sciences (viz., Boolean geometry is useful both in mathematics and<br />

physics). Despite the eponym field-specific high frequency of occurrence, none of these<br />

sciences has benefitted from the compiling of a<strong>de</strong>quate lexicographic instruments to <strong>de</strong>scribe<br />

them.<br />

The current interpretive perspective will consi<strong>de</strong>r the nationality of the eponymist<br />

whose name was recategorized into a common noun or an element in a set phrase to be used<br />

in the vocabulary of chemistry, for we think that speaking in terms of i<strong>de</strong>ntity or alterity with<br />

respect to the eponymist ensures the hybridity 1 of the English chemical eponyms. The paper<br />

is the result of joint research carried out on the basis of a long-term research project<br />

un<strong>de</strong>rtaken by the two authors and which has materialized into a lengthy series of<br />

conference reports and publications (27 studies and articles on specific-field eponyms).<br />

1. A terminological framework<br />

The three key terms un<strong>de</strong>rlying our linguistic en<strong>de</strong>avour, i<strong>de</strong>ntity, alterity and hybridity,<br />

56


originate in cultural studies, which at a quick glance would seem improper to our research<br />

background. Nevertheless, language not only “… gives meaning to material objects and<br />

social practices that are brought into view and ma<strong>de</strong> intelligible to us”, but it is equally “the<br />

medium for the formation and transfer of values, meanings and forms of knowledge” and<br />

“…the privileged medium in which […] meanings are […] communicated” (Barker 2005: 88).<br />

Hence, our inspiration in attributing them a linguistic bias.<br />

Paraphrasing Barker (2005: vii) who assigns the following three meanings to hybridity,<br />

we shall admit that i<strong>de</strong>ntity as well as alterity may and will, in our current interpretation,<br />

stand for “(a) discursive formations, (b) frameworks for intercultural communication” and<br />

“(c) agenda for research”, i.e., linguistic research, in our case. Historically un<strong>de</strong>rstood, all the<br />

three concepts have contributed to the <strong>de</strong>velopment of vocabularies, specialist terminologies<br />

inclu<strong>de</strong>d.<br />

Defined as “… the affirmation of those who we are by contrasting nearly every element<br />

of our way of life with that of the others” (Voestermans 1991: 220), in what follows, i<strong>de</strong>ntity<br />

will apply to eponyms of English extraction, for irrespective of the geographical varieties of<br />

English (be it British or American), scientific English shows but fuzzy boundaries.<br />

Alterity, which “came to be broadly <strong>de</strong>fined as discourse on the otherness of people,<br />

particularly outsi<strong>de</strong> one’s domestic ken” (Voestermans 1991: 220), will refer to all those<br />

eponymisms originating in other cultures but which were adopted by English as well.<br />

“At its core, hybridity involves the mixing together of previously discrete cultural<br />

elements to create new meanings and i<strong>de</strong>ntities” (Barker 2004: 89). We share Kraidy’s (2005:<br />

1) opinion that “hybridization is one of the emblematic notions of our era […] which<br />

captures the spirit of the time”. Although most frequently, hybridity refers to culture, as we<br />

use it from now on, it relates to language, in general and to field-specific vocabularies in<br />

particular.<br />

We aim to show that eponymy is transcultural and it etymologically reveals three main<br />

classes of eponymisms, viz., those originating in the names of famous native eponymists, or<br />

in the names of those coming from other cultures or in several types of associations between<br />

eponymists of the otherness and those of the native scientific background.<br />

2. Materials and methods<br />

To make a comprehensive inventory of chemical eponyms, four English volumes<br />

(Holtzclaw and Robinson, 1988a, Holtzclaw and Robinson, 1988b, Pauling, 1964, Chang,<br />

1984) were scanned and a list of such terms was drawn which resulted in a corpus of fieldspecific<br />

items to inclu<strong>de</strong> over 400 illustrations.<br />

They were etymologically classified to comply with the key words of the current<br />

approach. The classification consi<strong>de</strong>red the structure of eponyms as an element of particular<br />

interest. This is due to the fact that in the case of set phrases their structure is always the<br />

same, i.e., chemists will always use the Moseley diagram, the Parkes process or the rule of<br />

Dulong and Petit and never in any other word sequence. It is worthwhile pointing to the<br />

practicality of the corpus which was not <strong>de</strong>signed for this research exclusively. In addition to<br />

its being useful for an intercultural analysis, our multipurpose corpus of chemical eponyms<br />

will serve for lexicological, lexicographical and translational research, teaching and<br />

evaluating purposes.<br />

3. Findings<br />

The investigation of the chemical eponyms showed common structural features,<br />

irrespective of their originating in English or other languages. Personal names may be used<br />

as one-word terms or as combinations including one or more personal names and at least<br />

57


one common word, most frequently, a noun.<br />

Our linguistic analysis revealed eponyms which come from British and American<br />

eponymists to suggest i<strong>de</strong>ntity. Out of a rich number of examples several are mentioned<br />

here: brookite (


expressed by personal names without any <strong>de</strong>rivational ornaments and which also preserve<br />

their capital initial (i.e., London force < Fritz London, who first explained the intermolecular<br />

force, in Holtzclaw and Robinson, 1988a: 288) and those which behave as the base for the<br />

process of suffixation with -ite (to <strong>de</strong>note minerals) and -(i)um (to <strong>de</strong>note chemical elements).<br />

Structurally, the eponyms which point to the presence of the ‘other’ in the English<br />

chemical terminology <strong>de</strong>velop the same two types of pattern, i.e., (elements of the)<br />

<strong>de</strong>termination (system) and suffixation, whose particularity lies in the loss of capital initials.<br />

Determiners may refer to simple nouns, as in the Arrhenius equation (Pauling 1964: 499), or<br />

in compound structures as in the Arrhenius reaction-rate (


signed by Woywodt and Matteson and entitled “Should Eponyms Be Abandoned? Yes”, in British<br />

Medical Journal, 335, 424 and the latter presented in the bibliography below.<br />

Bibliography<br />

Barker, C. 2004 The Sage Dictionary of Cultural Studies, London: Sage Publications Ltd.<br />

Barker, C., 2005 Cultural Studies: Theory and Practice, Oxford: Al<strong>de</strong>n Press Ltd.<br />

Chang, R. 1984, Chemistry, New York: Random House<br />

Crystal, D. 1995, The Cambridge Encyclopedia of the English Language, Cambridge: Cambridge University<br />

Press.<br />

Cubelli, R., Sala, S.D. (2008). Eponyms to Forget, in Cortex, 44, 9, 1137 – 8<br />

Hellweg, P. 1995. The Wordsworth Book of Intriguing Words, Hertfordshire: Wordsworth Edition Ltd.<br />

Holtzclaw, H.F. jr., Robinson, R.W. 1988a. General Chemistry, Lexington: D.C. Heath and Company<br />

Holtzclaw, H.F. jr., Robinson, R.W., 1988b. College Chemistry, Lexington: D.C. Heath and Company<br />

Kraidy, M. 2005, Hybridity or the Cultural Logic of Globalization, Phila<strong>de</strong>lphia: Temple University<br />

Press<br />

Manser, M. 1996. The Wordsworth Dictionary of Eponyms, Hertfordshire: Wordsworth Reference<br />

Manser, M. 2005. Chambers Dictionary of Eponyms, Chambers Harrap Publishers<br />

Matteson, E.L, Woywodt, A. 2006. Eponymophilia in Rheumatology, in Rheumatology, 45, 1328 – 1330.<br />

McArthur, T. (ed.) 1996. The Oxford Companion to the English Language, Oxford: Oxford University Press<br />

Pauling, L. 1964. College Chemistry, San Francisco and London: W.H. Freeman and Company<br />

Voestermans, P., 1991, Alterity/i<strong>de</strong>ntity: A Deficient Image of Culture, in Corbey, R., Leerssen, J.<br />

(eds.), Alterity, I<strong>de</strong>ntity, Image: Selves and Others in Society and Scholarship, Amsterdam: Rodopi, 219-<br />

50.<br />

Whitworth, J. 2007. Should Eponyms Be Abandoned? No, in British Medical Journal, 335, 425<br />

Abstract<br />

The problem of eponyms has been constantly investigated against the background of English for<br />

specific purposes for several years. This paper continues the series of field-specific observations and<br />

presents a few remarks regarding the presence of the ‘other’ as compared to the presence of the<br />

‘national i<strong>de</strong>ntity’ in the vocabulary of chemistry.<br />

Rezumat<br />

Problema eponimelor, amplasate pe fundalul limbii engleze pentru scopuri specifice a fost cercetată<br />

în mod constant pe o perioadă <strong>de</strong> câţiva ani. Lucrarea <strong>de</strong> faţă continuă seria observaţiilor privind<br />

domenii specifice şi prezintă unele remarci privind prezenţa alterităţii comparativ cu prezenţa<br />

‘i<strong>de</strong>ntităţii’ naţionale în vocabularul specific domeniului chimiei.<br />

Résumé<br />

Le problème <strong>de</strong>s éponymes a été constamment investigué entre les frontières <strong>de</strong> l’anglais sur<br />

objectifs spécifiques <strong>de</strong>puis quelques années. Ce papier continue la série <strong>de</strong>s observations sur la<br />

terminologie propre à un objectif spécifique et présente quelques remarques sur la présence <strong>de</strong><br />

l’altérité en comparaison avec l’élément d’i<strong>de</strong>ntité nationale dans le vocabulaire <strong>de</strong> la chimie.<br />

60


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 61-65<br />

STYLISTIC FOCUS ON E.M. FORSTER<br />

Daniela Şorcaru<br />

61<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

Foster is noted for his use of symbolism as a technique in his novels, and he has been<br />

criticized for his attachment to mysticism. The characters of Mrs. Wilcox and Mrs. Moore in<br />

A Passage to India have a mystical link with the past and a striking ability to connect with<br />

people from beyond their own circles.<br />

Although he always remained to some extent an Edwardian, E. M. Forster embodied<br />

more <strong>full</strong>y than any other imaginative writer of his generation a mo<strong>de</strong>rn gay-liberation<br />

perspective.<br />

Forster’s homosexuality manifested itself in an erotic preference for foreigners and for<br />

men of the lower social classes. Reflecting an appreciation of the natural vitality he<br />

connected with working-class men and ambivalence about his own over-civilized<br />

temperament, this preference helps account for his ten<strong>de</strong>ncy to romanticize the lower classes<br />

and for his sensitivity to the injustices of the class system at home and to the effects of<br />

imperialism abroad.<br />

Perhaps because of his erotic preference for working-class men, Forster was also<br />

<strong>de</strong>eply affected by the belief that homosexuality could serve a positive social function by<br />

helping to bridge the barriers that separate the classes.<br />

Forster’s acute consciousness of gay oppression, as epitomized in the persecution of<br />

Wil<strong>de</strong>, haunted his imagination throughout his life, fueling his anger at social and political<br />

injustices of all kinds.<br />

But notwithstanding his difficulties in making a sexual adjustment and <strong>de</strong>spite recent<br />

attempts to characterize his attitu<strong>de</strong> toward homosexuality as guilt-rid<strong>de</strong>n and self-loathing,<br />

the fact is that Forster never felt shame for his sexual orientation.<br />

What he did feel were a sense of wariness and vulnerability and that sensation of<br />

standing ‘at a slight angle to the universe’ that he <strong>de</strong>tected in the poetry of C. P. Cavafy.<br />

Forster’s sensitivity to the pervasive homophobia of his age probably accounts for that tinge<br />

of sadness so characteristic of the Forsterian voice. His fiction embodies a consistent system<br />

of values centered on issues of self-realization, individualism, and responsiveness to life,<br />

nature, and the unseen.<br />

Forster began writing A Passage to India in 1913, just after his first visit to India. The<br />

novel was not revised and completed, however, until well after his second stay in India, in<br />

1921, when he served as secretary to the Maharajah of Dewas State Senior. Published in 1924,<br />

A Passage to India examines the racial misun<strong>de</strong>rstandings and cultural hypocrisies that<br />

characterized the complex interactions between Indians and the English toward the end of<br />

the British occupation of India.<br />

A Passage to India was the last in a string of Forster’s novels in which his craft<br />

improved markedly with each new work. After the novel’s publication, however, Forster<br />

never again attained the level of craft or the <strong>de</strong>pth of observation that characterized his early<br />

work.


With a view to analyzing E. M. Forster’s role as a precursor of the stream-ofconsciousness<br />

linguistic techniques at <strong>text</strong> level, we embark upon a parallel task, namely that<br />

of proving that the pleating of stylistic functions in literary discourse creates a complex<br />

network of linguistic <strong>de</strong>vices, no matter the perspective at the core of the analysis.<br />

Text 1. “So the leave-taking began. Every one was cross or wretched. It was as if irritation<br />

exu<strong>de</strong>d from the very soil. Could one have been so pretty on a Scotch moor or an Italian<br />

alp? Fielding won<strong>de</strong>red afterwards. There seemed no reserve of tranquility to draw upon<br />

India. Either none, or else tranquility swallowed up everything, as it appeared to do for<br />

Professor Godbole. Here was Aziz all shoddy and odious, Mrs. Moore and Miss Quested<br />

both silly, and he himself and Heaslop both <strong>de</strong>corous on the surface, but <strong>de</strong>testable<br />

really, and <strong>de</strong>testing each other.<br />

‘Good-bye, Mr. Fielding, and thank you so much. …What lovely College buildings!’<br />

‘Good-bye, Mrs. Moore.’<br />

‘Good-bye, Mr. Fielding. Such an interesting afternoon. …’<br />

‘Good-bye, Miss Quested.’<br />

‘Good-bye, Dr. Aziz.’<br />

‘Good-bye, Mrs. Moore.’<br />

‘Good-bye, Dr. Aziz.’<br />

‘Good-bye, Miss Quested.’” (Forster, 1991:67)<br />

The vocabulary of Text 1 observes the canon of formal discourse, not only at the level of<br />

individual words, but also at that of collocations specific to formal English. The absence of<br />

any intrusions of the informal results in clear un<strong>de</strong>rstanding on the part of the rea<strong>de</strong>r,<br />

whereas the stylistic effect created is that of ‘nice and proper’ language that is meant to<br />

characterize both the situation at hand and the characters.<br />

The nouns in the <strong>text</strong>, whose scarcity is to be noted, as they yield frequency to<br />

adjectives in this excerpt, reveal a stylistic interplay between the concrete and the abstract.<br />

Such a linguistic <strong>de</strong>vice serves the stylistic function of supporting the i<strong>de</strong>a of tension at <strong>text</strong><br />

level: irritation, soil, moor, alp, reserve, tranquility, College, buildings, surface.<br />

The i<strong>de</strong>a of tension is enhanced and characterized by the large number of adjectives<br />

employed with a view to creating a stylistic play upon reality and appearance. Thus, they<br />

qualify reality as hid<strong>de</strong>n and appearance as out in the open, a type of antonymic social<br />

prejudice that all characters tolerate, e.g. cross, wretched, pretty, shoddy, odious, silly, <strong>de</strong>corous,<br />

<strong>de</strong>testable, lovely, interesting.<br />

Enhancing this gap between truth and social mask, the adverbs in the <strong>text</strong> mostly make<br />

up superlatives, meant to draw the rea<strong>de</strong>r’s attention to the exaggeration of appearance, e.g.<br />

very , so, Such, with only two intrusions of space and time, e.g. afterwards, Here.<br />

Moreover, the verbs in the fragment obey the same interplay of reality and appearance,<br />

as seemed and appeared are contrasted to verbs <strong>de</strong>noting actions (physical or verbal), e.g.<br />

began, to draw, swallowed up, to do, thank. The transition is ren<strong>de</strong>red by such ‘intermediating’<br />

verbs as those <strong>de</strong>noting states or mental processes, e.g. was, exu<strong>de</strong>d, Could have been, won<strong>de</strong>red.<br />

The sentence structure seems to obey a tension towards end of tension axis, as the<br />

beginning of the excerpt is ma<strong>de</strong> up of simple, short sentences, e.g.<br />

So the leave-taking began. Every one was cross or wretched. It was as if irritation exu<strong>de</strong>d<br />

from the very soil. Could one have been so pretty on a Scotch moor or an Italian alp?<br />

Fielding won<strong>de</strong>red afterwards. There seemed no reserve of tranquility to draw upon<br />

India,<br />

that evolve into longer, compound and complex sentences as the tension dissipates<br />

with the leave-taking, e.g.<br />

62


Either none, or else tranquility swallowed up everything, as it appeared to do for<br />

Professor Godbole. Here was Aziz all shoddy and odious, Mrs. Moore and Miss Quested<br />

both silly, and he himself and Heaslop both <strong>de</strong>corous on the surface, but <strong>de</strong>testable<br />

really, and <strong>de</strong>testing each other.<br />

The repetitive use of Good-bye may be interpreted as stylistically summing up and<br />

marking the moment when tension diminishes and disappears, as well as completing the<br />

formal dimension of the language employed when associated with elliptical sentences that<br />

are characteristic of formal social conversation, e.g. […] thank you so much. … What lovely<br />

College buildings! Such an interesting afternoon. …<br />

Text 2. “‘[…] I have had twenty-five years’ experience of this country’ – he paused, and<br />

‘twenty-five years’ seemed to fill the waiting-room with their staleness and ungenerosity<br />

– ‘and during those twenty-five years I have never known anything but disaster result<br />

when English people and Indians attempt to be intimate socially. Intercourse, yes.<br />

Courtesy, by all means. Intimacy – never, never. The whole weight of my authority is<br />

against it. I have been in charge at Chandrapore for six years, and if everything has gone<br />

smoothly, if there has been mutual respect and esteem, it is because both peoples kept to<br />

this simple rule. New-comers set our traditions asi<strong>de</strong>, and in an instant what you see<br />

happens, the work of years is undone and the good name of my District ruined for a<br />

generation. I – I – can’t see the end of this day’s work, Mr. Fielding. You, who are imbued<br />

with mo<strong>de</strong>rn i<strong>de</strong>as – no doubt you can. I wish I had never lived to see its beginning, I<br />

know that. That a lady, that a young lady, engaged to my most valued subordinate – that<br />

she – an English girl fresh from England – that I should have lived – –’” (pp. 147-148)<br />

Text 2 continues the same cultural clash that permeates the entire novel, but it <strong>de</strong>velops<br />

the perspective of the accuser, as it consists in a plea of the ‘ruler’ against the ‘ruled’. The<br />

vocabulary in this case is blatantly formal, obeying and exaggerating the norms of high<br />

society members being appalled at the behaviour of the lower classes or ‘savages’ in foreign<br />

lands.<br />

The power of the accuser’s beliefs permeates all linguistic levels of the <strong>text</strong>,<br />

manipulating language into stylistically supporting the i<strong>de</strong>as expressed by artful pleating of<br />

stylistic functions of language. The clash of two cultures that are very different is to be seen<br />

in the dominance of nouns marked [+ABSTRACT], e.g. years, experience, country, staleness,<br />

ungenerosity, disaster, Intercourse, Courtesy, Intimacy, weight, authority, respect, esteem, rule,<br />

traditions, instant, work, name, generation, i<strong>de</strong>as. The few intrusions of nouns marked<br />

[+CONCRETE] seem to merely support the battle of i<strong>de</strong>as by appointing concrete entities to<br />

keep the ‘combat’ going, e.g. waiting-room, people, New-comers, District, lady, subordinate, girl.<br />

In their turn, the adjectives unfold a similar axis of i<strong>de</strong>as, an axis that may be regar<strong>de</strong>d<br />

as threefold, namely the accuser <strong>de</strong>fining a) himself and the culture he stands for, <strong>de</strong>eply<br />

<strong>de</strong>pendant on tradition, e.g. whole, mutual, simple, good; b) the change that comes with people<br />

who are open-min<strong>de</strong>d to embrace social <strong>de</strong>velopment, e.g. imbued, mo<strong>de</strong>rn; c) the innocent<br />

victim, still part of the accuser’s culture, e.g. young, valued, fresh. As it can be easily noticed,<br />

all adjectives serve a clear stylistic function, that of qualifying characters and what they<br />

symbolize in the complex background of the novel.<br />

Consi<strong>de</strong>ring the fact that there are only four adverbs present in the fragment, e.g.<br />

never, socially, smoothly, asi<strong>de</strong>, mention must be ma<strong>de</strong> that their scarcity seems to be ma<strong>de</strong> up<br />

for by the repetitive use of never (4 instances), which may semantically express the accuser’s<br />

refusal to accept the situation at hand or to reconsi<strong>de</strong>r the angle of analysis of the respective<br />

situation.<br />

Similar to the previous <strong>text</strong>, the great variety of verbs, as well as their consi<strong>de</strong>rable<br />

number, account for the stylistic impression of actual conversation taking place, of<br />

63


conversation dynamics, of discourse vitality, e.g. have had, paused, seemed, to fill, have never<br />

known, result, attempt, to be, is, have been, has gone, has been, kept, set, see, happens, ruined, can’t<br />

see, can, wish, had never lived, to see, know, should have lived.<br />

The formality and appropriateness of long sentences in discourse is disrupted<br />

strategically by elliptical sentences, meant to dramatize what is being said at the moment the<br />

disruption occurs. Such stylistic manipulation of language is obvious in:<br />

‘I have had twenty-five years’ experience of this country’–he paused, and ‘twenty-five<br />

years’ seemed to fill the waiting-room with their staleness and ungenerosity–‘and during<br />

those twenty-five years I have never known anything but disaster result when English<br />

people and Indians attempt to be intimate socially. Intercourse, yes. Courtesy, by all<br />

means. Intimacy–never, never. The whole weight of my authority is against it. I have<br />

been in charge at Chandrapore for six years, and if everything has gone smoothly, if there<br />

has been mutual respect and esteem, it is because both peoples kept to this simple rule.’<br />

The same stylistic effect is created by breaking the canon of well-formed sentences,<br />

with a view to expressing the speaker’s indignation consi<strong>de</strong>ring the present state of affairs,<br />

e.g.<br />

‘New-comers set our traditions asi<strong>de</strong>, and in an instant what you see happens, the work<br />

of years is undone and the good name of my District ruined for a generation. I – I – can’t<br />

see the end of this day’s work, Mr. Fielding. You, who are imbued with mo<strong>de</strong>rn i<strong>de</strong>as –<br />

no doubt you can. I wish I had never lived to see its beginning, I know that. That a lady,<br />

that a young lady, engaged to my most valued subordinate –that she– an English girl<br />

fresh from England–that I should have lived – –’<br />

The <strong>text</strong> is thus clearly subjective at all levels and the i<strong>de</strong>as and the concepts expressed<br />

are, at all times, supported by artful pleating of stylistic functions of language.<br />

When consi<strong>de</strong>ring the stylistic peculiarities of the <strong>text</strong>s analyzed, we cannot <strong>de</strong>ny<br />

Forster his rightful place as one of the precursors of the stream-of-consciousness. His clever<br />

combining tradition and innovation resulted in high-quality prose that already displays<br />

(violent or less violent) disruptions of the formality of the vocabulary used, of the strict rules<br />

of morphology, syntax, semantics and logics, as already proved in the passages discussed.<br />

References<br />

Forster, E. M. (1991). A Passage to India, London: David Campbell Publishers Ltd.<br />

Abstract<br />

E. M. Forster’s discourse in A Passage to India may be accepted as subjective at all levels; the<br />

i<strong>de</strong>as and the concepts are always supported by the mastery assembling of the stylistic functions of<br />

language. Taking into consi<strong>de</strong>ration the stylistic particularities of the <strong>text</strong>s in focus, Forster’s<br />

being a forerunner of the stream-of-consciousness can hardly be <strong>de</strong>nied. His witty juxtaposition of<br />

tradition and innovation resulted in a high quality prose which already reveals (more or less<br />

violent) discrepancies regarding the formality of the vocabulary, the strict rules of morphology,<br />

syntax, semantics and logic, as the analysis of excerpts shows it.<br />

Résumé<br />

Le discours d’E. M. Forster dans A Passage to India peut être regardé comme étant subjectif à tous<br />

les niveaux; les idées et les concepts exprimés sont toujours supportés <strong>de</strong> l’assemblage artistique<br />

<strong>de</strong>s fonctions stylistiques du langage. En considérant les particularités stylistiques <strong>de</strong>s <strong>text</strong>es à<br />

analyser, nous ne pouvons nier la place méritée <strong>de</strong> Forster comme l’un <strong>de</strong>s précurseurs du<br />

“stream-of-consciousness.” Ses combinaisons intelligentes <strong>de</strong> tradition et innovation ont produit<br />

64


une prose <strong>de</strong> haute qualité qui montre déjà les discor<strong>de</strong>s (plus or moins violentes) <strong>de</strong> la formalité<br />

du vocabulaire utilisé, <strong>de</strong>s règles stricts <strong>de</strong> la morphologie, <strong>de</strong> la syntaxe, <strong>de</strong> la sémantique et <strong>de</strong> la<br />

logique, comme les fragments investigués prouveront.<br />

Rezumat<br />

Discursul lui E. M. Forster în romanul A Passage to India poate fi privit ca subiectiv, la orice<br />

nivel ; i<strong>de</strong>ile şi conceptele exprimate sunt tot<strong>de</strong>auna consolidate <strong>de</strong> îmbinarea artistică a funcţiilor<br />

stilistice ale limbajului. Având în ve<strong>de</strong>re particularităţile stilistice ale <strong>text</strong>elor analizate, nu putem<br />

nega locul meritat <strong>de</strong> Forster, ca precursor al scrierilor marcate <strong>de</strong> tendinţele curentului “streamof-consciousness”<br />

sau al fluxului conştiinţei. Alăturarea inteligentă a tradiţiei şi a inovaţiei au<br />

creat o proză <strong>de</strong> înaltă calitate care arată <strong>de</strong>ja discrepanţe (mai mult sau mai puţin violente) ale<br />

vocabularului utilizat, ale regulilor stricte ale morfologiei, sintaxei, semanticii şi logicii, aşa cum<br />

<strong>de</strong>monstrează fragmentele analizate.<br />

65


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 66-71<br />

EXISTENTIAL CHALLENGES.<br />

A SORESCU-LARKIN INTERCULTURAL CASE<br />

Daniela Ţuchel<br />

66<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

1. Introduction<br />

Postmo<strong>de</strong>rn man needs ‘metaknowledge’ – knowledge acquired through the<br />

inferential mo<strong>de</strong>. The following is a free transposition of Nora Iuga’s (2005) statement at the<br />

Neptun International Festival (“Zile şi Nopţi <strong>de</strong> Literatură”) in September 2005. She says: let<br />

us think of the stubbornness of a writer in search of a perfect match between written<br />

expression and the form of the thought not yet taught to speak out. Just imagine the<br />

economy. Anything useless would be left out, every ‘noise’ would be retired, every ‘că’,<br />

‘cum’, ‘care’, ‘căci’, ‘acum’, ‘atunci’, and so forth. We might be floating, continually ellipting<br />

and spinning out a language pierced like a lace. Rea<strong>de</strong>rs would be enabled to pull through a<br />

coloured string off their own silence. It could be unimaginably beautiful! (“Dar ce să facă un<br />

scriitor care se încăpăţînează să scrie, nu cum se vorbeşte, ci cum se gîn<strong>de</strong>şte: să scrii ca întrun<br />

amor perfect cînd forma scrisă a gîndului s-ar suprapune total peste forma gîndului care<br />

n-a învăţat încă să vorbească. Vă daţi seama ce economie s-ar face? Am elimina tot ce e <strong>de</strong><br />

prisos, am scoate la pensie toţi paraziţii care ne bruiază emisia, pe ‘că’ şi pe ‘cum’ şi pe ‘care’<br />

şi pe ‘căci’ şi pe ‘acum’ şi pe ‘atunci’ şi cîte altele; am pluti într-o elipsă continuă – o limbă cu<br />

găurele ca o dantelă prin care orice cititor îşi poate trasa panglica colorată a propriei tăceri.<br />

Nici nu vă daţi seama cît ar putea fi <strong>de</strong> frumos!”)<br />

The present paper has left behind history and traces contemporary stories and<br />

i<strong>de</strong>ntities born out of compactness and not expansion, out of lacunar economy and not of<br />

periphrastic, reiterated, appositely or appositionally functional pieces.<br />

By means of the parallel addressed in this article, we will try to manage a “site” in the<br />

spirit of Christopher Tindale from whom we quote (2004: 3):<br />

“As a ‘site’, the argumentative situation is a nongeographical space, located in and<br />

created by discourse. We inhabit such spaces with different facility, some of us with ease,<br />

others with discomfort. Yet they are crucial to our self-un<strong>de</strong>rstanding and our<br />

un<strong>de</strong>rstanding of others.”<br />

So much for the operation preliminary to un<strong>de</strong>rstanding and interpreting space. In<br />

time, the basic operation suggested by the <strong>text</strong> of the two poems reproduced below is<br />

syncopation in a cognitive sense. That means to say that the experience reduces the number of<br />

events in the temporal string. Marin Sorescu chooses to represent one’s last biographical<br />

stage by the emergence of the spi<strong>de</strong>r’s web, of the bodily weakness and of the soul’s<br />

separation – an evolutionary <strong>de</strong>velopment compressed to three moments of observation.<br />

Philip Larkin has a time-line of two longer and one shorter mid-positioned spans recording<br />

processes: of darkness setting in, of a sheet slowly drawn over and of hands loa<strong>de</strong>d down.<br />

These notable process occurrences are compressed by syncopation. Now let us consi<strong>de</strong>r the


poetic material:<br />

M(arin) S(orescu) Scară la cer<br />

1 Un fir <strong>de</strong> păianjen<br />

2 Atîrnă <strong>de</strong> tavan,<br />

3 Exact <strong>de</strong>asupra patului meu.<br />

4 In fiecare zi observ<br />

5 Cum se lasă tot mai jos.<br />

6 Mi se trimite şi<br />

7 Scara la cer - zic,<br />

8 Mi se aruncă <strong>de</strong> sus.<br />

9 Deşi am slăbit îngrozitor <strong>de</strong> mult,<br />

10 Sînt doar fantoma celui ce am fost,<br />

11 Mă gîn<strong>de</strong>sc că trupul meu<br />

12 Este totuşi prea greu<br />

13 Pentru scara asta <strong>de</strong>licată.<br />

14 – Suflete, ia-o tu înainte,<br />

15 Pîş! Pîş!<br />

P(hilip) L(arkin) Going<br />

1 There is an evening coming in<br />

2 Across the fields, one never seen before,<br />

3 That lights no lamps.<br />

4 Silken it seems at a distance, yet<br />

5 When it is drawn over the knees and breast<br />

6 It brings no comfort.<br />

7 Where has the tree gone, that locked<br />

8 Earth to the sky? What is un<strong>de</strong>r my hands,<br />

9 That I cannot feel?<br />

10 What loads my hands down?<br />

2. Cognition as unfol<strong>de</strong>d in these poems<br />

We are asking ourselves what recovery of non-explicit material occurs in Marin<br />

Sorescu (MS) and Philip Larkin (PL). The shared topic is the passage from closed systems<br />

(extinction closes upon itself and is studied here as covertness) to open systems, heading<br />

upward (MS) or heading downward (PL), while the linguistic stuff will be shown to<br />

outwardly bloom into hosts of meanings. An almost limitless number of presuppositions,<br />

entailments and implicatures spring up in pragmatic ways.<br />

On an experiential basis, the poems explored here make use of metaphors groun<strong>de</strong>d<br />

in the nature of one’s everyday interactions with the world. The process which operates as a<br />

vital relation is called ‘compression’ in cognitivism (Evans 2007: 30). Let us expand: an outer<br />

space relation in a distinct input space is ‘shortened’. The connection between counterparts<br />

67


gets tighter in the process, but this is also contained in the cognitive meaning of ‘vitality’, a<br />

<strong>de</strong>scription with which connectors occur across input spaces and manage the projection onto<br />

a blen<strong>de</strong>d space. In the two poems about extinction, scaled time and syncopated time are the<br />

effects of time compression. When time in the outer space is compressed in the latter variant<br />

– see MS’s case – a sequential scanning will serve the mentioned poet towards distinguishing<br />

between temporal and atemporal relations in the end. The bias shown by PL, instead, is<br />

towards summary scanning, giving rise to a static scene in a unified final whole. As for<br />

conceptualized <strong>de</strong>ath, MS applies the reverse of the relation between vertical elevation and<br />

quantity (going ‘up’ is less, contradicting the typical view that ‘up’ is ‘more of it’), whereas<br />

PL applies vertical <strong>de</strong>scent-and-quantity in reverse (doing ‘down’ is more than ever<br />

anticipated). And this estimation of quantities <strong>de</strong>velops against a qualitative truth: verticality<br />

is a movement upwards which points to divinity, whereas the downward movement leads<br />

the way to darkness (in sus spre Dumnezeu, in jos spre tenebre).<br />

The study of the two poems can persua<strong>de</strong> the stu<strong>de</strong>nt that a ‘cognitive environment’<br />

signaled by Sperber and Wilson (1986) is by necessity created when audiences assess<br />

arguments and make their judgements (it is our position now, as rea<strong>de</strong>rs of MS and PL). We<br />

may share a physical environment, but our differences are obvious: we represent the world<br />

differently. Our perceptual and inferential abilities vary. We have different sets of memories.<br />

We possess different belief structures, and so on. Thus, a Romanian’s cognitive environment<br />

would be different from an Englishman’s. What is manifest to one is not manifest to the<br />

other. What phenomena are in our visual field at a particular time may be the same even<br />

though we may not notice them all. In consequence of Sperber and Wilson’s <strong>de</strong>monstration,<br />

we can discard the catchwords ‘mutual knowledge’ or ‘shared information’ and use instead<br />

the reference to a shared – or not shared – cognitive environment. Thinking of two distinct<br />

persons, Tindale (2004: 22) says: “Insofar as their cognitive environments intersect, then that<br />

intersection is itself a cognitive environment.” Nevertheless, the analysis below will reveal<br />

that for our large communities of Romanians and Britons, respectively, there is no overlap of<br />

cognitive environments.<br />

Both <strong>text</strong>s display logical sequentiality while opposed action takes place: one self<br />

unwraps (MS) and the other wraps up (PL). The same feeling – sadness – is coupled with<br />

opposed emotion: relief (MS) and puzzlement (PL). The passage we have already allu<strong>de</strong>d to<br />

bears contrary but not contradictory conclusive experiences: SEEING IS KNOWING (line 4 ff<br />

in MS) versus NOT SEEING IS NOT KNOWING (line 3 ff in PL). Hence, the foreseeable<br />

differentiation in foregrounding <strong>de</strong>vices. MS makes salient the gradability of situations as<br />

often as he can, being shocked with (a ten<strong>de</strong>ncy towards) extremes in lines 5, 9, 12, whereas<br />

PL works out nothing gradable as long as his semantic <strong>de</strong>scription stagnates around a zero<br />

of the level recording neither an excess nor a <strong>de</strong>ficit. We will further point out that the zero<br />

of negation prevails with him.<br />

In ancient Greek ‘allegoria’ means ‘other speaking’ and <strong>de</strong>notes figurative language,<br />

something other than what one says. Do we have an allegory (one and the same) in the two<br />

poems? We answer in the affirmative. MS writes about a man lying on his back. The plot is<br />

that a spi<strong>de</strong>r comes and a soul goes, goes up in all probability. In PL the evening comes and a<br />

lying man goes down, or simply goes, according to the title. In MS, the allegory<br />

accommodates a symbol, the lad<strong>de</strong>r. In PL, the allegory is set up between the man, the tree<br />

and Earth, while ‘evening’ is an abstract personification at first, only to melt next into an<br />

allegorical object, the silken sheet. Allegories in the past centuries were suitably turned into<br />

representations in painting. We believe the most ekphrastic components visualising for us<br />

the poetic situation are the lad<strong>de</strong>r and whatever that is which is being drawn over knees and<br />

breast, perhaps a shroud. Again within the allegory, if the concept of ‘symbol’ carries a<br />

quasi-religious revelation of the Infinite, the most eligible candidates for it are the spi<strong>de</strong>r’s<br />

thread in MS and the tree in PL. And this interplay of figures can be prolonged. Ultimately,<br />

68


we need to quote an opinion (Crisp, 2005: 329) in which ‘terms’ should be read ‘figures of<br />

speech’: “It is not unusual for terms to display instabilities and reversals of meaning in a<br />

period of semantic change” - and we seem to be spanning such a period now.<br />

If we make a cognitive claim upon these poems, we can start from an explanation<br />

envisaging some everyday form of embodied experience, such as climbing a lad<strong>de</strong>r to get<br />

rescued or to get a reward, and also the experience of making oneself comfortable un<strong>de</strong>r a<br />

blanket. The moment metaphorical thinking is activated, the projection of the source domain,<br />

more experientially accessible, occurs onto the target domain. If we consi<strong>de</strong>r, however, that<br />

the allegorical meaning is foregroun<strong>de</strong>d rather than the symbolic and the metaphorical,<br />

allegory in the light of human cognition opens up a challenging perspective which probably<br />

accounts for the ‘revival’ of allegory in present-day culture.<br />

3. Ancillary grammar<br />

To us, MS saliently handles the dash and the exclamation mark. The former occurs<br />

once for introducing the rephrasing intention (line 7) and the second time for setting up the<br />

possibility of the double (see Pârvu, 2005: 47) in line 14, with a cognizing I-subject evincing<br />

the split self: the body-like-a-shadow addressing the soul-like-an-alter-ego. The exclamatory<br />

punctuation in line 15 clashes with the hushing message of the onomatopoeia, yet manages<br />

to suggest the passionate drive animating the self. In PL, there is a synecdochically split<br />

body: knees and breast (line 5) and then hands (lines 8 and 10) in a more intimate fusion with<br />

the self being accompanied by the possessive <strong>de</strong>terminative. Both MS and PL place in focus<br />

their last stanzas through their diminished size to two lines and one line, respectively. It is<br />

also worth noting that both poems allow the blank which is silence to reign supreme at the<br />

end.<br />

Additionally, ‘mi se trimite’(line 6) and ‘mi se aruncă’ (line 8) in MS are the Romanian<br />

instances of reflexivity with the zero-agent to be found in English too with ‘it is drawn’ in PL<br />

(line 5). They all represent an option for pointing to a taboo, in a situation in which it is<br />

inappropriate to give a name to the one who saves you or to the one who protectively covers<br />

you.<br />

Another grammatical comment is that in MS the zero article for ‘scară’ in the title<br />

stands out when compared to the same noun with <strong>de</strong>finite <strong>de</strong>termination in lines 7 and 13. It<br />

could be the progression from something unknown and abstract to the familiarity given by<br />

the mentioned daily observations. This progression is recor<strong>de</strong>d in PL in the treatment of the<br />

noun ‘evening’, from the in<strong>de</strong>finite <strong>de</strong>scription of the routine phenomenon (line 1) to<br />

uniqueness of manifestation (line 2). Then we should note that the present tense encroaches<br />

into past time territory in MS and equally in PL. The <strong>de</strong>ictic zero-level of here-and-now<br />

confer a permanent and spatially unlimited perspective to the experience. The vocative (MS,<br />

line 14) is functional in splitting the individuality of the experiencer, while the unanswered<br />

self-turned questions in PL (lines 8, 9, 10) set up a split ego as well. In MS, two cases of<br />

incongruent positioning (lines 6 and 7 with the items ‘şi’ and ‘zic’) are indicative of extreme<br />

emotion which prolongs its <strong>de</strong>familiarizing syntactic jumbling of the clauses constituting<br />

lines 9, 10 and 11. In PL, the frequency of negative patterns (lines 2, 3, 6, 9), only one of them<br />

being verbal negation, can trigger an interpretation going through Zero in the direction<br />

shown by Laurence Horn (1989), namely to take negation as a positive assertion about the<br />

existence of a relevant difference. The first form of negation is a rejection of external entities.<br />

Horn says that the fifth form of negation (known as ‘scalar negation’) is the first form, after<br />

all, but it must necessarily be <strong>de</strong>tached, that is used against an absent entity. Since a<br />

recognized absence only exists in contrast to a recalled presence, such a form of negation is<br />

necessarily <strong>de</strong>pen<strong>de</strong>nt upon memory. Memory enables what is present to shift attention to a<br />

stimulus that is not present. In reacting to absence, what was previously ground must now<br />

69


e interpreted as figure. ‘Evening’, ‘lamps’ and ‘comfort’ are now figure in cognitivism, by<br />

the si<strong>de</strong> of another effect they bring about, a renewed ability to symbolize in PL. It is actually<br />

their very role in negative patterns that helped increase their power as symbols.<br />

In processing the information supplied by grammar arrangements in the two poems,<br />

we find that through those grammar <strong>de</strong>vices the announcement of a few gaps happens, at<br />

the same time with a focalized intensity of thought peculiar to the subjectivity of the genre.<br />

Conclusions<br />

MS and PL have a novel way of using the adversarial or contentious aspect of<br />

arguments which are important to an un<strong>de</strong>rstanding of their poetry.<br />

Most of the implicatures are found to explore not so much time as the relation<br />

between space and body. Wavering between positions within a space is an issue of power,<br />

and also of scale, not to mention the issue of interiority and exteriority. Hence, the interesting<br />

experience of i<strong>de</strong>ntification through one viewer being ma<strong>de</strong> to go out of himself.<br />

Eventually, the major distinction between MS and PL is that the former <strong>de</strong>ci<strong>de</strong>s on a<br />

course of action and the latter cannot do so because he finds out that knowledge and proof<br />

are lacking in what he is concerned.<br />

We can recast the i<strong>de</strong>a of dialogue (present sub<strong>text</strong>ually in these poems) as a<br />

conventional situation when two parties reason together for some purpose. The actuality of<br />

the poems puts forward only arguments by one party. Thus, we are faced with a one-si<strong>de</strong>d<br />

argumentation in a natural-language setting, a practical and applied task that will make<br />

legitimate any response as <strong>de</strong>fen<strong>de</strong>d by informal logic.<br />

For his invisible respon<strong>de</strong>nt in both cases, the questioner resorts to different kinds of<br />

sophistical arguments. In MS’s case, the argumentum ad misericordiam (an appeal to<br />

sympathy) is generated by the wretched situation of a sufferer losing bodyweight. To this,<br />

the argumentum ad populum draws upon the popular opinion that the weightless soul should<br />

perform the action of rising to heaven because people say that this is the right thing to do.<br />

On the other hand, PL has a sophistical way of pressing presumptions ahead in an<br />

aggressive tactic of many questions – what is known as “the fallacy of complex question” so<br />

that “any direct answer will trap a respon<strong>de</strong>nt into damaging concessions” (Walton, 1998:<br />

26). In PL’s case, it appears that the questions themselves can be fallacies due to the fact that<br />

the questions contain presumptions that, in a subtle manner, implicate conclusions tripping<br />

up the respon<strong>de</strong>nt. By pressing the i<strong>de</strong>a of dying as ‘going down into the ground’, the<br />

answer is contained in the question, but may not be the commitment of a respon<strong>de</strong>nt<br />

resembling, for instance, MS.<br />

We cannot conclu<strong>de</strong> without remembering the cautious tone of David Crystal (1992:<br />

386) when assessing that too many zeros or absences in an analysis weaken its plausibility.<br />

We must hope that our paper has not been excessive in that respect.<br />

We tried to get a grasp on the two poets’ insight in terms of purpose versus play,<br />

hierarchy versus anarchy, presence versus absence, epistemology versus ontology. This<br />

strategy of approach may yield the objectivised differences in the poets’ cultural<br />

backgrounds, instead of pon<strong>de</strong>ring about the genuineness of their personal grasp. PL poses<br />

questions that cannot be easily answered. MS takes an orientation that is appealing because it<br />

discharges us of the duty to give answers. We are all philosophers by dabbling, the argument<br />

of God awaiting us may impress us or may fail to do so. Truth is nee<strong>de</strong>d, but the notion of<br />

truth is not at all a perspicuous one.<br />

References<br />

Crisp, P. (2005). “Allegory and symbol – a fundamental opposition?” in Language and Literature. Vol.<br />

70


14, no. 4 / November. Sage Publications.<br />

Crystal, D. (1992). A Dictionary of Linguistics and Phonetics. Blackwell Publishers.<br />

Evans, V. (2007). A Glossary of Cognitive Linguistics. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press Ltd.<br />

Horn, L. (1989). Natural History of Negation. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.<br />

Iuga, N. (2005). “Dacă inspiri numai ce expiri, mori”, in România literară nr. 39/5-11 oct., p. 3.<br />

Pârvu, S. (coord.) (2005). Postmo<strong>de</strong>rnism. Iaşi: Institutul European.<br />

Sperber D. & D. Wilson (1986). Relevance. Communication and Cognition. Cambridge, MA: Harvard<br />

University Press.<br />

Tindale, C. W. (2004). Rhetorical Argumentation. Sage Publications, Inc.<br />

Walton, D. (1998). The New Dialectic. Conversational Con<strong>text</strong>s of Argument. Toronto, Buffalo, London:<br />

University of Toronto Press.<br />

Abstract<br />

This intercultural study is backed up by current competing motivations in discourse, such<br />

as economy, clarity, routinization or expressivity. The analysis is hinged on arguments<br />

about non-geographical space, time compression, metaphysical extinction in two cognitive<br />

environments: one distinctly Romanian and the other one distinctly British.<br />

Résumé<br />

Cette approche, soutenue par <strong>de</strong>s thèmes d’interculturalité, invoque <strong>de</strong>s motivations<br />

discursives qui concurrent pour assurer les principes <strong>de</strong> l’économie, <strong>de</strong> la clarté <strong>de</strong><br />

l’expression, <strong>de</strong> l’expressivité du message et <strong>de</strong> son aspect quotidien. On présente <strong>de</strong>s<br />

arguments en ce qui concerne l’espace qui dépasse la géographie, le temps comprimé,<br />

l’extinction métaphysique. Le tout est généré par <strong>de</strong>s milieux cognitifs distincts, l’espace<br />

roumain et l’espace britannique.<br />

Rezumat<br />

Abordarea <strong>de</strong> faţă, susţinută <strong>de</strong> teme ale interculturalităţii, invocă motivaţii discursive ce<br />

concură pentru a asigura principial economia exprimării şi claritatea ei, expresivitatea<br />

mesajului şi formularea lui rutinieră. Se aduc argumente în legătură cu spaţiul<br />

transgresând geografia, timpul comprimat, extincţia metafizică, totul fiind generat <strong>de</strong> medii<br />

cognitiv distincte, unul românesc şi celălalt britanic.<br />

71


Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, New Series.<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009<br />

pp. 72-77<br />

LA DIMENSION INTERCULTURELLE DE L’HUMOUR<br />

- PISTES PEDAGOGIQUES -<br />

Angelica Vâlcu<br />

Tentative <strong>de</strong> définir l’humour.<br />

72<br />

Language<br />

and<br />

Literature<br />

Selon l’Encyclopédie libre Wikipedia, l’humour pourrait être défini comme “une forme<br />

d’expression permettant <strong>de</strong> dégager certains aspects cocasses ou insolites <strong>de</strong> la réalité,<br />

<strong>de</strong>stinée généralement à provoquer le rire, soit en se moquant <strong>de</strong>s autres, soit en se moquant<br />

<strong>de</strong> ses semblables ou <strong>de</strong> soi-même (autodérision).” 1<br />

L’humour est un moyen d’expression qui vise la vérité sans la nommer, étant en même<br />

temps la meilleure possibilité <strong>de</strong> s’exprimer lorsqu’il est impossible <strong>de</strong> le faire d’une autre<br />

manière. L’humour est une forme d’esprit qui se cache sous un air sérieux, pleine d’ironie et<br />

d’imprévu, et qui consiste à dégager les aspects plaisants <strong>de</strong> la réalité avec un certain<br />

détachement.<br />

Dans son essai sur l’humour, Robert Escarpit 2 donne une définition <strong>de</strong> l’humour à<br />

partir <strong>de</strong> la théorie humorale d'Hippocrate <strong>de</strong> Cos et <strong>de</strong> Galien. La notion d’humour apparaît<br />

dans la littérature avec Ben Jonson (Anglais d’origine), qui définit “le sens of humour”<br />

comme une “conscience intuitive mais luci<strong>de</strong> et délibérément souriante <strong>de</strong> son propre<br />

personnage caractériel au milieu d'autres personnages” 3. L’humour serait, selon Escarpit, un<br />

état d’esprit et un comportement qui fonctionne “par un arrêt <strong>de</strong>s jugements affectif, moral<br />

et philosophique” et qui se concrétise sous la forme d’une interruption (en trois phases) <strong>de</strong>s<br />

évi<strong>de</strong>nces:<br />

a) la confrontation soudaine entre l’évi<strong>de</strong>nt et l’absur<strong>de</strong>;<br />

b) suspension volontaire <strong>de</strong> l'évi<strong>de</strong>nt, tout en continuant à adopter un raisonnement<br />

formellement logique;<br />

c) rôle important <strong>de</strong> la réception et <strong>de</strong>s paramètres culturels.<br />

Ces trois phases forment un tronc commun avec le fantastique considéré comme un écart par<br />

rapport au vraisemblable.<br />

À partir <strong>de</strong> l’ouvrage <strong>de</strong> T. Todorov 4, Said Laqabi 5, dans sa thèse <strong>de</strong> doctorat “Aspects<br />

<strong>de</strong> l’ironie dans la littérature maghrébine d’expression française <strong>de</strong>s années quatre-vingts ” soutenue<br />

à l’Université Paris XIII en 1996, considère que l’humour se définit par un certain côté<br />

comique dont le grand trait distinctif consiste dans l’ancrage idiomatique et culturel.<br />

Par le biais <strong>de</strong> l’humour comme forme supérieure <strong>de</strong> l’ironie, on peut dire avec plus <strong>de</strong><br />

force ce qui est saisi d’une manière moins ferme, d’une manière traditionnelle ou stéréotypée<br />

“Elle [l’ironie] déjoue donc un ensemble <strong>de</strong> conventions <strong>de</strong> lecture et <strong>de</strong> communication,<br />

pour permettre la transmission du singulier. D'une part, elle met à distance le proche et<br />

permet <strong>de</strong> le voir, en lui donnant forme. D'autre part, elle bloque le passé d'attentes et<br />

ouvre un moment d'inspiration dans l'auditeur, comme un présent absolu. ” 6<br />

Le <strong>text</strong>e humoristique est un phénomène, par excellence, culturel et son interprétation


prétend la référence à un cadre d’expériences commun aux <strong>de</strong>ux interlocuteurs.<br />

Il est assez difficile <strong>de</strong> découvrir la signification d’un <strong>text</strong>e humoristique. «La<br />

traduction», l’explication <strong>de</strong>s mots et <strong>de</strong>s référents ne récupère pas entièrement le sens du<br />

<strong>text</strong>e en question<br />

“les intentions <strong>de</strong> l’auteur et les données du <strong>text</strong>e se mêlent en général à un ensemble <strong>de</strong><br />

connotations ou <strong>de</strong> références incluant l’histoire, la politique, les attitu<strong>de</strong>s, les mo<strong>de</strong>s <strong>de</strong><br />

vie, les traditions, la littérature, la science, et toutes sortes <strong>de</strong> domaines dans lesquels les<br />

locuteurs natifs sont immergés en permanence et qui varient <strong>de</strong> contrée à contrée, donc<br />

<strong>de</strong> langue à langue dans la mesure où la géographie et la linguistique sont solidaire. ” 7<br />

Par leur thématique, les différents genres <strong>de</strong> l’humour, blague, anecdote, satire, etc.<br />

cherchent à raffermir et réaffirmer l’i<strong>de</strong>ntité du groupe, la spécificité du groupe et donnent<br />

les preuves <strong>de</strong> leur vouloir <strong>de</strong> vivre ensemble:<br />

“La pratique la plus répandue est alors le choix d'un bouc émissaire qui donne à chacun la<br />

vision péjorative <strong>de</strong> l'autre, <strong>de</strong> celui qui n'est pas partie intégrante <strong>de</strong> la collectivité<br />

revendiquée. L'i<strong>de</strong>ntité mise en exergue varie selon les blagues, elle peut être<br />

professionnelle, sexuelle, régionale, nationale, ethnique, religieuse... ” 8<br />

II. Culture et interculture dans l’enseignement du FLE.<br />

Le concept <strong>de</strong> culture peut être défini comme une manière <strong>de</strong> penser et d’être, plus<br />

précisément comme “un ensemble <strong>de</strong> significations, valeurs et croyances <strong>de</strong> nature collective<br />

et dotées d’une certaine durabilité qui caractérisent un groupe d’individus sur une base<br />

nationale, ethnique ou autre et orientent leurs conduites. ” 9<br />

Marie-Thérèse Claes 10, dans l’article cité ci-<strong>de</strong>ssous, définit la culture comme un<br />

système <strong>de</strong> significations partagées: lorsque les significations différent, <strong>de</strong>s ambigüités<br />

apparaissent. L’auteure mentionnée donne l’exemple du mot «mariage» tel qu’il est perçu<br />

dans différentes cultures: les Américains du Nord associent le mot mariage à l’idée d’amour<br />

et <strong>de</strong> partenariat, les Japonais l’associent à la confiance et même au compromis, aux<br />

restrictions, aux obligations, tandis que les Français associent le mariage à l’amour, à la<br />

passion et au sexe. Les associations dont parle M. Th. Claes démontrent le fait que chacun<br />

d’entre nous dispose d’un dictionnaire mental structuré d’une manière particulière et que<br />

dans ce dictionnaire se trouvent <strong>de</strong>s mots disponibles à n’importe quel stimulus extérieur.<br />

Le socioculturel est une composante essentielle - à coté <strong>de</strong>s composantes linguistiques,<br />

paralinguistiques, sociolinguistiques, référentielles, discursives - <strong>de</strong> la compétence <strong>de</strong><br />

communication. L’enseignement <strong>de</strong>s langues étrangères favorise usuellement la composante<br />

linguistique au détriment <strong>de</strong>s autres composantes et surtout, <strong>de</strong>s composantes<br />

sociolinguistique et socioculturelle. Or, on le sait très bien: ces <strong>de</strong>rnières <strong>de</strong>ux composantes<br />

constituent la dimension interculturelle <strong>de</strong> la compétence <strong>de</strong> communication et représentent<br />

un phénomène essentiel dans ce mon<strong>de</strong> interculturel et globalisé <strong>de</strong> plusieurs points <strong>de</strong> vue.<br />

La conscientisation <strong>de</strong> l’existence <strong>de</strong>s différences inter-cultures est <strong>de</strong> plus en plus<br />

obligatoire.<br />

La compétence interculturelle n’est pas l’aptitu<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> décrire la culture <strong>de</strong> l’Autre<br />

comme discipline d’étu<strong>de</strong> mais la capacité <strong>de</strong> se mo<strong>de</strong>ler en modifiant justement ses propres<br />

critères et ses repères.<br />

73


III. Le décodage <strong>de</strong> l’image i<strong>de</strong>ntitaire.<br />

L’image i<strong>de</strong>ntitaire <strong>de</strong>s Français qui circule dans les manuels <strong>de</strong> FLE, découle <strong>de</strong><br />

l’imaginaire patrimonial 11 engendré par un con<strong>text</strong>e, une histoire, etc. Ces images peuvent<br />

être produites soit par les sociétés elles-mêmes (autoreprésentation / stéréotype) ou par le<br />

regard <strong>de</strong>s autres (hétéro représentation / stéréotype). Les stéréotypes <strong>de</strong>s manuels et <strong>de</strong>s<br />

imaginaires collectifs s’alimentent réciproquement. Par exemple, les blagues sont en même<br />

temps vecteurs et témoins <strong>de</strong> ces images et permettent <strong>de</strong> comprendre pourquoi un<br />

stéréotype peut être vrai (ou non).<br />

L’image i<strong>de</strong>ntitaire <strong>de</strong>s Français est associée, dans beaucoup <strong>de</strong> <strong>text</strong>es étudiés en classe<br />

<strong>de</strong> FLE, à <strong>de</strong>ux emblèmes: le premier, le drapeau tricolore qui permet d’i<strong>de</strong>ntifier la France<br />

comme unité nationale, et le second, le coq gaulois qui n’est pas un symbole officiel <strong>de</strong> l’Etat<br />

mais le symbole <strong>de</strong> la prédilection pour représenter la France et les Français. Le coq gaulois<br />

accentue “un trait typiquement français, à savoir la fierté nationale, pour ne pas dire l’arrogance”.<br />

(Goethe Institut).<br />

Les Français sont un peuple fier. Ils s’enorgueillissent <strong>de</strong>s nombreux succès que<br />

comporte leur histoire et <strong>de</strong> leurs contributions au mon<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> la culture. Leurs dirigeants<br />

les plus importants ont toujours compris l’importance que revêtait la fierté et l’estime <strong>de</strong><br />

soi pour le Français moyen. De Gaulle, en particulier, a très bien su jouer <strong>de</strong> cette fibre. Il<br />

a su les flatter, les cajoler, les motiver, et partant obtenir qu’ils coopèrent et obéissent.<br />

(Pu Zhihong 2008 : 161) 12<br />

Prenons ces <strong>de</strong>ux blagues 13 qui pourraient figurer dans un chapitre du manuel <strong>de</strong> FLE,<br />

chapitre <strong>de</strong>stiné à l’étu<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> la culture et <strong>de</strong> la civilisation françaises. On y peut distinguer<br />

quelques traits qui caractérisent les Français, tels que: la fierté l’orgueil même l’arrogance.<br />

a) Comment fait un Français pour se suici<strong>de</strong>r ?<br />

- Il se tire une balle à 15 centimètres au-<strong>de</strong>ssus <strong>de</strong> la tête en plein dans son complexe<br />

<strong>de</strong> supériorité.......<br />

b) Comment appelle-t-on quelqu'un qui parle trois langues ? - Un trilingue..<br />

Comment appelle-t-on quelqu'un qui parle <strong>de</strong>ux langues ? - Un bilingue.<br />

Comment appelle-t-on quelqu'un qui ne parle qu'une langue ? - Un Français.<br />

A une premiere analyse <strong>de</strong>s <strong>text</strong>es ci-<strong>de</strong>ssus nous nous rendons compte que<br />

l’apprenant roumain se trouve face à une représentation, disons négative, <strong>de</strong> l’i<strong>de</strong>ntité <strong>de</strong><br />

l’Autre, du Français. Mais, selon Nathalie Auger «plus on se côtoie, moins les stéréotypes<br />

émergent.» 14 Cela veut dire que plus les rencontres sont fréquentes plus les stéréotypes sont<br />

éliminés (nous comprenons par rencontre non seulement la rencontre face à face <strong>de</strong>s jeunes<br />

<strong>de</strong> nationalités différentes mais aussi celle par le biais <strong>de</strong>s livres, <strong>de</strong> la presse, etc.).<br />

“Lorsqu’un message quitte la culture dans laquelle il était codé, il contient le sens<br />

donné par le co<strong>de</strong>ur... Quand un message atteint la culture où il doit être décodé, il subit<br />

une transformation dans laquelle l’influence <strong>de</strong> la culture décodante <strong>de</strong>vient une partie<br />

<strong>de</strong> la signification du message. Le contenu du message d’origine est modifié durant la<br />

phase du décodage <strong>de</strong> la communication interculturelle, car le répertoire culturellement<br />

différent <strong>de</strong>s comportements et <strong>de</strong>s significations communicationnelles possédé par le<br />

déco<strong>de</strong>ur ne contient pas les mêmes significations culturelles possédées par le co<strong>de</strong>ur. » 15<br />

Dans l’enseignement / apprentissage d’une langue - culture étrangère, l’étu<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s<br />

documents authentiques a une importance particulière car les énoncés <strong>de</strong> l’énonciateur-<br />

auteur permettent, le plus souvent, <strong>de</strong> légitimer les marques valorisantes et/ou<br />

74


dévalorisantes que l’auteur met en discours (il s’agit d’une autoreprésentation <strong>de</strong> l’Autre).<br />

Nous considérons le terme Autre dans sa double acception: d’opposition et <strong>de</strong> similitu<strong>de</strong>.<br />

Pour qu’une i<strong>de</strong>ntité se réalise, elle doit avoir en vue cette double dimension <strong>de</strong> l’Autre.<br />

Les spécialistes en didactique <strong>de</strong>s langues soutiennent que le discours pédagogique,<br />

quel que soit son contenu, prétend la vérité. Le stéréotype, sous pré<strong>text</strong>e <strong>de</strong> vérité du<br />

discours, peut être infiltré n’importe où dans la séquence didactique, non seulement dans le<br />

cours <strong>de</strong> civilisation. Il s’agit <strong>de</strong> la création <strong>de</strong>s séquences dialogiques qui mettent en<br />

situation divers actes <strong>de</strong> parole, <strong>de</strong> l’analyse <strong>de</strong>s documents authentiques, (écrits par <strong>de</strong>s<br />

Français à <strong>de</strong>s fins non didactiques) qui peuvent enchaîner <strong>de</strong>s stéréotypes.<br />

En ce qui concerne les stratégies pédagogiques que nous pouvons mettre en œuvre<br />

pour que nos étudiants prennent conscience <strong>de</strong>s modèles <strong>de</strong> la culture d’arrivée, plusieurs<br />

voies peuvent être envisagées selon une méthodologie progressive. Nous n’en citons que<br />

quelques unes: le travail sur les stéréotypes, le travail sur la comparaison et troisièmement,<br />

les cheminements thématiques. Le problème majeur qui peut intervenir dans tous ces types<br />

<strong>de</strong> stratégies est celui du risque du préjugé. Pour l’éviter, il faut savoir “comment approcher<br />

une culture étrangère et évaluer les écarts <strong>de</strong> façon dépassionnée sans être aveuglé par nos<br />

références et jugements <strong>de</strong> valeur” 16. Dans leur démarche <strong>de</strong> découvrir les réalités <strong>de</strong> la<br />

culture française nos apprenants suivront diverses étapes: l’observation <strong>de</strong> la réalité,<br />

l’analyse <strong>de</strong> la réalité et la transformation <strong>de</strong> la réalité.<br />

Conclusion.<br />

La connaissance <strong>de</strong> la culture <strong>de</strong> l’Autre est essentielle pour la compréhension, le<br />

décodage d’un <strong>text</strong>e/discours en langue étrangère. Dans la didactique <strong>de</strong>s langues-cultures,<br />

discerner les valeurs d’une culture ai<strong>de</strong> à discerner ce qu’on accepte comme beau, bon et<br />

juste et ce qui ne l’est pas. La connaissance <strong>de</strong>s valeurs culturelles permet <strong>de</strong> relativiser ses<br />

aprioris car la rencontre avec une autre culture offre <strong>de</strong>s images et <strong>de</strong>s situations multiples<br />

qui sont absorbées dans la représentation unifiante et la construction <strong>de</strong> l’i<strong>de</strong>ntité <strong>de</strong><br />

l’individu.<br />

Notes<br />

1. http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Humour<br />

2. Escarpit R. 1981, L’Humour, Paris - P.U.F. Que sais-je ?- n° 877 -<br />

3. I<strong>de</strong>m p. 26<br />

4. Todorov T. 1970, Introduction à la littérature fantastique, Paris – Seuil, apud note 5, p. 28<br />

5. Laqabi, Said, « Aspects <strong>de</strong> l’ironie dans la littérature maghrébine d’expression française <strong>de</strong>s années quatrevingts<br />

» communication soutenue à l’Université Paris XIII en 1996, (voir l’adresse Internet<br />

http://www.google.fr/search?q=Said+Laqabi&sourceid=navclient-ff&ie=UTF-8&rlz= 1B2GGFB_en<br />

RO216RO217, p 27)<br />

6. Marie De Gandt, (2001). «Poétique <strong>de</strong> l'ironie», in Pierre Schoentjes, Poétique <strong>de</strong> l'ironie, Paris, coll.<br />

Points/Essais-Inédits, 2001, 347, adresse Internet : http://www.fabula.org/revue/cr/180.php, site<br />

consulté le 15 oct. 2009<br />

7. Anne Marie Laurian, CNSR, France, «Humour et traduction au contact <strong>de</strong>s cultures», Méta, vol. 34,<br />

n.1, 1989, 5-14, http://id.erudit.org/i<strong>de</strong>rudit/003418ar<br />

8. Mercier, Arnaud, Laboratoire Communication et Politique, CNRS, Paris/Université <strong>de</strong> Nice,<br />

Introduction, «Pouvoirs <strong>de</strong> la dérision, dérision <strong>de</strong>s pouvoirs», Hermès 29, 2001, 12<br />

9. Faure, Guy, Olivier et Rubin, 1993, «Approcher la dimension interculturelle en négociation<br />

internationale», http://www.philippepierre.com/_media/negociation_internationale_et_dimension_<br />

interculturelle_rfg.pdf, site consulté le 2 octobre 2009<br />

10.<br />

Claes, Marie-Thérèse, «La dimension interculturelle dans l’enseignement du français langue <strong>de</strong><br />

spécialité», www.francparler.org/articles/interculturel_claes.doc, site consulté le 15 sept.2009<br />

75


11. Debyser F. apud N. Auger, Auger, N., «Du stéréotype à la compréhension <strong>de</strong> la relation<br />

interculturelle : autour <strong>de</strong>s manuels <strong>de</strong> FLE en usage dans l’Union Européenne», communication<br />

soutenue au Colloque organisé à Paris le 4 et 5 novembre 2005 par le Forum <strong>de</strong>s langues<br />

européennes, http://www.forum<strong>de</strong>slangues.net/forum/manifF.htm, site consulté le 15 sept.2009<br />

12. Pu Zhihong, Université Sun Yat-sen <strong>de</strong> Chine, «L’implicite culturel et sa place dans l’enseignement<br />

d’une langue étrangère», Synergies, Chine, n. 3, 2008, 161-167<br />

13. http://sireli.canalblog.com/archives/2006/08/29/2565753.html<br />

14 . Auger, N., «Du stéréotype à la compréhension <strong>de</strong> la relation interculturelle : autour <strong>de</strong>s manuels <strong>de</strong><br />

FLE en usage dans l’Union Européenne», communication soutenue au Colloque organisé à Paris le<br />

4 et 5 novembre 2005 par le Forum <strong>de</strong>s langues européennes, http://www .forum <strong>de</strong>s langues .net<br />

/forum/manifF.htm, site consulté le 15 sept.2009<br />

15. Hall, E.T, p. 197, apud Martineau, Emmanuelle, Maîtrise F.L.E UFR <strong>de</strong> Nantes, «Les stéréotypes<br />

franco-allemands dans la caricature», http://pagespersoorange.fr/chevrel/dossiers/martineau.htm, site<br />

consulté le 2 décembre 2009<br />

16. http://www.auf.org/docs/1/pol-ling-edu-2003-07.pdf, site consulté le 2 décembre 2009<br />

Bibliographie<br />

Bre<strong>de</strong>ndiek, M. (2000). “ Le développement <strong>de</strong> la reconstruction <strong>de</strong> l’autre culturel. Vers la réflexion<br />

anthropologique <strong>de</strong> l’autrui dans l’interculturel”, in M.Bre<strong>de</strong>ndiek et B. Krewer : La dynamique <strong>de</strong> la<br />

reconstruction <strong>de</strong> l’autre culturel dans les situations <strong>de</strong> coopération interculturelle. Université <strong>de</strong> la Sarre,<br />

2000, apud Thomas, M., - Mémoire DESS P.A.I., “Acquérir une compétence interculturelle. Des<br />

processus d’apprentissages interculturels au quotidien“ http://www.mediationinterculturelle.com,<br />

p. 30<br />

Mercier, A. (2001). Laboratoire Communication et Politique, CNRS, Paris/Université <strong>de</strong> Nice,<br />

Introduction, «Pouvoirs <strong>de</strong> la dérision, dérision <strong>de</strong>s pouvoirs”, Hermès, 29<br />

http://humour-blague.com/blague/belge.php<br />

www.francparler.org/articles/interculturel_claes.doc<br />

Thomas, M., - Mémoire DESS P.A.I., “Acquérir une compétence interculturelle. Des processus<br />

d’apprentissages interculturels au quotidien” http://www.mediation-interculturelle.com, p.37,<br />

site consulté le 2 oct. 2009<br />

http://sireli.canalblog.com/archives/2006/08/29/2565753.html<br />

* * * * (2000). Conseil <strong>de</strong> l’Europe/Conseil <strong>de</strong> la Coopération Culturelle, Un Cadre européen commun <strong>de</strong><br />

référence pour les langues: apprendre, enseigner, évaluer, Paris : Didier 2000.<br />

Abstract<br />

The mastering of a foreign language involves, in addition to language knowledge, in-<strong>de</strong>pth<br />

knowledge of the socio-cultural aspects of the community speaking the respective language.<br />

Starting from <strong>de</strong> Saussure’s Theory, this traingle may be assimilated to the semiotic triangle<br />

signifier, signified, referent in the process of generating humour and stating that the signifier<br />

would represent the linguistic si<strong>de</strong> of the humorous turn, the signified would be the concept and<br />

the hid<strong>de</strong>n meaning of the turn, while the referent would be the socio-cultural con<strong>text</strong> which<br />

brings about the humorous turn. This approach focuses on the relationship between the humorous<br />

<strong>text</strong> and the socio-cultural referents which <strong>de</strong>termine the <strong>de</strong>coding of the image of alterity in this<br />

type of <strong>text</strong>.<br />

Résumé<br />

La maitrise d’une langue étrangère exige, sauf la connaissance <strong>de</strong> la langue, une très bonne<br />

connaissance <strong>de</strong>s aspects socio-culturels <strong>de</strong> la communauté qui parle cette langue. A partir <strong>de</strong> la<br />

théorie <strong>de</strong> Saussure sur le triangle sémiotique signifiant, signifié, référent, on peut assimiler ce<br />

triangle à la genèse <strong>de</strong> l’humour et affirmer que le signifiant serait le côté linguistique <strong>de</strong> la<br />

76


tournure humoristique, le signifié serait le concept et le sens caché <strong>de</strong> la tournure tandis que le<br />

référent serait le con<strong>text</strong>e socioculturel qui fait naitre la tournure humoristique.<br />

Notre communication vise à étudier la relation entre le <strong>text</strong>e humoristique et les référents<br />

socioculturels qui déterminent le décodage <strong>de</strong> l’image <strong>de</strong> l’Autre dans ce type <strong>de</strong> <strong>text</strong>e.<br />

Rezumat<br />

Stăpânirea unei limbi străine impune, în afara cunoştinţelor <strong>de</strong> limbă, o bună cunoaştere a<br />

aspectelor socio-culturale ale comunităţii care vorbeşte această limbă. Pornind <strong>de</strong> la teoria lui <strong>de</strong><br />

Saussure privind triunghiul semiotic semnificant, semnificat, referent, se poate asimila acest<br />

triunghi, genezei umorului şi se poate afirma semnificantul ar reprezenta latura lingvistică a<br />

turnurii umoristice, semnificatul ar fi conceptul şi sensul ascuns al turnurii în timp ce referentul ar<br />

putea reprezenta con<strong>text</strong>ul socio-cultural care produce turnura umoristică.<br />

Lucrarea <strong>de</strong> faţă îşi propune studierea relaţiei dintre <strong>text</strong>ul umoristic şi referenţii socio-culturali<br />

care <strong>de</strong>termină <strong>de</strong>codarea imaginii alterităţii în acest tip <strong>de</strong> <strong>text</strong>.<br />

77


Annals of the “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of GALAŢI<br />

Fascicle XIII, Language and Literature. New Series. Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009. ISSN 1221-4647<br />

Book reviews editor: Gabriela Iuliana COLIPCĂ<br />

BALKANISTICA. VOLUME 17<br />

Edited by Donald L. Dyer<br />

Published for the South East European Studies Association<br />

The University of Mississippi, 2004, 196 p.<br />

Ce nouveau volume <strong>de</strong> Balkanistica, dont la publication a été<br />

différée juste pour qu’elle coïnci<strong>de</strong> avec la célébration du<br />

trentième anniversaire <strong>de</strong> ce projet – actuellement soutenu par<br />

l’Association pour les Étu<strong>de</strong>s sur l’Europe <strong>de</strong> Sud-Est, a été mis à la<br />

disposition <strong>de</strong>s spécialistes qui s’y intéressent à l’ocassion <strong>de</strong> la<br />

Quatorzième Conférence Biennale <strong>de</strong> Linguistique, Littérature et<br />

Folklore <strong>de</strong>s Peuples Balkaniques et Slaves Sud-Européens,<br />

organisée par l’Université Oxford <strong>de</strong> Mississippi, du 14 au 17<br />

avril 2005. Ayant l’intention première <strong>de</strong> mettre en relief le<br />

progrès considérable dans ce domaine d’étu<strong>de</strong>, l’éditeur<br />

Donald L. Dyer a inclu dans le volume <strong>de</strong>s articles ainsi que<br />

<strong>de</strong>s compte-rendus <strong>de</strong> plusieurs livres portant sur <strong>de</strong> divers<br />

sujets, jugés en quelque sorte représentatifs <strong>de</strong>s<br />

métamorphoses <strong>de</strong>s cultures <strong>de</strong>s régions sud-européennes<br />

dans un climat historique, social et politique très mouvementé.<br />

La série <strong>de</strong>s articles commence par une étu<strong>de</strong> intitulée Bulgaria’s Divi<strong>de</strong>d Minds ? On<br />

Zhelyu Zhelev’s “Conformist Dissent” (Les esprits divisés <strong>de</strong> la Bulgarie ? Sur la «dissi<strong>de</strong>nce<br />

conformiste» <strong>de</strong> Zhelyu Zhelev) que <strong>Jos</strong>ette Baer <strong>de</strong> l’Université Washington <strong>de</strong> Seattle dédie aux<br />

thèses philosophiques du premier prési<strong>de</strong>nt démocratiquement élu <strong>de</strong> la Bulgarie. Pour<br />

démontrer que la politique <strong>de</strong> Zhelev a été pronfondément liée à sa conception essentiellement<br />

phénoménologique, l’auteur se concentre surtout – tel que le titre l’indique – sur l’analyse du<br />

concept <strong>de</strong> «dissi<strong>de</strong>nce conformiste» et cherche à établir d’étroites connexions entre la théorie<br />

<strong>de</strong> l’in<strong>de</strong>structibilité <strong>de</strong> l’individu que Zhelev développe dans son livre L’Homme et ses<br />

personnalités (Man and His Personalities), et la relation entre les intellectuels et le pouvoir d’État<br />

dans la Bulgarie socialiste <strong>de</strong>s années 1970 et 1980. Relevant plutôt du subjectivisme <strong>de</strong><br />

Hei<strong>de</strong>gger que <strong>de</strong> l’idée <strong>de</strong> résponsabilité universelle <strong>de</strong> Patocka, l’in<strong>de</strong>structibilité en tant que<br />

facette capitale <strong>de</strong> l’individualité semble être au cœur <strong>de</strong> la conception <strong>de</strong> contestation<br />

politique <strong>de</strong> Zhelev, qui est totallement différente <strong>de</strong> celle du dissi<strong>de</strong>nt tchèque Vaclav Havel,<br />

encourageant la critique ouverte du régime politique, mais s’avérant représentatif pour le type<br />

traditionnel <strong>de</strong> réaction critique et pourtant passive <strong>de</strong>s intellectuels bulgares. Le cas <strong>de</strong><br />

Zhelev, avec sa trajectoire dans la vie culturelle du régime <strong>de</strong> Zhivkov, que présente la secon<strong>de</strong><br />

partie <strong>de</strong> l’article, témoigne ainsi, dans une certaine mesure, <strong>de</strong>s caractéristiques <strong>de</strong> toute une<br />

classe d’intelligentsia bulgare à qui l’évolution <strong>de</strong> la politique culturelle menée en Bulgarie<br />

pendant presqu’un siècle, et surtout à l’époque socialiste, a appris à joindre la conformité à la<br />

dissi<strong>de</strong>nce, mais qui, dès que le con<strong>text</strong>e politique le lui a permis, a ouvertement exprimé <strong>de</strong>s<br />

idées libérales «in<strong>de</strong>structibles» et a pu se manifester librement sur la scène politique du<br />

nouveau régime démocratique.<br />

Bien qu’il traite <strong>de</strong>s aspects <strong>de</strong> la même sphère <strong>de</strong>s relations entre le régime politique et<br />

la vie culturelle, inévitablement influencée par l’idéologie que le pouvoir lui impose, l’article<br />

suivant, Language and I<strong>de</strong>ology in the Print Media of Post-Soviet Moldova (Langage et idéologie dans<br />

la presse écrite <strong>de</strong> la Moldova post-soviétique), par Matthew H. Ciscel <strong>de</strong> l’Université Centrale <strong>de</strong><br />

Connecticut, propose un autre type d’approche et un autre espace culturel en tant qu’objet<br />

78


d’étu<strong>de</strong>. Il s’agit <strong>de</strong>s conséquences <strong>de</strong>s multiples orientations politiques et idéologiques qui se<br />

manifestent dans la Moldova post-soviétique sur la perception <strong>de</strong> l’i<strong>de</strong>ntité nationale et<br />

linguistique telle qu’elle se reflète dans les médias moldaves et principalement dans trois<br />

journaux <strong>de</strong> Chişinău publiés en roumain, Ţara (Le Pays), Săptămâna (La Semaine) et Comunistul<br />

(Le Communiste). Une présentation détaillée <strong>de</strong>s moments historiques qui ont marqué<br />

définitivement les relations entre la République <strong>de</strong> Moldova, la Roumanie et le pouvoir<br />

soviétique et qui ont conduit implicitement à la crise actuelle d’i<strong>de</strong>ntité nationale et<br />

linguistique dans la région, suivie par la discussion et la re-définition <strong>de</strong>s termes-clefs <strong>de</strong><br />

l’étu<strong>de</strong> – langage, pouvoir, idéologie et nation – en partant <strong>de</strong>s théories déjà consacrées <strong>de</strong><br />

Bakhtin, Bourdieu, Woolard, etc., assure le cadre théorique nécessaire pour l’analyse<br />

minutieuse du discours <strong>de</strong>s trois journaux qui semble jouer encore un rôle essentiel dans la<br />

dynamique du processus <strong>de</strong> négociation <strong>de</strong> l’i<strong>de</strong>ntité nationale. Ainsi, on démontre que les<br />

médias, qui portent simultanément les traces linguistiques <strong>de</strong> plusieurs idéologies (proroumaine<br />

extrémiste, modérée et pro-russe soutenant la soi-disante idéntité distinctement<br />

moldave), reflètent et, en même temps, encouragent l’instabilité du climat politique, social et<br />

culturel.<br />

On continue avec un bref article, i nëmur ‘poor, (ac)cursed,’ Geg nâmë ‘curse’ (i nëmur<br />

‘pauvre, maudit’, l’Albanais nâmë ‘malédiction’), dans lequel Eric P. Hamp <strong>de</strong> l’Université <strong>de</strong><br />

Chicago se donne pour but <strong>de</strong> démêler, par une rigoureuse analyse lexicologique, le sens du<br />

mot albanais nâmë (malédiction/ pauvreté)<br />

L’éditeur invite aussi les lecteurs explorer, avec Christopher Lamont <strong>de</strong> l’Université <strong>de</strong><br />

Mississippi, l’impact du nationalisme sur la vie politique et l’opinion publique croates dans<br />

une étu<strong>de</strong> qui se place plutôt à la limite entre les étu<strong>de</strong>s culturelles et purement historiques (A<br />

New Croatian Right : Nationalist Political Parties and Contemporary Croatian Politics – Une nouvelle<br />

droite croate : les partis politiques nationalistes et la politique croate contemporaine). Une présentation<br />

du système <strong>de</strong>s partis politiques <strong>de</strong> la Croatie indépendante sert <strong>de</strong> préambule à l’analyse <strong>de</strong>s<br />

éléments nationalistes dans la politique <strong>de</strong>s partis <strong>de</strong> droite (parmi lesquels le plus important<br />

et le plus large serait l’Union Démocratique Croate HDZ) et <strong>de</strong> la façon dont ceux-ci ont<br />

contribué, en plus ou moins large mesure, à leur succès dans les scrutins nationaux.<br />

Interprétant les données statistiques qui indiquent l’ascension ou, au contraire, la baisse <strong>de</strong> la<br />

popularité <strong>de</strong> certains partis aux yeux <strong>de</strong> l’électorat croate, Christophe Lamont semble arriver<br />

toujours à la même conclusion : que la politique et la transition vers un régime démocratique<br />

en Croatie continuent à être marquées par <strong>de</strong>s tensions (vu la mémoire <strong>de</strong>s crimes <strong>de</strong> guerre, la<br />

situation <strong>de</strong>s réfugiés, l’échec du gouvernement dans les négociations avec l’Union<br />

Européenne et l’OTAN) qui peuvent, à la longue, provoquer l’émergence d’une nouvelle<br />

vague <strong>de</strong> nationalisme au début du XXI siècle.<br />

Les <strong>de</strong>ux <strong>de</strong>rniers articles mettent en discussion les problèmes <strong>de</strong> la politique<br />

contemporaine à grand impact sur la vie sociale et culturelle <strong>de</strong>s nations sud-européennes<br />

après la chute <strong>de</strong>s régimes communistes. L’article Archival Gleanings on Russian Tra<strong>de</strong> and<br />

Consulates in the Near East (En glanant <strong>de</strong>s données <strong>de</strong>s archives concernant le commerce et les<br />

consulats russes au Proche-Orient) <strong>de</strong> Theophilus C. Prousis <strong>de</strong> l’Université <strong>de</strong> la Flori<strong>de</strong> du<br />

Nord est issu <strong>de</strong> l’intérêt <strong>de</strong> l’auteur pour l’étu<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> la politique à multiple facettes <strong>de</strong> l’Empire<br />

Russe au XIXe siècle à l’égard <strong>de</strong>s peuples et <strong>de</strong>s régions <strong>de</strong> l’ancient Empire ottoman, dont le<br />

but principal était d’étendre l’influence tsariste vers le sud, <strong>de</strong> renouer avec le mon<strong>de</strong><br />

orthodoxe dans les Balkans et d’encourager le développement du commerce dans la Mer Noire<br />

et la Méditerranée. En fait, le but <strong>de</strong> cet article n’est pas <strong>de</strong> simplement décrire <strong>de</strong>s faits<br />

historiques, mais plutôt d’informer tous ceux qui s’intéressent à ce sujet, surtout les spécialistes<br />

occi<strong>de</strong>ntaux, concernant les nouvelles possibilités <strong>de</strong> recherche qui se sont présentées dès<br />

qu’on a permis l’accès aux Archives <strong>de</strong>s Affaires Étrangères <strong>de</strong> l’Empire Russe (AVPRI) <strong>de</strong><br />

Moscou. Selon Prousis, étudier <strong>de</strong>s archives si vastes et riches en informations permettrait au<br />

moins d’éclairer d’un jour nouveau la complexité <strong>de</strong> la politique impériale et l’interaction <strong>de</strong><br />

79


l’empire avec les peuples du Proche-Orient.<br />

La série d’articles se clôt par une vaste étu<strong>de</strong> purement linguistique, bien structurée,<br />

intitulée Expressivity and a Pragmatic Constraint on Object Reduplication in Bulgarian (L’expressivité<br />

et une contrainte pragmatique imposée au redoublement <strong>de</strong> l’objet en bulgare), dans laquelle Ivelina<br />

Tchizmarova <strong>de</strong> l’Université d’État <strong>de</strong> Ball essaie <strong>de</strong> mettre en évi<strong>de</strong>nce les fonctions<br />

pragmatiques qu’on attache au phénomène du redoublement <strong>de</strong> l’objet (RO) dans la langue<br />

bulgare. Des détails extraits <strong>de</strong> la littérature <strong>de</strong> spécialité concernant cette particularité <strong>de</strong> la<br />

syntaxe bulgaire et la fonction pragmatique que les linguistes lui ont traditionnellement<br />

attachée, c’est-à-dire exprimer un sens d’actualité, précè<strong>de</strong>nt une analyse originale qui peut<br />

relever encore d’autres fonctions, mais aussi <strong>de</strong>s contraintes pragmatiques dans le cas du RO.<br />

Son argument <strong>de</strong> base, toujours bien soutenu par <strong>de</strong>s exemples, est celui selon lequel le RO<br />

peut servir comme marque d’expressivité, par sa capacité <strong>de</strong> refléter l’attitu<strong>de</strong> et les émotions<br />

<strong>de</strong> celui qui parle envers le(s) référent(s), ou comme indicateur du <strong>de</strong>gré d’importance attachée<br />

à une certaine information dans le processus <strong>de</strong> communication. On montre <strong>de</strong> la sorte que la<br />

fonction expressive du RO est implicitement liée à une contrainte pragmatique à l’égard du<br />

statut et <strong>de</strong> la précision <strong>de</strong> l’information et on ouvre la voie à d’autres investigations plus<br />

détaillées sur le RO et ses fonctions pragmatiques en bulgare.<br />

La secon<strong>de</strong> partie du volume est composée <strong>de</strong> compte-rendus, détaillés parfois sous<br />

forme d’articles. Les sujets que les livres présentés développent sont aussi (sinon encore plus)<br />

variés que ceux <strong>de</strong>s articles déjà mentionnés. Certains traitent <strong>de</strong>s effets <strong>de</strong>s régimes politiques<br />

et <strong>de</strong>s changements dans la société sur l’i<strong>de</strong>ntité nationale (et non seulement), surtout dans les<br />

régions qui, à l’époque post-soviétique et post-communiste, ont été le théâtre <strong>de</strong> guerre entre<br />

<strong>de</strong> diverses ethnies telles que les Serbes et les Croates <strong>de</strong> l’ancienne Yougoslavie. Il y a, parmi<br />

ceux-ci, <strong>de</strong>s ouvrages d’anthropologie politique qui se concentrent sur les <strong>de</strong>rnières<br />

transformations <strong>de</strong> la vie <strong>de</strong> ces peuples comme, par exemple, Politics of I<strong>de</strong>ntity in Serbia (Des<br />

opinions politiques sur l’i<strong>de</strong>ntité en Serbie) par Ivan Čolović. Des étu<strong>de</strong>s diachroniques <strong>de</strong>s<br />

relations inter-ethniques comme Kosovo : Background to a War (Kosovo: Théâtre <strong>de</strong> guerre) par<br />

Stephen Schwartz, History of the Serbs in Croatia and Slavonia 1848-1914 (L’Histoire <strong>de</strong>s Serbes <strong>de</strong><br />

Croatie et <strong>de</strong> Slovénie) et Biskup Strosmejer u svetlu novih izvora - ‘Bishop Strossmayer in Light of New<br />

Sources’ (L’évêque Strossmayer redécouvert à la lumière <strong>de</strong> nouvelles sources) par Vasilje Dj. Krestić<br />

et la collection d’essais <strong>de</strong> Milorad Ekmečić, Dijalog prošlosti i sadašnjosti: Zbornik radova –<br />

‘Dialogue of the Past with the Present : Collected Studies’ (Dialogues du passé avec le présent : une<br />

collection d’étu<strong>de</strong>s) s’y ajoutent. D’autres ouvrages analysent <strong>de</strong> multiples points <strong>de</strong> vue <strong>de</strong>s<br />

réalités historiques et sociales d’autres espaces. Celui <strong>de</strong> Theophilus C. Prousis continue et<br />

développe le même sujet introduit dans l’article présenté ci-<strong>de</strong>ssus, c’est-à-dire l’investigation,<br />

à l’ai<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s documents recueillis dans <strong>de</strong>s collections et <strong>de</strong>s archives, <strong>de</strong>s relations entre les<br />

<strong>de</strong>ux empires russe et ottoman dans le Levant (Russian-Ottoman Relations in the Levant : The<br />

Dashkov Archive – Les relations russo-ottomanes dans le Levant : Les Archives Dashkov). Concerné<br />

par une partie seulement <strong>de</strong> l’espace géographique à peine nommé, le volume <strong>de</strong> Nikolai<br />

Todorov, Society, the City and Industry in the Balkans, 15th-19th Centuries (La société, la ville et<br />

l’industrie dans les Balkans, les 15 e-19 e siècles) relève d’une manière diachronique sélective<br />

plusieurs moments importants du développement <strong>de</strong> la civilisation urbaine <strong>de</strong>s Balkans. Les<br />

étu<strong>de</strong>s d’ethnographie n’y manquent pas non plus: l’une combine avec succès l’approche<br />

ethnographique à l’antropologie pour souligner particulièrement les conséquences <strong>de</strong>s<br />

changements <strong>de</strong>s relations entre les <strong>de</strong>ux sexes pour les femmes albanaises (Women Who<br />

Become Men: Albanian Sworn Virgins – Des Femmes qui <strong>de</strong>viennent <strong>de</strong>s hommes: Celles qui ont fait<br />

serment <strong>de</strong> rester vierges par Antonia Young). La secon<strong>de</strong>, qui se présente en fait sous la forme<br />

d’une collection d’essais édités par Ruth Man<strong>de</strong>l et Caroline Humphrey (Markets and Moralities:<br />

Ethnographies of Post-Socialism – Marchés et Mœurs: Ethnographies <strong>de</strong> l’époque post-communiste),<br />

met l’accent sur la re-négociation <strong>de</strong>s tabous et la re-structuration <strong>de</strong>s co<strong>de</strong>s moraux dans le<br />

con<strong>text</strong>e du développement <strong>de</strong> l’économie <strong>de</strong> marché dans tous les pays antérieurement<br />

80


asservis au régime communiste qui s’éten<strong>de</strong>nt <strong>de</strong> l’Estonie vers le nord, jusqu’à la Mongolie<br />

vers l’est, les Balkans y compris.<br />

Sont intégrés au volume <strong>de</strong>s compte-rendus <strong>de</strong> livres qui traitent <strong>de</strong>s aspects <strong>de</strong> la vie<br />

culturelle <strong>de</strong>s peuples sud-européens. On fournit par ce biais <strong>de</strong>s précisions sur <strong>de</strong>s ouvrages<br />

concernés par les architectures hongroise et serbe ou sur l’art juif <strong>de</strong> Roumanie, tels: The<br />

Architecture of Historic Hungary (L’architecture <strong>de</strong> la Hongrie historique), édité par Dora<br />

Wiebenson et Jozsef Sisa, Mo<strong>de</strong>rnism in Serbia: The Elusive Margins of Belgra<strong>de</strong> Architecture (Le<br />

mo<strong>de</strong>rnisme en Serbie: Les marges insaisissables <strong>de</strong> l’architecture <strong>de</strong> Belgra<strong>de</strong>) <strong>de</strong> Ljiljana Blagojevič<br />

et, respectivement, Treasures of Jewish Art: The 1673 Illuminated Scroll of Esther Offered to a<br />

Romanian Hierarch (Trésors <strong>de</strong> l’art juif: le manuscrit enluminé d’Esther offert en 1673 à un hiérarque<br />

roumain) <strong>de</strong> Cornelia Bo<strong>de</strong>a. Les succès <strong>de</strong> la cinématographie <strong>de</strong> l’ancienne Yougoslavie sont<br />

popularisés à travers le volume <strong>de</strong> Dina Iordanova sur la vie et la création du plus grand <strong>de</strong> ses<br />

metteurs en scène, Emir Kusturica (Emir Kusturica: BFI World Director Series – Emir Kusturica :<br />

Collection ‘Metteurs en scène du mon<strong>de</strong>’ <strong>de</strong> l’IBF). A ceux qui s’intéressent surtout à l’étu<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>s<br />

langues du Sud-Est <strong>de</strong> l’Europe, on suggère <strong>de</strong> consulter, par exemple, un dictionnaire <strong>de</strong> mots<br />

d’origine turque entrés dans la langue bulgare (A Dictionary of Turkisms in Bulgarian – Un<br />

dictionnaire <strong>de</strong> mots d’origine turque en bulgare par Alf Grannes, Kjetil Rå Hauge et Hazrize<br />

Sülemanoğlu) et surtout d’approfondir leurs connaissances en dialectologie balkanique, en<br />

lisant soit l’étu<strong>de</strong> Albanskij gegkij govor sela Muhurr (kraina Dibër): Sintaksis, Leksika,<br />

Ètnolingvistika, Teksty ‘The Albanian Geg Dialect of the Village of Muhurr (Dibër region) : Syntax,<br />

Lexicon, Ethnolinguistics, Texts’ – Le dialecte albanais geg du village <strong>de</strong> Muhurr (région <strong>de</strong> Dibër):<br />

syntaxe, lexique, ethnolinguistique, <strong>text</strong>es coordonné par Dželjal’ Jully [Xhelal Ylli] et Andrej N.<br />

Sobolev, ou, pour acquérir une vue d’ensemble, la collection d’essais Grundfragen eines<br />

Südosteuropasprachatlas: Geschichte, Problematik, Perspektive, Konzeption, Metho<strong>de</strong>, Pilotprojekt<br />

‘Foundational Questions of a Southeast European Language Atlas : History, Problems, Perspectives,<br />

Conception, Methods, Pilot Project’ (Questions <strong>de</strong> base pour un atlas <strong>de</strong>s langues sud-est européennes:<br />

histoire, problèmes, perspectives, conception, métho<strong>de</strong>s, projet pilote) éditée par Helmut Schaller.<br />

Enfin, on fait référence à <strong>de</strong>s œuvres littéraires qui représentent <strong>de</strong>s témoignages <strong>de</strong><br />

l’héritage culturel <strong>de</strong> l’espace roumain. D’une part, l’article compte-rendu <strong>de</strong> Marina Cap-Bun<br />

<strong>de</strong> l’Université Ovidius <strong>de</strong> Constanţa (The Symbolism of Light in Ion Creangă’s Memories of My<br />

Boyhood – Le symbolisme <strong>de</strong> la lumière dans les Mémoires d’enfance <strong>de</strong> Ion Creangă) rend hommage à<br />

l’un <strong>de</strong>s plus grands et aimés écrivains roumains, Ion Creangă, dont l’œuvre fondamentale,<br />

Amintiri din copilărie (Mémoires d’enfance), a enchanté <strong>de</strong>s générations entières <strong>de</strong> lecteurs. Pour<br />

que le public étranger découvre pleinement la complexité <strong>de</strong> ce « roman » d’enfance et qu’on le<br />

convainque qu’il mérite d’être rangé parmi les autobiographies spirituelles les plus achevées<br />

<strong>de</strong> la littérature universelle, l’auteur s’attache à souligner, en particulier, le riche symbolisme<br />

<strong>de</strong> la lumière, à valeur thérapeutique, dont les images <strong>de</strong>s enfants, <strong>de</strong> la famille, <strong>de</strong>s gens et <strong>de</strong>s<br />

paysages du village sont chargées, par rapport à l’obscurité associée à l’âge adulte, à la<br />

solitu<strong>de</strong>, à la maladie, à la dépression, à la menace du mon<strong>de</strong> extérieur et, finalement, à la<br />

mort. D’autre part, bien qu’il ne soit pas écrit par un Roumain et qu’il n’arrive pas, à cause <strong>de</strong><br />

nombreuses exagérations et simplifications inopportunes, à créer l’impression d’objectivité,<br />

l’ouvrage à saveur <strong>de</strong> roman d’espionnage <strong>de</strong> Donald Dunham intitulé Assignment Bucharest:<br />

An American Diplomat’s View of the Communist Takeover of Romania (Mission Bucarest : Le point <strong>de</strong><br />

vue d’un diplomate américain à l’égard <strong>de</strong> la prise <strong>de</strong> pouvoir par les communistes en Roumanie)<br />

mérite, toutefois, d’être mentionné et <strong>de</strong>vrait être étudié pour déterminer les stéréotypes qui<br />

dominent la perception <strong>de</strong>s observateurs occi<strong>de</strong>ntaux sur la société roumaine après la secon<strong>de</strong><br />

guerre mondiale.<br />

En somme, cette collection d’articles et <strong>de</strong> compte-rendus peut être utile à tous ceux qui<br />

s’intéressent aux étu<strong>de</strong>s culturelles, plus spécialement quand elles prennent comme objet<br />

d’étu<strong>de</strong> l’espace sud-est européen. Il est vrai que sa structure peut apparaître plutôt sans<br />

rigueur, qu’il est parfois difficile à accepter la gran<strong>de</strong> diversité <strong>de</strong>s sujets abordés et qu’une<br />

81


sélection thématique eût été, peut-être, une meilleure solution pour cette édition anniversaire.<br />

Mais, en tout cas, il faut remarquer comme un point fort du volume qu’il s’agit d’étu<strong>de</strong>s<br />

originales, élaborées avec un grand soin et soutenues par une argumentation cohérente,<br />

permettant aux lecteurs <strong>de</strong> s’informer sur <strong>de</strong>s aspects qui - en raison du climat politique - n’ont<br />

pas pu être ouvertement débattus pendant une longue pério<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> temps. Si, à l’ai<strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong> telles<br />

publications, on réussit à franchir <strong>de</strong>s barrières culturelles et <strong>de</strong> mentalité, à mieux entendre les<br />

mécanismes <strong>de</strong>s changements <strong>de</strong> la société, à faire connaître au mon<strong>de</strong> occi<strong>de</strong>ntal les<br />

caractéristiques d’un univers culturel perçu d’abord avec <strong>de</strong>s préjugés, l’hétérogénéité du<br />

volum ne semble plus un point faible, mais peut être conçu comme un point fort. C’est<br />

pourquoi nous recommandons chaleureusement une lecture intégrale ou partielle <strong>de</strong> ce<br />

<strong>de</strong>rnier volume <strong>de</strong> Balkanistica.<br />

THE CULTURAL TURN IN TRANSLATION STUDIES<br />

Rodica Dimitriu<br />

Institutul European, Iaşi, 2006, 244 p.<br />

82<br />

Gabriela Iuliana Colipcă<br />

Volumul <strong>de</strong> faţă se înscrie în seria „Traductologie” a editurii<br />

ieşene şi le este <strong>de</strong>stinat cu prioritate masteranzilor şi<br />

doctoranzilor în domeniu. Ei pot beneficia <strong>de</strong> şapte sinteze<br />

care trec puntea dintre cercetare şi prelegere. Sunt cele şapte<br />

capitole ale cărţii, elaborate <strong>de</strong> autoare după o reţetă<br />

răsturnată ad-hoc dintr-un adagiu latin: „non multum, sed<br />

multa”. Fără a face neapărat concesii tineretului studios, prof.<br />

univ. Rodica Dimitriu adoptă ton tranşant pentru ju<strong>de</strong>căţi <strong>de</strong><br />

valoare şi caracterizări simplificatoare uşor memorabile,<br />

precum şi atenţie sporită pentru secţiunile intitulate activităţi<br />

şi <strong>de</strong>zbateri (“Activities and discussions”) la fiecare final <strong>de</strong><br />

capitol.<br />

Depistarea turnurii culturale pe care o cunoaşte în<br />

perioada recentă traductologia se face în următoarea ordine<br />

tematică: normare polisistemică (Andrew Chesterman, Gi<strong>de</strong>on<br />

Toury), şcoala manipulării (André Lefevere), abordări filosofice (hermeneutica traducerii la<br />

George Steiner şi <strong>de</strong>constructivismul lui Jacques Derrida), statutul traducătorului invizibil în<br />

viziunea lui Lawrence Venuti şi al celui subiectiv în viziunea lui Douglas Robinson,<br />

traducerea şi studiile <strong>de</strong> gen (strategii feministe la Lori Chamberlain), postcolonialismul cu<br />

relevantele asimetrii ale puterii (Rosemary Arrojo) şi <strong>de</strong>colonizarea traducerilor (Gayatri<br />

Spivak). Subliniem că autorii formând baza documentară a volumului sunt mult mai<br />

numeroşi <strong>de</strong>cât ne-am permis să enumerăm. Şi încă un aspect: probabil va mai trece ceva<br />

timp până când ne vom obişnui, urmând propunerea din 1990 a lui Mary Snell-Hornby, să<br />

privim cultura – şi nu <strong>text</strong>ul – ca unitate <strong>de</strong> bază în traducere.<br />

Construind un ansamblu care să îndrume spre reflecţie asupra legăturilor dintre<br />

traducere, literatură şi cultură, Rodica Dimitriu adoptă un discurs specializat, dar precaut<br />

totodată, ca să nu <strong>de</strong>scurajeze un cititor mai puţin iniţiat în teoretizări aca<strong>de</strong>mice.<br />

Dimpotrivă, cartea poate contribui cu succes la ceea ce-şi doresc toţi dascălii: relansarea<br />

interesului tinerilor pentru culturi traduse şi, eventual, asimilate prin noi ordini valorice<br />

propuse <strong>de</strong> cercetători consacraţi ai ultimelor patru <strong>de</strong>cenii. Textele utile, alese pentru<br />

exersare sau seminarizare, vin în sprijinul glosării pe i<strong>de</strong>i care aparţin unei memorii larg<br />

culturale, care să amintească, între altele, <strong>de</strong> grila <strong>de</strong> lucru precomunistă, contrapusă grilei<br />

comuniste; dar şi <strong>de</strong> postcomunismul care începe să se cristalizeze într-un canon propriu.


Prefaţându-şi volumul, autoarea justifică apariţia în a doua anexă a unui articol<br />

semnat Walter Benjamin, datat 1923 şi scris în limba germană. Este vorba <strong>de</strong> un eseu care a<br />

circulat în limba engleză cu titlul The Task of the Translator şi care a influenţat multe puncte <strong>de</strong><br />

ve<strong>de</strong>re expuse în carte. Eseistul este persuasiv în a arăta că între original şi traducere nu<br />

trebuie să existe asemănare, ci înrudire. Metaforizând, vasul e spart şi punem cioburile într-o<br />

închipuire <strong>de</strong> vas nou. Fi<strong>de</strong>litatea formei e o eroare, dacă se transformă în intenţie majoră.<br />

Bucăţelele contează atunci când se potrivesc între ele, ca să satisfacă cerinţe <strong>de</strong> armonie. Iar<br />

lingvistul-traducător trăieşte o mare satisfacţie când eseistul-teoretician este în căutarea<br />

semnificaţiilor culturale recuperabile, nu atât prin asemănarea mai mult sau mai puţin vagă<br />

între două limbi, ci prin complementarităţile lor din planul inefabilului.<br />

Subliniem în finalul acestei recenzii că meritele volumului The Cultural Turn in<br />

Translation Studies sunt rezultatul <strong>de</strong>cantat al unor ani <strong>de</strong> experienţă „ex cathedra” în<br />

abordarea problemelor filologice ridicate <strong>de</strong> perspective diverse asupra traducerii şi<br />

traducătorului.<br />

COMUNICARE CULTURALĂ ŞI COMUNICARE LINGVISTICĂ ÎN SPAŢIUL<br />

EUROPEAN<br />

Ioan Oprea<br />

Institutul European, Iaşi, 2008, 455 p.<br />

83<br />

Daniela Ţuchel<br />

A-l citi pe profesorul universitar Ioan Oprea înseamnă a te<br />

simţi filolog şi când nu eşti. Discursul nu este doar limpe<strong>de</strong> şi<br />

instructiv, dar conţine <strong>de</strong> asemenea elemente ataşante în<br />

formule precum calificativele blagiene <strong>de</strong> major şi minor, care<br />

<strong>de</strong> fapt nu sugerează gradaţii în cultură. Noi, ca români, ne<br />

liniştim cu aprecierea că „<strong>de</strong>şi este prima care se manifestă<br />

din punct <strong>de</strong> ve<strong>de</strong>re cronologic, cultura minoră poate dăinui<br />

mai multe milenii, dând impresia atemporalităţii” (25). Ne<br />

gândim şi regândim poziţia în concertul universal şi, <strong>de</strong><br />

multe ori, ne dă mai multă satisfacţie plasarea noastră în<br />

lumea europeană <strong>de</strong>cât în con<strong>text</strong>ul globalizării planetare.<br />

Volumul prof. Oprea ne dă în mod cert un ajutor preţios<br />

pentru a face această încadrare pe baze <strong>de</strong> informaţie<br />

ştiinţifică.<br />

Textul publicitar <strong>de</strong> pe coperta a IV-a promite „prima<br />

lucrare românească extinsă care tratează o sumă <strong>de</strong> aspecte ce<br />

dau unitate Lumii Europene”. Cercetătorul îşi fişează materia în trei părţi, spre care ne<br />

îndreptăm atenţia pentru a <strong>de</strong>scoperi i<strong>de</strong>ile care le dau consistenţă.<br />

Partea întâi ne „învaţă” cum să analizăm principial o cultură şi o limbă. De fapt, pe<br />

Ioan Oprea îl interesează cel mai mult maniera <strong>de</strong> influenţare a acestora. Actualmente nu<br />

absolut toate etniile europene realizează influenţarea pomenită, ci au întâietate grupul<br />

romanic occi<strong>de</strong>ntal şi grupul germanic. Trebuie stabilit cine are statut <strong>de</strong> superioritate în<br />

parteneriatele culturale iniţiate.<br />

Construcţia noastră spirituală a început cu lumea greacă antică, „o moştenire<br />

intelectuală a libertăţii, toleranţei şi exactităţii” (43). Apoi sunt radiografiaţi celţii şi<br />

germanicii scandinavi. Accentul cărţii se mută pe creştinarea europenilor şi pe noua religie<br />

„care are drept dogmă centrală i<strong>de</strong>ea păcatului şi a mântuirii” (55). Epoca mo<strong>de</strong>rnă –<br />

Renaştere, Reformă, Ortodoxia est-europeană – sunt parcurse tot în această parte a<br />

volumului, pentru a se sublinia un mo<strong>de</strong>l vestic („primatul raţionalităţii şi al ordinii”, 77),


<strong>de</strong>osebit <strong>de</strong> mo<strong>de</strong>lul orientului slav (însemnând „sentimentalitatea şi gestul inexplicabil,”<br />

ibi<strong>de</strong>m).<br />

Partea a doua explică în ce sens există o arhitectură a fiecărei limbi şi ce componente îi<br />

asigură specificul. Aici, în această parte, îşi face loc şi gramatica, prin <strong>de</strong>scrierea evoluţiilor<br />

gramaticale <strong>de</strong> la latină la limbile romanice şi <strong>de</strong> la limba germanică comună la limbile<br />

germanice <strong>de</strong> astăzi. Nu sunt neglijate topica din limbile mo<strong>de</strong>rne (205-218) şi creativitatea<br />

lexicală (219-227).<br />

Cea mai lungă parte, a treia, este <strong>de</strong>dicată temeiurilor unităţii lingvistice şi culturale<br />

din patrimoniul european, dat fiind că la tezaurul general fiecare grup <strong>de</strong> limbi şi fiecare<br />

limbă în parte au avut un aport indicat cu acurateţe admirabilă şi exemple relevante <strong>de</strong> către<br />

profesorul Ioan Oprea.<br />

Dată fiind acumularea atâtor informaţii, materialul supraintitulat Ad<strong>de</strong>nda şi intitulat<br />

„Europenismul românilor” (344-398) capătă brusc atractivitate maximă şi reprezintă punctul<br />

<strong>de</strong> ve<strong>de</strong>re şi doct şi patriotic al celui care ar dori ferirea spaţiului românesc <strong>de</strong> „minţi<br />

ruginite” şi înviorarea lui <strong>de</strong> către „minţi tinere, care au în faţă <strong>de</strong>schi<strong>de</strong>rea căilor vieţii” (am<br />

citat ultimele cuvinte ale cărţii).<br />

Dacă elementele acestei recenzii sunt insuficiente celui interesat <strong>de</strong> fenomenele <strong>de</strong><br />

comunicare, o mai amplă edificare asupra direcţiilor şi tezelor volumului se poate obţine<br />

dintr-un grupaj <strong>de</strong> rezumate finale în limbile engleză (413-422), franceză (423-432), germană<br />

(433-444) şi spaniolă (445-455). Iată un util transfer poliglot <strong>de</strong> elemente, probabil un nou<br />

indiciu că am început să gândim şi să lucrăm în cadre europene, prin graiuri diferite, cu un<br />

ansamblu <strong>de</strong> interese ştiinţifice împărtăşite.<br />

EMINESCU. NEGOCIEREA UNEI IMAGINI<br />

Iulian Costache<br />

Cartea Românească, 2008, 372 p.<br />

84<br />

Daniela Ţuchel<br />

În con<strong>text</strong>ul unei „bătălii canonice” dure între valorile<br />

culturale şi naţionale promovate, în literatură, <strong>de</strong><br />

generaţiile paşoptiste şi postpaşoptiste, şi fermitatea<br />

criteriului junimist al autonomiei esteticului, mişcarea <strong>de</strong><br />

impunere a unui nou canon şi <strong>de</strong> necesară<br />

redimensionare a celui vechi este înfăptuită cu multă<br />

ştiinţă şi înţelegere a fenomenului <strong>de</strong> receptare specific,<br />

<strong>de</strong> către Titu Maiorescu, care pune la punct şi execută cu<br />

precizie etapele unei binecunoscute politici culturale.<br />

Astăzi, când „naţionalul şi supranaţionalul nu mai<br />

sunt reprezentaţi prin cei doi versanţi tradiţionali ai<br />

patrimoniului, între care nu există corespon<strong>de</strong>nţe directe,<br />

ci numai corespon<strong>de</strong>nţe simbolice” (8), ca şi în epoca <strong>de</strong> la<br />

1848, elementele care compun canonul sunt girate <strong>de</strong><br />

raportul dinamic dintre imaginile sinelui şi ale Celuilalt,<br />

<strong>de</strong> gradul <strong>de</strong> reprezentativitate şi <strong>de</strong> miza i<strong>de</strong>ntitară pe<br />

care şi-o poate asuma literatura. Procesul <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>ntificare<br />

a sinelui, prin mişcarea formelor literare, ascultă <strong>de</strong><br />

aceleaşi comandamente astăzi, când miturile fondatoare – din unghi cultural şi naţional – sunt<br />

reevaluate, şi în epoca Junimii, când, potrivit lui Iulian Costache, se pun bazele imaginii<br />

publice a poetului naţional, imagine perpetuată, în datele ei esenţiale, până astăzi.<br />

Demonstraţia se face, în principal, pe ediţiile <strong>de</strong> poezie eminesciană îngrijite <strong>de</strong> Maiorescu,


pe „speciile extra-literare <strong>de</strong> discurs”, consi<strong>de</strong>rate, pe bună dreptate, „ambreiori <strong>de</strong> imagine”<br />

(18), ca şi pe formele şi tipurile <strong>de</strong> receptare a <strong>text</strong>elor poetice eminesciene în epocă. Dirijarea<br />

procesului <strong>de</strong> receptare şi a imaginii publice a poetului – asociate mo<strong>de</strong>lului romantic al<br />

geniului, a cărui operă şi conduită sunt plasate sub semnul excepţionalităţii – dove<strong>de</strong>sc o<br />

bună cunoaştere a pieţei culturale şi o practică <strong>de</strong> management cultural fără fisură. Ca<br />

urmare, eul liric intră în scenă asumând poza singurătăţii romantice a poetului, poezia<br />

inaugurală a volumului oferind scenografia simbolică necesară (Singurătate), şi iese<br />

autentificând imaginea, tot romantică, a poetului neînţeles <strong>de</strong> contemporani (Criticilor mei)<br />

(20).<br />

Negocierea şi acceptarea poetului <strong>de</strong> către publicul epocii, în virtutea unei ipostaze<br />

generice (ne)asumate (a se ve<strong>de</strong>a abaterea <strong>de</strong> la direcţionarea junimistă din Epigonii)<br />

presupune o dublă orientare retorică, spre „oferta maximei <strong>de</strong>schi<strong>de</strong>ri a poeziei în raport cu<br />

publicul” – „retorica <strong>de</strong> maximă accesibilitate a romanţei”, şi spre gnomism, „ca ofertă<br />

sapienţială menită a construi un orizont <strong>de</strong> aşteptare comun între cititor şi <strong>text</strong>, pe baza<br />

inducerii unui fond <strong>de</strong> credinţe comune” (20).<br />

De altfel, dirijată cu mână fermă <strong>de</strong> către Titu Maiorescu, receptarea – şi imaginea<br />

publică pe care poetul o dobân<strong>de</strong>şte – se aşază pe două coordonate ce se vor dovedi esenţiale<br />

pentru asimilarea în special a poeziei „minore”, <strong>de</strong> tip romanţă, în epoca marilor Clasici şi<br />

ulterior. Este vorba <strong>de</strong>spre „conduita poetului romantic”, <strong>de</strong>zinteresat <strong>de</strong> cele lumeşti, şi<br />

<strong>de</strong>spre <strong>de</strong>calajul dintre structura spirituală şi morală a omului <strong>de</strong> geniu şi societatea în care<br />

este sortit să trăiască.<br />

Înscriindu-se în mişcarea <strong>de</strong> mare agresiune i<strong>de</strong>ntitară a Junimii, printre promotorii<br />

Direcţiei noi, Eminescu – ca poet public – corespun<strong>de</strong> şi susţine un nou canon literar, şi<br />

serveşte drept instrument strategiei maioresciene <strong>de</strong> <strong>de</strong>plasare a atenţiei <strong>de</strong> la o i<strong>de</strong>ntitate<br />

focalizată – a criticului însuşi, asupra unei i<strong>de</strong>ntităţi <strong>de</strong> grup. Colecţia <strong>de</strong> scriitori ai Direcţiei noi<br />

îl propune pe Eminescu al doilea, imediat după Alecsandri. Iar „selectarea unui poet cu doar<br />

trei poezii într-un top literar şi plasarea sa imediat după autorul reprezentativ” (85)<br />

reprezintă un act <strong>de</strong> curaj al criticului, dar şi dovada unei excelente intuiţii a valorii.<br />

Detractorii binecunoscuţi ai operei emineciene semnalează, unii având încă suportul<br />

i<strong>de</strong>ologiei iluministe, pericolul reprezentat <strong>de</strong> atitudinea pesimistă şi <strong>de</strong> tematica erotică a<br />

poemelor. Preotul greco–catolic Al. Grama se situează, ferm, <strong>de</strong> partea misiunii sociale a artei<br />

şi reacţionează, implicit, criticând <strong>text</strong>ele poetice eminesciene, împotriva mo<strong>de</strong>lului cultural<br />

german, cosmopolit şi perceput, tocmai <strong>de</strong> aceea, ca o alteritate agresivă faţă <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>ea <strong>de</strong><br />

românitate.<br />

Însă la vremea aceea „Eminescu nu este perceput ca fiind scriitorul <strong>de</strong> care adversarii<br />

Junimii să se împiedice. El nu are încă un profil proeminent, fiind încă un scriitor <strong>de</strong> climat,<br />

elocvent nu atât în sine, cât pentru climatul (şi aşa «discutabil») pe care Direcţia nouă încerca<br />

să-l promoveze” (141). De fapt, Maiorescu construieşte un mo<strong>de</strong>l inexistent în realitate, un<br />

prototip în virtutea căruia fundamentele literaturii şi ale culturii române s-ar fi stabilizat<br />

graţie principiului a<strong>de</strong>vărului. Asocierea poeziei eminesciene cu structurile virtuale ale<br />

literaturii române mo<strong>de</strong>rne, pe care Direcţia nouă le contura, cel puţin în articolul<br />

maiorescian cu acelaşi nume, se face în virtutea corespon<strong>de</strong>nţelor tematico–structurale<br />

evi<strong>de</strong>nte. Oferta <strong>de</strong> participare – îndreptată către scriitori – şi <strong>de</strong> receptare – adresată<br />

publicului – viza atât simularea unei noi structuri literare, cât şi stimularea suportului concret–<br />

literar <strong>de</strong> care era nevoie. Altfel spus, Maiorescu elaborează o <strong>de</strong>săvârşită formă fără fond<br />

căreia îi construieşte, apoi, cu migală, din ceea ce epoca îi pune la dispoziţie, fondul.<br />

În această ordine <strong>de</strong> i<strong>de</strong>i, studiul <strong>de</strong> promovare nu atât a poetului, cât a mizei<br />

reprezentate <strong>de</strong> asocierea lui cu Direcţia nouă, Eminescu şi poeziile lui, arată cum „tipul <strong>de</strong><br />

imagine eminesciană propus <strong>de</strong> Maiorescu se <strong>de</strong>finea în chip polemic în raport cu celelalte<br />

imagini evocate, urmând să «împartă» cu acestea spaţiul <strong>de</strong> joc reprezentat <strong>de</strong> «piaţa <strong>de</strong><br />

imagine» a bunurilor culturale” (158).<br />

85


După analiza direcţiei <strong>de</strong> receptare estetice – reprezentată <strong>de</strong> Mihail Dragomirescu şi<br />

<strong>de</strong> Nicolae Petraşcu, cartea lui Iulian Costache evi<strong>de</strong>nţiază particularităţile <strong>de</strong> receptare<br />

specifice <strong>de</strong>mersului critic al lui C. D. Gherea, precum şi ascen<strong>de</strong>nţa semiozei socialului –<br />

Nicolae Iorga şi Garabet Ibrăileanu.<br />

Aspectele cele mai interesante, însă, vin din direcţia (aproape) <strong>de</strong>loc exploatată, până<br />

acum, a semiozei extra-literare, graţie căreia poetul <strong>de</strong>vine un autentic personaj mediatic.<br />

Raportul firesc dintre viaţă şi operă se inversează, odată cu avansarea bolii poetului, viaţa<br />

părând că începe să copieze opera care, prin <strong>text</strong>e <strong>de</strong>venite foarte populare, ca Mai am un<br />

singur dor, <strong>de</strong> exemplu, anticipa simbolic <strong>de</strong>stinul tragic al lui Eminescu şi al omului <strong>de</strong><br />

geniu. Pe măsură ce istoria bolii poetului se va transforma în temă mediatică, în intervalul<br />

1883 – 1889, „curentul eminescian va putea să <strong>de</strong>vină, simbolic, o paradigmă dominantă şi<br />

pentru că va fi reuşit să impună, într-o astfel <strong>de</strong> <strong>text</strong>ură simbolică, imaginea epigonilor ca<br />

interpretanţi eterni ai operei eminesciene, aşa cum vor fi fost ei acceptaţi în cadrele<br />

imaginarului colectiv al epocii” (184).<br />

Dacă ştirile <strong>de</strong>spre starea financiară precară sau <strong>de</strong>spre starea <strong>de</strong> sănătate a poetului,<br />

ori <strong>de</strong>spre listele <strong>de</strong> subscripţie publică reuşesc să construiască o imagine din ce în ce mai<br />

puternică – având şi argumentul operei – Maiorescu, ce îşi asumă iniţiativa editării operei<br />

eminesciene, încearcă să preia şi o parte a controlului asupra imaginii larg vehiculate a<br />

poetului. Mo<strong>de</strong>lul eroului exemplar va sta la baza atitudinii criticului faţă <strong>de</strong> opera şi <strong>de</strong><br />

personalitatea creatoare eminesciană.<br />

De altfel, „temele criticului” transpar în structura volumelor girate <strong>de</strong> Titu Maiorescu.<br />

Prin poezia Singurătate, care <strong>de</strong>schi<strong>de</strong> volumul din 1883, se instituie cunoscuta poză a<br />

poetului romantic – cum aminteam <strong>de</strong>ja ceva mai înainte – drept marcă esenţială fondatoare<br />

a profilului eminescian pe care Maiorescu mizează. Pe baza acestui prim poem, cititorul<br />

<strong>de</strong>vine „beneficiar al unui rit <strong>de</strong> iniţiere” ce susţine „instructajul” prefeţei.<br />

În centrul volumului se află poezia Se bate miezul nopţii, ca „semn al echilibrului<br />

încremenit în ezitarea dintre două lumi”(288–289). Se ajunge, astfel, la o a<strong>de</strong>vărată mască<br />

editorială a poetului pe care, ulterior, ediţia Perpessicius o autentifică suplimentar. Este<br />

imaginea promovată până în zilele noastre <strong>de</strong> canonul didactic şi, încă rezistent la atacuri, <strong>de</strong><br />

canonul oficial estetic.<br />

DE LINGUA UNIVERSALIS.<br />

Petre Rău<br />

Fundaţia Culturală Antares, 2007, 234 p.<br />

86<br />

Simona Antofi<br />

Literatura care îşi propune popularizarea<br />

preocupărilor specifice unor domenii <strong>de</strong> cercetare dintre<br />

cele mai diverse se bucură <strong>de</strong> apariţia, la o editură din<br />

oraşul nostru, a unui mic tratat <strong>de</strong> lingvistică teoretică pe<br />

înţelesul tuturor. Lucrarea, asupra căreia ne oprim în<br />

recenzia <strong>de</strong> faţă şi, pe care autorul ei, Petre Rău, o consi<strong>de</strong>ră<br />

un eseu (223) impresionează prin elementele particulare cu<br />

care (cu certitudine se va) impune în literatura lingvistică<br />

românească. Publicul căruia i se adresează acest volum ar<br />

putea fi <strong>de</strong>scris ca fiind caracterizat <strong>de</strong> o diversitate <strong>de</strong><br />

interese profesionale şi extraprofesionale, pasiuni, vârstă şi,<br />

nu în ultimul rând, <strong>de</strong> nivel <strong>de</strong> cunoştinţe. Exprimarea<br />

simplă şi clară, prezentarea subiectelor în discuţie fără a se<br />

recurge la complexităţi ştiinţifice (<strong>de</strong> tipul notelor <strong>de</strong>


subsol, al notelor explicative amplasate la sfârşit <strong>de</strong> capitol, al explicaţiilor parantetice),<br />

tonul direct şi argumentarea susţinută prin citate asigură accesul cititorului la un conţinut<br />

complex prin problematica abordată.<br />

Perspectiva istorică <strong>de</strong> prezentare a limbii (ca fenomen social, istoric, etnic şi cultural)<br />

şi a limbajelor (naturale, artificiale sau chiar limbajul trupului) se <strong>de</strong>sfăşoară pe parcursul a<br />

douăzecişiopt <strong>de</strong> capitole, echilibrat construite şi astfel înlănţuite încât asigură coerenţa şi<br />

coeziunea scriiturii propuse <strong>de</strong> autor. Cercetarea sistematică şi amănunţită porneşte <strong>de</strong> la<br />

afirmaţiile privind geneza limbajelor, făcând trimiteri la primele noţiuni legate <strong>de</strong> limbaj care<br />

sunt întâlnite în Vechiul Testament, respectiv în Cartea Genezei (8-10) şi, mai apoi, în<br />

capitolul Facerea. Sunt apoi consemnate opinii <strong>de</strong>spre geneza limbajului aparţinând autorilor<br />

lumii antice (Aristotel, 10, Vitruviu, 11), continuând cu păreri ale autorilor (filozofi sau<br />

scriitori) mai apropiaţi <strong>de</strong> zilele noastre (von Her<strong>de</strong>r, Iorga şi Coşeriu, 12-13).<br />

Odată stabilit cadrul general al apariţiei şi utilizării limbii, oricare ar fi aceasta, autorul<br />

ia în discuţie legile comunicării, introducând componentele fundamentale ale procesului <strong>de</strong><br />

comunicare, <strong>de</strong>scriind esenţa acestui proces şi insitând asupra celor mai recente principii ale<br />

comunicării, formulate <strong>de</strong> reprezentanţii Şcolii <strong>de</strong> la Palo Alto (15). Demersul istoric este<br />

evi<strong>de</strong>nt şi în următoarea secvenţă care se opreşte asupra etapelor <strong>de</strong>zvoltării comunicării<br />

umane. După ce vorbeşte <strong>de</strong>pre legăturile dintre gândire şi limbaj, <strong>de</strong>scrise în funcţie <strong>de</strong><br />

diverse teorii, autorul abor<strong>de</strong>ază limbajul ca instrument al comunicării (40-47), pentru a<br />

continua prin sintetizarea în doar un capitol a unui conţinut <strong>de</strong>scris <strong>de</strong> alţi autori într-un<br />

întreg dicţionar al ştiinţelor limbajului. Apreciem conturarea în linii cuprinzătoare a acelor<br />

ştiinţe ale limbajului frecvent menţionate în manualele şcolare şi cursurile universitare şi<br />

anume, fonetica, gramatica, dialectologia, stilistica, istoria limbii, lexicologia, geografia<br />

lingvistică, paleontologia lingvistică, semantica, hermeneutica, poetica, retorica şi semiotica.<br />

Referirile la semiotică se continuă în capitolul <strong>de</strong>spre semn şi comunicare non-verbală, un<strong>de</strong>,<br />

pe lângă referirile lui Ferdinand <strong>de</strong> Saussure la semnificant şi semnificat, se prezintă şi<br />

clasificarea semnelor avansată <strong>de</strong> Pierce, un<strong>de</strong> se au în ve<strong>de</strong>re legăturile dintre semn şi<br />

referent, distingându-se trei tipuri <strong>de</strong> semne: (a) iconice, (b) indiciale şi (c) simbolice.<br />

Procesul <strong>de</strong> comunicare amplu <strong>de</strong>scris, atât la nivelul omului cât şi la cel al<br />

necuvântătoarelor (vezi capitolul Graiul animalelor, 62-73), un<strong>de</strong>, dincolo <strong>de</strong> anecdotica<br />

începutului, şi un<strong>de</strong> se fac referiri la diverse experimente menite a explora posibiliăţile <strong>de</strong><br />

comunicare ale animalelor, scoate în relief şi anumite dificultăţi (vezi capitolul Dificultăţile<br />

comunicării, 74-80). Dincolo <strong>de</strong> aspectele tehniciste ale procesului în sine, comunicarea poate<br />

fi privită şi ca o artă care implică un anumit grad <strong>de</strong> complexitate sugerat prin limbajul<br />

verbal sau cel paraverbal, prin personalitatea strictă a vorbitorului care îşi dozează, în funcţie<br />

<strong>de</strong> scopul comunicării, fie volumul vocii, care „ne ajută să dominăm sau să fim dominaţi”<br />

(83), fie accentul, fie articularea, fie ritmul şi implicit pauzele şi, mai ales, prin cuvintele<br />

folosite. Puterea cuvântului, următoarea secvenţă a eseului, aduce în atenţie nu numai<br />

limitele cuvântului ca reprezentare a realităţii (cum ar fi, <strong>de</strong> exemplu, ambiguitatea,<br />

polisemia, impreciziile, 90), ci şi dinamica oricărui cuvânt, citându-l pe Noica „De îndată ce<br />

apare pe lume, un cuvânt îşi ia libertatea <strong>de</strong> a se schimba. Omul, fireşte, îl foloseşte în toate<br />

felurile şi pentru toate trebuinţele sale ... în aşa fel încât ai cre<strong>de</strong> că istoveşte virtuţile<br />

cuvântului. Dar cuvântul păstreazî pentru el un rest <strong>de</strong> libertate...”<br />

Consi<strong>de</strong>răm <strong>de</strong> interes secţiunea <strong>de</strong>dicată evoluţiei limbilor naturale <strong>de</strong>oarece în ciuda<br />

faptului că autorul începe cu consi<strong>de</strong>raţii cu un grad evi<strong>de</strong>nt <strong>de</strong> generalitate, inclu<strong>de</strong> totuşi în<br />

prezentare şi date statistice privind numărul limbilor cunoscute şi utilizate în prezent ,<br />

aspecte legate <strong>de</strong> limbile pidgin şi creole. Vom puncta aici confuzia referitoare la aceste limbi<br />

hibri<strong>de</strong>: limbile pidgin şi limbile creole nu <strong>de</strong>rivă unele din celelalte (conform celor susţinute<br />

la pagina 106) ci sunt produse ale contactului lingvistic realizat între vorbitorii nativi <strong>de</strong><br />

limba engleză şi băştinaşii vorbitori ai unor dialecte specifice şi bine <strong>de</strong>terminate geografic.<br />

În cazul limbilor pidgin este vorba <strong>de</strong>spre zona Chinei, iar al limbilor creole <strong>de</strong>spre dialectele<br />

87


ăştinaşilor din zona coastei <strong>de</strong> vest a continentului America <strong>de</strong> Sud (pentru mai multe date,<br />

sugerăm consultarea bibliografiei referitoare la istoria limbii engleze) 1.<br />

După un periplu prin mai multe experimente lingvistice şi prin limbajul maimuţelor,<br />

se abor<strong>de</strong>ază domeniul limbilor şi al limbajelor artificiale, făcându-se referiri la limbile<br />

universale <strong>de</strong> tip esperanto, limbajul trupului, limbajele generaţiilor virtuale, pentru a se<br />

încheia cu unele consi<strong>de</strong>raţii legate <strong>de</strong> internet, „autostrada informaţională” (212).<br />

Referinţe<br />

Baugh,A., Cable, Th. (1991). A History of the English Language, London, Routledge.<br />

Floriana Popescu<br />

88


The Annals of “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi.<br />

Fascicle XIII. Language and Literature. New Series<br />

Issue 28, XVI (XXVII), 2009 ISSN 1221- 4647<br />

CONTRIBUTORS<br />

Dr. SIMONA ANTOFI is an associate professor at the Department of Literature,<br />

Linguistics and Journalism, Faculty of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi. She is a<br />

coordinator of research projects and an author of papers exploring such topics as “Cultural<br />

I<strong>de</strong>ntity and Multiculturalism. A Romanian I<strong>de</strong>ntity Profile” (in Cultural Limits and Literature,<br />

Galaţi, 2006) or “Les modèles culturels i<strong>de</strong>ntitaires roumains, <strong>de</strong>s solutions d‘intégration<br />

européenne et d’autolégitimité” (in CEDIMES, Târgovişte, 2006) to name only two of them.<br />

Contact: simoantofi@yahoo.com<br />

Dr. FILIP CRISTIAN BACALU is a young lecturer at Spiru Haret University of<br />

Bucharest, particulalry interested in studying and performing research in the field of<br />

bilingualism. Contact:fc.bacalu@yahoo.com<br />

Dr. ANCA CEHAN is an associate professor of linguistics and applied linguistics at<br />

the Faculty of Letters, the English Department, “Alexandru Ioan Cuza” University of Iaşi.<br />

She has carried out research and published studies in the fields of semantics, ELT<br />

methodology, discourse analysis and pragmatics. Contact: acehan@uaic.ro<br />

ANA-ELENA COSTANDACHE is a young aca<strong>de</strong>mic at the French Department,<br />

Faculty of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi. She is now preparing her doctoral<br />

thesis and she is actively engaged in several research projects. Contact: lily_anghel@yahoo.fr<br />

Dr. GABRIELA IULIANA COLIPCĂ is an associate professor at the Department of<br />

English, Faculty of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi. She prepared and<br />

<strong>de</strong>fen<strong>de</strong>d her doctoral thesis at the University of Lei<strong>de</strong>n, the Netherlands. She currently<br />

teaches Renaissance and eighteenth-century English literature, narratology and film<br />

adaptations. Her research interests are: Renaissance and 18 th-century literature, culture and<br />

civilisation; comparative literature; literary theory and criticism (psychoanalysis,<br />

narratology, feminism); film theory; imagology; cultural analysis; trauma and affect theories;<br />

translation studies. Contact: iuliana75@yahoo.com<br />

Dr. NICOLETA IFRIM is a young aca<strong>de</strong>mic at the Department of Literature,<br />

Linguistics and Journalism, the Faculty of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi. She<br />

<strong>de</strong>fen<strong>de</strong>d her doctoral thesis in Romanian literary studies and she now continues her<br />

research in her field of expertise. Contact: nicodasca@yahoo.com<br />

Dr. GABRIEL ISTODE is a young aca<strong>de</strong>mic at the Department of Applied Mo<strong>de</strong>rn<br />

Languages, the Faculty of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi. He <strong>de</strong>fen<strong>de</strong>d his<br />

doctoral thesis in contrastive studies and he now continues several project research in his<br />

field of expertise. Contact: gabriel.isto<strong>de</strong>@ugal.ro<br />

Dr. DOINITA MILEA is a professor of the Department of Literature, Linguistics and<br />

Journalism, Faculty of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi. She teaches<br />

comparative literature and Romanian literature, and her interests focus on remarkable<br />

contributions to <strong>de</strong>vising and managing international projects as well as grants fun<strong>de</strong>d by<br />

the Romanian Aca<strong>de</strong>my. Contact: doinita.milea@ugal.ro<br />

Dr. IOANA MOHOR-IVAN is an associate professor at the English Department,<br />

Faculty of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi. The grants she was awar<strong>de</strong>d by the<br />

89


British Council enabled her to have direct access to Irish culture and literature. Contact:<br />

ioana_mohor@yahoo.com<br />

LIDIA MIHAELA NECULA is a young aca<strong>de</strong>mic of the English Department, Faculty<br />

of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi whose research interests focus on<br />

contemporary English literature. She is now finishing her doctoral thesis and she is involved<br />

in several research projects. Contact: lidiamicky_necula@yahoo.co.uk<br />

Dr. CARMEN OPRIT-MAFTEI, a lecturer at the Department of Applied Mo<strong>de</strong>rn<br />

Languages, the Faculty of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi, <strong>de</strong>fen<strong>de</strong>d her<br />

doctoral thesis in 2007 at “Alexandru Ioan Cuza” University of Iaşi. Involved in individual<br />

research studies, she has published over 20 articles. Contact: c_maftei@ yahoo.com<br />

Dr. FLORIANA POPESCU is a professor of English Language and Applied Linguistics<br />

at the Faculty of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi, Romania. Her research<br />

interests cover the fields of lexicology, translation studies and English for specific purposes.<br />

She has edited 3 books (the latest, Perspectives in Translation Studies, being published in 2009<br />

by Cambridge Scholars Publishing), has authored 4 books and over 60 articles, studies, books<br />

and book reviews and she has contributed to 15 <strong>text</strong>books on the English language<br />

contemporary grammar and other topics. Contact: florianapopescu@yahoo.com<br />

Dr. MICHAELA PRAISLER is a professor of English Literature at the Faculty of<br />

Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi, Romania. Her main research interests are in:<br />

the contemporary novel in English, literary theory and criticism, cultural and film studies.<br />

She has published over 45 articles, essays, reviews and books; from among the titles:<br />

“Media(ted) Discourse. Literary Representations”, “Filmic Translations of Culture”, „The<br />

Contemporary Novel: Pan-Cultural Symbols, Heroes, Rituals”, “A New Treatment for the<br />

Self in/of Fiction: David Lodge, Therapy”, “Fighting Medusa: Fay Weldon’s Big Women”,<br />

“Salman Rushdie’s Wor(l)d: Midnight’s Children”; “On Mo<strong>de</strong>rnism, Postmo<strong>de</strong>rnism and the<br />

Novel”, “For a Psychoanalytical Approach to Literature. Reality and Fiction with Virginia Woolf and<br />

Ernest Hemingway”, “The Contemporary British Literary Scene”.<br />

Contact: mipraisler@yahoo.co.uk<br />

Dr. DANIELA ŞORCARU is a junior lecturer of English Linguistics in the Department<br />

of English Language and Literature of the Faculty of Letters, “Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of<br />

Galaţi, Romania. She has published articles and studies in conference volumes and chapter<br />

contributions to scientific research volumes, most of them focused on stylistic linguistics. An<br />

important contribution has been ma<strong>de</strong> to the 1400-page English–Romanian Dictionary for<br />

Mechanical Engineering, published by E.D.P. in 2009. Contact: daniela_sorcaru@yahoo.com<br />

Dr. DANIELA ŢUCHEL is an associate professor at the English Department, Faculty<br />

of Letters, „Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi. Her research interests cover media<br />

discourse, pragmatic approaches, and interculturality. Contact: tucheldaniela@yahoo.com<br />

Dr. ANGELICA VÂLCU is an associate professor at the French Department, Faculty of<br />

Letters, „Dunărea <strong>de</strong> <strong>Jos</strong>” University of Galaţi. Her research interests cover <strong>text</strong>ual grammar,<br />

and French for specific purposes. Contact: a_valcu@yahoo.fr.<br />

90

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!